Copyright © 2000-2014 The FreeBSD Documentation Project
Copyright
Redistribution and use in source (XML DocBook) and 'compiled' forms (XML, HTML, PDF, PostScript, RTF and so forth) with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
Redistributions of source code (XML DocBook) must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer as the first lines of this file unmodified.
Redistributions in compiled form (transformed to other DTDs, converted to PDF, PostScript, RTF and other formats) must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
THIS DOCUMENTATION IS PROVIDED BY THE FREEBSD DOCUMENTATION PROJECT "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FREEBSD DOCUMENTATION PROJECT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS DOCUMENTATION, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
FreeBSD is a registered trademark of the FreeBSD Foundation.
UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other countries.
Sun, Sun Microsystems, Java, Java Virtual Machine, JDK, JRE, JSP, JVM, Netra, OpenJDK, Solaris, StarOffice, SunOS and VirtualBox are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the United States and other countries.
Many of the designations used by manufacturers and sellers to distinguish their products are claimed as trademarks. Where those designations appear in this document, and the FreeBSD Project was aware of the trademark claim, the designations have been followed by the “™” or the “®” symbol.
gettext
iconv
rc
Scripts)pkg-plist
Practicespkg-*
WRKDIR
WRKDIRPREFIX
bsd.port.mk
exec
Statement in Wrapper
ScriptsCC
and
CXX
CFLAGS
README.html
BROKEN
, FORBIDDEN
, or
IGNORE
DEPRECATED
or
EXPIRATION_DATE
.error
Constructsysctl
Makefile
USES
__FreeBSD_version
ValuesDISTVERSION
and the
Derived PORTVERSION
MASTER_SITE_*
MacrosMASTER_SITES
MacrosUSE_GITHUB
DescriptionUSE_*
configure
cmake
cmake
Buildsscons
qmake
WX_CONF_ARGS
USES
__FreeBSD_version
ValuesUSE_GITHUB
USE_GITHUB
USE_GITHUB
with
DISTVERSIONPREFIX
USE_GITHUB
with Multiple
Distribution FilesMASTER_SITES:n
with One File Per SiteMASTER_SITES:n
with More Than One File Per SiteMASTER_SITES:n
in
MASTER_SITE_SUBDIR
MASTER_SITES:n
with Comma
Operator, Multiple Files, Multiple Sites and
Multiple SubdirectoriesMASTER_SITES:n
with SourceForge (SF
)MASTER_SITES:n
with
PATCH_SITES
ALWAYS_KEEP_DISTFILES
OPTIONS
OPTIONS
OPTIONS
USES= cmake
ExampleUSE_XORG
ExampleUSES= qmake
ExampleUSE_KDE4
Exampleiconv
Usageiconv
Usage with
configure
-liconv
iconv
AvailabilityUSES=xfce
Example@dirrmtryecho
Keyword@sample
is Implementedmake.conf
to Change Default
Perl.error
The FreeBSD Ports Collection is the way almost everyone installs applications ("ports") on FreeBSD. Like everything else about FreeBSD, it is primarily a volunteer effort. It is important to keep this in mind when reading this document.
In FreeBSD, anyone may submit a new port, or volunteer to maintain an existing unmaintained port. No special commit privilege is needed.
Interested in making a new port, or upgrading existing ports? Great!
What follows are some guidelines for creating a new port for FreeBSD. To upgrade an existing port, read this, then read Chapter 10, Upgrading a Port.
When this document is not sufficiently detailed,
refer to /usr/ports/Mk/bsd.port.mk
, which is
included by all port Makefile
s. Even those
not hacking Makefile
s daily can gain much
knowledge from it. Additionally, specific questions can be sent to the
FreeBSD ports mailing list.
Only a fraction of the variables
(
) that can be
overridden are mentioned in this document. Most (if not all)
are documented at the start of
VAR
/usr/ports/Mk/bsd.port.mk
; the others
probably ought to be. Note that this file uses a non-standard
tab setting: Emacs and
Vim will recognize the setting on
loading the file. Both vi(1) and ex(1) can be set to
use the correct value by typing
:set tabstop=4
once the file has been
loaded.
Looking for something easy to start with? Take a look at the list of requested ports and see if you can work on one (or more).
This section describes how to quickly create a new port. For applications where this quick method is not adequate, the full “Slow Porting” process is described in Chapter 4, Slow Porting.
First, get the original tarball and put it into
DISTDIR
, which defaults to
/usr/ports/distfiles
.
These steps assume that the software compiled out-of-the-box. In other words, absolutely no changes were required for the application to work on a FreeBSD system. If anything had to be changed, refer to Chapter 4, Slow Porting.
It is recommended to set the DEVELOPER
make(1) variable in /etc/make.conf
before getting into porting.
#
echo DEVELOPER=yes >> /etc/make.conf
This setting enables the “developer mode”
that displays deprecation warnings and activates some further
quality checks on calling make
.
The minimal Makefile
would look
something like this:
# $FreeBSD$ PORTNAME= oneko PORTVERSION= 1.1b CATEGORIES= games MASTER_SITES= ftp://ftp.cs.columbia.edu/archives/X11R5/contrib/ MAINTAINER= [email protected] COMMENT= Cat chasing a mouse all over the screen .include <bsd.port.mk>
In some cases, the Makefile
of an
existing port may contain additional lines in the header,
such as the name of the port and the date it was created.
This additional information has been declared obsolete, and
is being phased out.
Try to figure it out. Do not worry about the
contents of the $FreeBSD$
line, it will be filled in automatically by
Subversion when the port is
imported to our main ports tree. A more detailed
example is shown in the
sample Makefile
section.
There are two description files that are required for
any port, whether they actually package or not. They are
pkg-descr
and
pkg-plist
. Their
pkg-
prefix distinguishes them from other
files.
This is a longer description of the port. One to a few paragraphs concisely explaining what the port does is sufficient.
This is not a manual or an
in-depth description on how to use or compile the port!
Please be careful when copying from the
README
or manpage. Too
often they are not a concise description of the port or
are in an awkward format. For example, manpages have
justified spacing, which looks particularly bad with
monospaced fonts.
A well-written pkg-descr
describes
the port completely enough that users would not have to
consult the documentation or visit the website to understand
what the software does, how it can be useful, or what
particularly nice features it has. Mentioning certain
requirements like a graphical toolkit, heavy dependencies,
runtime environment, or implementation languages help users
decide whether this port will work for them.
Include a URL to the official WWW homepage. Prepend
one of the websites (pick the most
common one) with WWW:
(followed by single
space) so that automated tools will work correctly. If the
URI is the root of the website or directory, it must be
terminated with a slash.
If the listed webpage for a port is not available, try to search the Internet first to see if the official site moved, was renamed, or is hosted elsewhere.
This example shows how
pkg-descr
looks:
This is a port of oneko, in which a cat chases a poor mouse all over the screen. : (etc.) WWW: http://www.oneko.org/
This file lists all the files installed by the port. It
is also called the “packing list” because the
package is generated by packing the files listed here. The
pathnames are relative to the installation prefix (usually
/usr/local
).
Here is a small example:
bin/oneko man/man1/oneko.1.gz lib/X11/app-defaults/Oneko lib/X11/oneko/cat1.xpm lib/X11/oneko/cat2.xpm lib/X11/oneko/mouse.xpm
Refer to the pkg-create(8) manual page for details on the packing list.
It is recommended to keep all the filenames in this file sorted alphabetically. It will make verifying changes when upgrading the port much easier.
Creating a packing list manually can be a very tedious task. If the port installs a large numbers of files, creating the packing list automatically might save time.
There is only one case when
pkg-plist
can be omitted from a port.
If the port installs just a handful of files, list them in
PLIST_FILES
, within the
port's Makefile
. For instance, we
could get along without pkg-plist
in
the above oneko
port by adding these
lines to the Makefile
:
PLIST_FILES= bin/oneko \ man/man1/oneko.1.gz \ lib/X11/app-defaults/Oneko \ lib/X11/oneko/cat1.xpm \ lib/X11/oneko/cat2.xpm \ lib/X11/oneko/mouse.xpm
Usage of PLIST_FILES
should not be
abused. When looking for the origin of a file, people
usually try to grep through the
pkg-plist
files in the ports tree.
Listing files in PLIST_FILES
in the
Makefile
makes that search more
difficult.
If a port needs to create an empty directory, or creates
directories outside of ${PREFIX}
during
installation, refer to Section 7.2.1, “Cleaning Up Empty Directories”
for more information.
The price for this way of listing a port's files and
directories is that the keywords described in
pkg-create(8) and Section 7.6, “Expanding Package List with Keywords” cannot
be used. Therefore, it is suitable
only for simple ports and makes them even simpler. At the
same time, it has the advantage of reducing the number of
files in the ports collection. Please consider using this
technique before resorting to
pkg-plist
.
Later we will see how pkg-plist
and PLIST_FILES
can be used to fulfill
more sophisticated
tasks.
Just type make makesum
. The ports make
rules will automatically generate the file
distinfo
.
Make sure that the port rules do exactly what is desired, including packaging up the port. These are the important points to verify:
pkg-plist
does not contain
anything not installed by the port.
pkg-plist
contains everything
that is installed by the port.
The port can be installed using the
install
target. This verifies
that the install script works correctly.
The port can be deinstalled properly using the
deinstall
target. This
verifies that the deinstall script works correctly.
Make sure that make package
can be
run as a normal user (that is, not as
root
). If that
fails, NEED_ROOT=yes
must be added to
the port Makefile
.
make stage
make check-orphans
make package
make install
make deinstall
pkg add
package-filename
make package
(as user)
Make certain no warnings are shown in any of the stages.
Thorough automated testing can be done with
ports-mgmt/tinderbox or
ports-mgmt/poudriere from the
Ports Collection. These applications maintain
jails
where all of the steps shown above
can be tested without affecting the state of the host
system.
Please use portlint
to see if the port
conforms to our guidelines. The
ports-mgmt/portlint
program is part of the ports collection. In particular,
check that the
Makefile is in the
right shape and the
package is named
appropriately.
Before submitting the new port, read the DOs and DON'Ts section.
Once happy with the port, the only thing remaining is to
put it in the main FreeBSD ports tree and make everybody else
happy about it too. We do not need the
work
directory or the
pkgname.tgz
package, so delete them
now.
Next, build the shar(1) file. Assuming the port is
called oneko
, cd
to the
directory above where the oneko
directory
is located, and then type:
shar `find oneko` > oneko.shar
To submit oneko.shar
, use the bug submit
form (category Ports Tree
).
Add a short
description of the program to the Description field of the PR
(perhaps a short version of COMMENT
), and
do not forget to add oneko.shar
as an
attachment.
Giving a good description in the summary of the problem
report makes the work of port committers a lot easier. We
prefer something like “New port:
category
/portname
short description of
the port
” for new ports. Using this
scheme makes it easier and faster to begin the work of
committing the new port.
One more time, do not include the original
source distfile, the work
directory, or
the package built with
make package
; and, do use
shar(1) for new ports, not diff(1).
After submitting the port, please be patient. The time needed to include a new port in FreeBSD can vary from a few days to a few months. The list of pending port PRs can be viewed at http://www.FreeBSD.org/cgi/query-pr-summary.cgi?category=ports.
After looking at the new port, we will reply if necessary, and commit it to the tree. The submitter's name will also be added to the list of Additional FreeBSD Contributors and other files.
Okay, so it was not that simple, and the port required some modifications to get it to work. In this section, we will explain, step by step, how to modify it to get it to work with the ports paradigm.
First, this is the sequence of events which occurs when the
user first types make
in the port's
directory. Having
bsd.port.mk
in another window while
reading this really helps to understand it.
But do not worry not many people understand exactly how
bsd.port.mk
is working...
:-)
The fetch
target is run. The
fetch
target is responsible for
making sure that the tarball exists locally in
DISTDIR
. If
fetch
cannot find the required
files in DISTDIR
it will look up the URL
MASTER_SITES
, which is set in the
Makefile, as well as our FTP mirrors where we put distfiles
as backup. It will then attempt to fetch the named
distribution file with FETCH
, assuming
that the requesting site has direct access to the Internet.
If that succeeds, it will save the file in
DISTDIR
for future use and
proceed.
The extract
target is run.
It looks for the port's distribution file (typically a
gzip
ped tarball) in
DISTDIR
and unpacks it into a temporary
subdirectory specified by WRKDIR
(defaults to work
).
The patch
target is run.
First, any patches defined in PATCHFILES
are applied. Second, if any patch files named
patch-
are
found in *
PATCHDIR
(defaults to the
files
subdirectory), they are applied
at this time in alphabetical order.
The configure
target is run.
This can do any one of many different things.
If it exists, scripts/configure
is run.
If HAS_CONFIGURE
or
GNU_CONFIGURE
is set,
WRKSRC/configure
is run.
The build
target is run.
This is responsible for descending into the port's private
working directory (WRKSRC
) and building
it.
The stage
target is run.
This puts the final set of built files into a temporary
directory (STAGEDIR
, see
Section 6.1, “Staging”). The hierarchy of this directory
mirrors that of the system on which the package will be
installed.
The package
target is run.
This creates a package using the files from the temporary
directory created during the
stage
target and the port's
pkg-plist
.
The install
target is run.
This installs the package created during the
package
target into the host
system.
The above are the default actions. In addition,
define targets
pre-
or
something
post-
,
or put scripts with those names, in the
something
scripts
subdirectory, and they will be
run before or after the default actions are done.
For example, if there is a
post-extract
target defined in the
Makefile
, and a file
pre-build
in the
scripts
subdirectory, the
post-extract
target will be called
after the regular extraction actions, and
pre-build
will be executed before
the default build rules are done. It is recommended to
use Makefile
targets if the actions are
simple enough, because it will be easier for someone to figure
out what kind of non-default action the port requires.
The default actions are done by the
do-
targets from something
bsd.port.mk
.
For example, the commands to extract a port are in the target
do-extract
. If
the default target does not do the job right, redefine the
do-
target in the something
Makefile
.
The “main” targets (for example,
extract
,
configure
, etc.) do nothing more
than make sure all the stages up to that one are completed and
call the real targets or scripts, and they are not intended to
be changed. To fix the extraction, fix
do-extract
, but never ever change
the way extract
operates!
Additionally, the target
post-deinstall
is invalid and is
not run by the ports infrastructure.
Now that what goes on when the user types make
install
is better understood, let us go through the
recommended steps to create the perfect port.
Get the original sources (normally) as a compressed tarball
(foo.tar.gz
or
) and
copy it into foo
.tar.bz2DISTDIR
. Always use
mainstream sources when and where
possible.
Set the variable
MASTER_SITES
to reflect where the original
tarball resides. Shorthand definitions exist
for most mainstream sites in bsd.sites.mk
.
Please use these sites—and the associated
definitions—if at all possible, to help avoid the problem
of having the same information repeated over again many times in
the source base. As these sites tend to change over time, this
becomes a maintenance nightmare for everyone involved. See
Section 5.4.2, “MASTER_SITES
” for details.
If there is no FTP/HTTP site that is well-connected to the net, or can only find sites that have irritatingly non-standard formats, put a copy on a reliable FTP or HTTP server (for example, a home page).
If a convenient and reliable place to put
the distfile cannot be found, we can “house” it ourselves on
ftp.FreeBSD.org
; however, this is the
least-preferred solution. The distfile must be placed into
~/public_distfiles/
of someone's
freefall
account. Ask the person who
commits the port to do this. This person will also set
MASTER_SITES
to
LOCAL/
where username
is
their FreeBSD cluster login.username
If the port's distfile changes all the time without any
kind of version update by the author, consider putting the
distfile on a home page and listing it as the first
MASTER_SITES
. Try to talk the
port author out of doing this; it really does help to establish
some kind of source code control. Hosting a specific version will
prevent users from getting
checksum mismatch errors, and also reduce
the workload of maintainers of our FTP site. Also, if there is
only one master site for the port, it is recommended to
house a backup on a home page and list it as the second
MASTER_SITES
.
If the port requires some additional `patches' that are
available on the Internet, fetch them too and put them in
DISTDIR
. Do not worry if they come from a
site other than where the main source tarball comes, we have a
way to handle these situations (see the description of PATCHFILES below).
Unpack a copy of the tarball in a private directory and make whatever changes are necessary to get the port to compile properly under the current version of FreeBSD. Keep careful track of steps, as they will be needed to automate the process shortly. Everything, including the deletion, addition, or modification of files has to be doable using an automated script or patch file when the port is finished.
If the port requires significant user interaction/customization to compile or install, take a look at one of Larry Wall's classic Configure scripts and perhaps do something similar. The goal of the new ports collection is to make each port as “plug-and-play” as possible for the end-user while using a minimum of disk space.
Unless explicitly stated, patch files, scripts, and other files created and contributed to the FreeBSD ports collection are assumed to be covered by the standard BSD copyright conditions.
In the preparation of the port, files that have been added
or changed can be recorded with diff(1) for later feeding
to patch(1). Doing this with a typical file involves
saving a copy of the original file before making any changes
using a .orig
suffix.
%
cp
file
file
.orig
After all changes have been made, cd
back
to the port directory. Use make makepatch
to
generate updated patch files in the files
directory.
Patch files are stored in PATCHDIR
,
usually files/
, from where they will be
automatically applied. All patches must be relative to
WRKSRC
. Typically
WRKSRC
is a subdirectory of
WRKDIR
, the directory where the distfile is
extracted. Use make -V WRKSRC
to see the
actual path. The patch names are to follow these
rules:
Avoid having more than one patch modify the same file.
For example, having both
patch-foobar.c
and
patch-foobar.c2
making changes to
${WRKSRC}/foobar.c
makes them fragile
and difficult to debug.
When creating names for patch files, replace each
underscore (_
) with two underscores
(__
) and each slash
(/
) with one underscore
(_
). For example, to patch a file
named src/freeglut_joystick.c
, name
the corresponding patch
patch-src_freeglut__joystick.c
. Do
not name patches like patch-aa
or
patch-ab
. Always use the path and
file name in patch names. Using make
makepatch
automatically generates the correct
names.
A patch may modify multiple files if the changes are
related and the patch is named appropriately. For
example,
patch-add-missing-stdlib.h
.
Only use characters [-+._a-zA-Z0-9]
for naming patches. In particular, do not use
::
as a path separator,
use _
instead.
Minimize the amount of non-functional whitespace changes in patches. It is common in the Open Source world for projects to share large amounts of a code base, but obey different style and indenting rules. When taking a working piece of functionality from one project to fix similar areas in another, please be careful: the resulting patch may be full of non-functional changes. It not only increases the size of the ports repository but makes it hard to find out what exactly caused the problem and what was changed at all.
If a file must be deleted, do it in the
post-extract
target rather than as
part of the patch.
Manual patch creation is usually not necessary. Automatic patch generation as described earlier in this section is the preferred method. However, manual patching may be required occasionally.
Patches are saved into files named
patch-*
where
*
indicates the pathname of the
file that is patched, such as
patch-Imakefile
or
patch-src-config.h
.
After the file has been modified, diff(1) is used to
record the differences between the original and the modified
version. -u
causes diff(1) to produce
“unified” diffs, the preferred form.
%
diff -u
file
.origfile
> patch-pathname-file
When generating patches for new, added files,
-N
is used to tell diff(1) to treat the
non-existent original file as if it existed but was
empty:
%
diff -u -N
newfile
.orignewfile
> patch-pathname-newfile
Do not add $FreeBSD$
RCS
strings in patches. When patches are added to the
Subversion repository with
svn add
, the
fbsd:nokeywords
property is set to
yes
automatically so keywords in the patch
are not modified when committed. The property can be added
manually with svn propset fbsd:nokeywords yes
.files...
Using the recurse (-r
) option to
diff(1) to generate patches is fine, but please look at
the resulting patches to make sure there is no unnecessary
junk in there. In particular, diffs between two backup files,
Makefile
s when the port uses
Imake
or GNU configure
,
etc., are unnecessary and have to be deleted. If it was
necessary to edit configure.in
and run
autoconf
to regenerate
configure
, do not take the diffs of
configure
(it often grows to a few thousand
lines!). Instead, define
USE_AUTOTOOLS=autoconf:261
and take the
diffs of configure.in
.
Simple replacements can be performed directly from the
port Makefile
using the in-place mode of
sed(1). This is useful when changes use the value of a
variable:
post-patch: @${REINPLACE_CMD} -e 's|for Linux|for FreeBSD|g' ${WRKSRC}/README
Quite often, software being ported uses the CR/LF
convention in source files. This may cause problems with
further patching, compiler warnings, or script execution (like
/bin/sh^M not found
.) To quickly convert
all files from CR/LF to just LF, add this entry to the port
Makefile
:
USES= dos2unix
A list of specific files to convert can be given:
USES= dos2unix DOS2UNIX_FILES= util.c util.h
Use DOS2UNIX_REGEX
to convert a group
of files across subdirectories. Its argument is a
find(1)-compatible regular expression. More on the
format is in re_format(7). This option is useful for
converting all files of a given extension. For example,
convert all source code files, leaving binary files
intact:
USES= dos2unix DOS2UNIX_REGEX= .*\.([ch]|cpp)
A similar option is DOS2UNIX_GLOB
,
which runs find
for each element listed
in it.
USES= dos2unix DOS2UNIX_GLOB= *.c *.cpp *.h
Include any additional customization commands in the
configure
script and save it in the
scripts
subdirectory. As mentioned above,
it is also possible do this with Makefile
targets
and/or scripts with the name pre-configure
or post-configure
.
If the port requires user input to build, configure, or
install, set IS_INTERACTIVE
in the
Makefile
. This will allow
“overnight builds” to skip it. If the user
sets the variable BATCH
in his environment (and
if the user sets the variable INTERACTIVE
, then
only those ports requiring interaction are
built). This will save a lot of wasted time on the set of
machines that continually build ports (see below).
It is also recommended that if there are reasonable default
answers to the questions,
PACKAGE_BUILDING
be used to turn off the
interactive script when it is set. This will allow us to build
the packages for CDROMs and FTP.
Configuring the Makefile
is pretty
simple, and again we suggest looking at existing examples
before starting. Also, there is a
sample Makefile in this
handbook, so take a look and please follow the ordering of
variables and sections in that template to make the port easier
for others to read.
Consider these problems in sequence during the
design of the new Makefile
:
Does it live in DISTDIR
as a standard
gzip
ped tarball named something like
foozolix-1.2.tar.gz
? If so, go on
to the next step. If not, the distribution file format might
require overriding one or more of
DISTVERSION
, DISTNAME
,
EXTRACT_CMD
,
EXTRACT_BEFORE_ARGS
,
EXTRACT_AFTER_ARGS
,
EXTRACT_SUFX
, or
DISTFILES
.
In the worst case, create a custom
do-extract
target to override the
default. This is rarely, if ever, necessary.
The first part of the port's Makefile
names the port, describes its version number, and lists it in
the correct category.
Set PORTNAME
to the base
name of the port, and PORTVERSION
to the
version number of the port.
The package name must be unique among all of the ports
tree. Make sure that there is not already a port with the
same PORTNAME
and if there is add one of
PKGNAMEPREFIX
or PKGNAMESUFFIX
.
PORTREVISION
is a
monotonically increasing value which is reset to 0 with
every increase of PORTVERSION
, typically
every time there is a new official vendor release. If
PORTREVISION
is non-zero, the value is
appended to the package name. Changes to
PORTREVISION
are used by automated tools
like pkg-version(8) to determine that a new package is
available.
PORTREVISION
must be increased each
time a change is made to the port that changes the generated
package in any way. That includes changes that only affect
a package built with non-default
options.
Examples of when PORTREVISION
must be bumped:
Addition of patches to correct security vulnerabilities, bugs, or to add new functionality to the port.
Changes to the port Makefile
to
enable or disable compile-time options in the
package.
Changes in the packing list or the install-time behavior of the package. For example, a change to a script which generates initial data for the package, like ssh(1) host keys.
Version bump of a port's shared library dependency (in this case, someone trying to install the old package after installing a newer version of the dependency will fail since it will look for the old libfoo.x instead of libfoo.(x+1)).
Silent changes to the port distfile which have
significant functional differences. For example,
changes to the distfile requiring a correction to
distinfo
with no corresponding
change to PORTVERSION
, where a
diff -ru
of the old and new versions
shows non-trivial changes to the code.
Examples of changes which do not require a
PORTREVISION
bump:
Style changes to the port skeleton with no functional change to what appears in the resulting package.
Changes to MASTER_SITES
or other
functional changes to the port which do not affect the
resulting package.
Trivial patches to the distfile such as correction of typos, which are not important enough that users of the package have to go to the trouble of upgrading.
Build fixes which cause a package to become
compilable where it was previously failing. As long as
the changes do not introduce any functional change on
any other platforms on which the port did previously
build. Since PORTREVISION
reflects
the content of the package, if the package was not
previously buildable then there is no need to increase
PORTREVISION
to mark a change.
A rule of thumb is to decide whether a change
committed to a port is something which
some people would benefit from having.
Either because of an enhancement, fix,
or by virtue that the new package will actually work at
all. Then weigh that against that fact that it will cause
everyone who regularly updates their ports tree to be
compelled to update. If yes,
PORTREVISION
must be bumped.
People using binary packages will
never see the update if
PORTREVISION
is not bumped. Without
increasing PORTREVISION
, the
package builders have no way to detect the change and
thus, will not rebuild the package.
From time to time a software vendor or FreeBSD porter will do something silly and release a version of their software which is actually numerically less than the previous version. An example of this is a port which goes from foo-20000801 to foo-1.0 (the former will be incorrectly treated as a newer version since 20000801 is a numerically greater value than 1).
The results of version number comparisons are not
always obvious. pkg version
(see
pkg-version(8)) can be used to test the comparison of
two version number strings. For example:
%
pkg version -t 0.031 0.29
>
The >
output indicates that
version 0.031 is considered greater than version 0.29,
which may not have been obvious to the porter.
In situations such as this,
PORTEPOCH
must be increased.
If PORTEPOCH
is nonzero it is appended to
the package name as described in section 0 above.
PORTEPOCH
must never be decreased or
reset to zero, because that would cause comparison to a
package from an earlier epoch to fail. For example, the
package would not be detected as out of date. The new
version number, 1.0,1
in the above
example, is still numerically less than the previous
version, 20000801, but the ,1
suffix is
treated specially by automated tools and found to be greater
than the implied suffix ,0
on the earlier
package.
Dropping or resetting PORTEPOCH
incorrectly leads to no end of grief. If the discussion
above was not clear enough, please consult the
FreeBSD ports mailing list.
It is expected that PORTEPOCH
will
not be used for the majority of ports, and that sensible use
of PORTVERSION
can often preempt it
becoming necessary if a future release of the software
changes the version structure. However, care is
needed by FreeBSD porters when a vendor release is made without
an official version number — such as a code
“snapshot” release. The temptation is to label
the release with the release date, which will cause problems
as in the example above when a new “official”
release is made.
For example, if a snapshot release is made on the date
20000917
, and the previous version of the
software was version 1.2
, do not use
20000917
for
PORTVERSION
. The correct way is a
PORTVERSION
of
1.2.20000917
, or similar, so that the
succeeding release, say 1.3
, is still a
numerically greater value.
The gtkmumble
port, version
0.10
, is committed to the ports
collection:
PORTNAME= gtkmumble PORTVERSION= 0.10
PKGNAME
becomes
gtkmumble-0.10
.
A security hole is discovered which requires a local
FreeBSD patch. PORTREVISION
is bumped
accordingly.
PORTNAME= gtkmumble PORTVERSION= 0.10 PORTREVISION= 1
PKGNAME
becomes
gtkmumble-0.10_1
A new version is released by the vendor, numbered
0.2
(it turns out the author actually
intended 0.10
to actually mean
0.1.0
, not “what comes after
0.9” - oops, too late now). Since the new minor
version 2
is numerically less than the
previous version 10
,
PORTEPOCH
must be bumped to manually
force the new package to be detected as
“newer”. Since it is a new vendor release of
the code, PORTREVISION
is reset to 0 (or
removed from the Makefile
).
PORTNAME= gtkmumble PORTVERSION= 0.2 PORTEPOCH= 1
PKGNAME
becomes
gtkmumble-0.2,1
The next release is 0.3. Since
PORTEPOCH
never decreases, the version
variables are now:
PORTNAME= gtkmumble PORTVERSION= 0.3 PORTEPOCH= 1
PKGNAME
becomes
gtkmumble-0.3,1
If PORTEPOCH
were reset to
0
with this upgrade, someone who had
installed the gtkmumble-0.10_1
package
would not detect the gtkmumble-0.3
package as newer, since 3
is still
numerically less than 10
. Remember,
this is the whole point of PORTEPOCH
in
the first place.
Two optional variables, PKGNAMEPREFIX
and PKGNAMESUFFIX
, are combined with
PORTNAME
and PORTVERSION
to form PKGNAME
as
${PKGNAMEPREFIX}${PORTNAME}${PKGNAMESUFFIX}-${PORTVERSION}
.
Make sure this conforms to our
guidelines for a good
package name. In particular, the use of a
hyphen (-
) in
PORTVERSION
is not
allowed.
Also, if the package name has the
language-
or the
-compiled.specifics
part (see
below), use PKGNAMEPREFIX
and
PKGNAMESUFFIX
, respectively. Do not make
them part of PORTNAME
.
These are the conventions to follow when naming packages. This is to make the package directory easy to scan, as there are already thousands of packages and users are going to turn away if they hurt their eyes!
Package names take the form of
.language_region-name-compiled.specifics-version.numbers
The package name is defined as
${PKGNAMEPREFIX}${PORTNAME}${PKGNAMESUFFIX}-${PORTVERSION}
.
Make sure to set the variables to conform to that
format.
language_region-
FreeBSD strives to support the native language of its
users. The language-
part is
a two letter abbreviation of the natural language
defined by ISO-639 when the port is specific to a
certain language. Examples are ja
for Japanese, ru
for Russian,
vi
for Vietnamese,
zh
for Chinese, ko
for Korean and de
for German.
If the port is specific to a certain region within
the language area, add the two letter country code as
well. Examples are en_US
for US
English and fr_CH
for Swiss
French.
The language-
part is
set in PKGNAMEPREFIX
.
name
Make sure that the port's name and version are
clearly separated and placed into
PORTNAME
and
PORTVERSION
. The only
reason for PORTNAME
to contain a
version part is if the upstream distribution is really
named that way, as in the
textproc/libxml2 or
japanese/kinput2-freewnn
ports. Otherwise, PORTNAME
cannot
contain any version-specific information. It is quite
normal for several ports to have the same
PORTNAME
, as the
www/apache* ports do; in
that case, different versions (and different index
entries) are distinguished by
PKGNAMEPREFIX
and PKGNAMESUFFIX
values.
There is a tradition of naming
Perl 5
modules by prepending
p5-
and converting the double-colon
separator to a hyphen. For example, the
Data::Dumper
module becomes
p5-Data-Dumper
.
-compiled.specifics
If the port can be built with different hardcoded defaults
(usually part of the directory name in a family of
ports), the
-compiled.specifics
part
states the compiled-in defaults. The hyphen is
optional. Examples are paper size and font
units.
The -compiled.specifics
part is set in PKGNAMESUFFIX
.
-version.numbers
The version string follows a dash
(-
) and is a period-separated list of
integers and single lowercase alphabetics. In
particular, it is not permissible to have another dash
inside the version string. The only exception is the
string pl
(meaning
“patchlevel”), which can be used
only when there are no major and
minor version numbers in the software. If the software
version has strings like “alpha”,
“beta”, “rc”, or
“pre”, take the first letter and put it
immediately after a period. If the version string
continues after those names, the numbers follow
the single alphabet without an extra period between
them (for example, 1.0b2
).
The idea is to make it easier to sort ports by
looking at the version string. In particular, make sure
version number components are always delimited by a
period, and if the date is part of the string, use the
0.0.
format, not
yyyy
.mm
.dd
or the non-Y2K compliant
dd
.mm
.yyyy
format. It is important to prefix the version with
yy
.mm
.dd
0.0.
in case a release with an actual
version number is made, which would be
numerically less than
.yyyy
Package name must be unique among all of the ports
tree, check that there is not already a port with the same
PORTNAME
and if there is add one of PKGNAMEPREFIX
or PKGNAMESUFFIX
.
Here are some (real) examples on how to convert the name as called by the software authors to a suitable package name:
Distribution Name | PKGNAMEPREFIX | PORTNAME | PKGNAMESUFFIX | PORTVERSION | Reason |
---|---|---|---|---|---|
mule-2.2.2 | (empty) | mule | (empty) | 2.2.2 | No changes required |
mule-1.0.1 | (empty) | mule | 1 | 1.0.1 | mule already exists |
EmiClock-1.0.2 | (empty) | emiclock | (empty) | 1.0.2 | No uppercase names for single programs |
rdist-1.3alpha | (empty) | rdist | (empty) | 1.3.a | No strings like alpha
allowed |
es-0.9-beta1 | (empty) | es | (empty) | 0.9.b1 | No strings like beta
allowed |
mailman-2.0rc3 | (empty) | mailman | (empty) | 2.0.r3 | No strings like rc
allowed |
v3.3beta021.src | (empty) | tiff | (empty) | 3.3 | What the heck was that anyway? |
tvtwm | (empty) | tvtwm | (empty) | pl11 | Version string always required |
piewm | (empty) | piewm | (empty) | 1.0 | Version string always required |
xvgr-2.10pl1 | (empty) | xvgr | (empty) | 2.10.1 | pl allowed only when no
major/minor version numbers |
gawk-2.15.6 | ja- | gawk | (empty) | 2.15.6 | Japanese language version |
psutils-1.13 | (empty) | psutils | -letter | 1.13 | Paper size hardcoded at package build time |
pkfonts | (empty) | pkfonts | 300 | 1.0 | Package for 300dpi fonts |
If there is absolutely no trace of version information in
the original source and it is unlikely that the original
author will ever release another version, just set the version
string to 1.0
(like the
piewm
example above). Otherwise, ask the
original author or use the date string the source file was
released on
(0.0.
)
as the version.yyyy
.mm
.dd
When a package is created, it is put under
/usr/ports/packages/All
and links are
made from one or more subdirectories of
/usr/ports/packages
. The names of these
subdirectories are specified by the variable
CATEGORIES
. It is intended to make life
easier for the user when he is wading through the pile of
packages on the FTP site or the CDROM. Please take a look at
the current list of
categories and pick the ones that are suitable for
the port.
This list also determines where in the ports tree the port is imported. If there is more than one category here, the port files must be put in the subdirectory with the name of the first category. See below for more discussion about how to pick the right categories.
Here is the current list of port categories. Those marked
with an asterisk (*
) are
virtual categories—those that do
not have a corresponding subdirectory in the ports tree. They
are only used as secondary categories, and only for search
purposes.
For non-virtual categories, there is a one-line
description in COMMENT
in that
subdirectory's Makefile
.
Category | Description | Notes |
---|---|---|
accessibility | Ports to help disabled users. | |
afterstep* | Ports to support the AfterStep window manager. | |
arabic | Arabic language support. | |
archivers | Archiving tools. | |
astro | Astronomical ports. | |
audio | Sound support. | |
benchmarks | Benchmarking utilities. | |
biology | Biology-related software. | |
cad | Computer aided design tools. | |
chinese | Chinese language support. | |
comms | Communication software. | Mostly software to talk to the serial port. |
converters | Character code converters. | |
databases | Databases. | |
deskutils | Things that used to be on the desktop before computers were invented. | |
devel | Development utilities. | Do not put libraries here just because they are libraries. They should not be in this category unless they truly do not belong anywhere else. |
dns | DNS-related software. | |
docs* | Meta-ports for FreeBSD documentation. | |
editors | General editors. | Specialized editors go in the section for those
tools. For example, a mathematical-formula editor
will go in math , and have
editors as a second
category. |
elisp* | Emacs-lisp ports. | |
emulators | Emulators for other operating systems. | Terminal emulators do not
belong here. X-based ones go to
x11 and text-based ones to
either comms or
misc , depending on the exact
functionality. |
finance | Monetary, financial and related applications. | |
french | French language support. | |
ftp | FTP client and server utilities. | If the port speaks both FTP
and HTTP, put it
in ftp with a secondary
category of www . |
games | Games. | |
geography* | Geography-related software. | |
german | German language support. | |
gnome* | Ports from the GNOME Project. | |
gnustep* | Software related to the GNUstep desktop environment. | |
graphics | Graphics utilities. | |
hamradio* | Software for amateur radio. | |
haskell* | Software related to the Haskell language. | |
hebrew | Hebrew language support. | |
hungarian | Hungarian language support. | |
ipv6* | IPv6 related software. | |
irc | Internet Relay Chat utilities. | |
japanese | Japanese language support. | |
java | Software related to the Java™ language. | The java category must not
be the only one for a port. Save for ports directly
related to the Java language, porters are also
encouraged not to use java as the
main category of a port. |
kde* | Ports from the KDE Project. | |
kld* | Kernel loadable modules. | |
korean | Korean language support. | |
lang | Programming languages. | |
linux* | Linux applications and support utilities. | |
lisp* | Software related to the Lisp language. | |
mail | Mail software. | |
math | Numerical computation software and other utilities for mathematics. | |
mbone* | MBone applications. | |
misc | Miscellaneous utilities | Things that do not belong anywhere
else. If at all possible, try to find a better
category for the port than misc ,
as ports tend to be overlooked in here. |
multimedia | Multimedia software. | |
net | Miscellaneous networking software. | |
net-im | Instant messaging software. | |
net-mgmt | Networking management software. | |
net-p2p | Peer to peer network applications. | |
news | USENET news software. | |
palm | Software support for the Palm™ series. | |
parallel* | Applications dealing with parallelism in computing. | |
pear* | Ports related to the Pear PHP framework. | |
perl5* | Ports that require Perl version 5 to run. | |
plan9* | Various programs from Plan9. | |
polish | Polish language support. | |
ports-mgmt | Ports for managing, installing and developing FreeBSD ports and packages. | |
portuguese | Portuguese language support. | |
print | Printing software. | Desktop publishing tools (previewers, etc.) belong here too. |
python* | Software related to the Python language. | |
ruby* | Software related to the Ruby language. | |
rubygems* | Ports of RubyGems packages. | |
russian | Russian language support. | |
scheme* | Software related to the Scheme language. | |
science | Scientific ports that do not fit into other
categories such as astro ,
biology and
math . | |
security | Security utilities. | |
shells | Command line shells. | |
spanish* | Spanish language support. | |
sysutils | System utilities. | |
tcl* | Ports that use Tcl to run. | |
textproc | Text processing utilities. | It does not include desktop publishing tools,
which go to print . |
tk* | Ports that use Tk to run. | |
ukrainian | Ukrainian language support. | |
vietnamese | Vietnamese language support. | |
windowmaker* | Ports to support the WindowMaker window manager. | |
www | Software related to the World Wide Web. | HTML language support belongs here too. |
x11 | The X Window System and friends. | This category is only for software that directly
supports the window system. Do not put regular X
applications here. Most of them go into other
x11-* categories (see
below). |
x11-clocks | X11 clocks. | |
x11-drivers | X11 drivers. | |
x11-fm | X11 file managers. | |
x11-fonts | X11 fonts and font utilities. | |
x11-servers | X11 servers. | |
x11-themes | X11 themes. | |
x11-toolkits | X11 toolkits. | |
x11-wm | X11 window managers. | |
xfce* | Ports related to the Xfce desktop environment. | |
zope* | Zope support. |
As many of the categories overlap, choosing which of the categories will be the primary category of the port can be tedious. There are several rules that govern this issue. Here is the list of priorities, in decreasing order of precedence:
The first category must be a physical category (see above). This is necessary to make the packaging work. Virtual categories and physical categories may be intermixed after that.
Language specific categories always come first. For
example, if the port installs Japanese X11 fonts, then
the CATEGORIES
line would read
japanese x11-fonts
.
Specific categories are listed before less-specific
ones. For instance, an HTML editor is listed as
www editors
, not the other way
around. Also, do not list
net
when the port belongs to any of
irc
, mail
,
news
, security
,
or www
, as net
is included implicitly.
x11
is used as a secondary
category only when the primary category is a natural
language. In particular, do not put
x11
in the category line for X
applications.
Emacs modes are
placed in the same ports category as the application
supported by the mode, not in
editors
. For example, an
Emacs mode to edit source files
of some programming language goes into
lang
.
Ports installing loadable kernel modules also
have the virtual category kld
in
their CATEGORIES
line. This is one of
the things handled automatically by adding
USES=kmod
.
misc
does not appear with any
other non-virtual category. If there is
misc
with something else in
CATEGORIES
, that means
misc
can safely be deleted and the port
placed only in the other subdirectory.
If the port truly does not belong anywhere else,
put it in misc
.
If the category is not clearly defined, please put a comment to that effect in the port submission in the bug database so we can discuss it before we import it. As a committer, send a note to the FreeBSD ports mailing list so we can discuss it first. Too often, new ports are imported to the wrong category only to be moved right away. This causes unnecessary and undesirable bloat in the master source repository.
As the Ports Collection has grown over time, various new categories have been introduced. New categories can either be virtual categories—those that do not have a corresponding subdirectory in the ports tree— or physical categories—those that do. This section discusses the issues involved in creating a new physical category. Read it thouroughly before proposing a new one.
Our existing practice has been to avoid creating a new physical category unless either a large number of ports would logically belong to it, or the ports that would belong to it are a logically distinct group that is of limited general interest (for instance, categories related to spoken human languages), or preferably both.
The rationale for this is that such a change creates a fair amount of work for both the committers and also for all users who track changes to the Ports Collection. In addition, proposed category changes just naturally seem to attract controversy. (Perhaps this is because there is no clear consensus on when a category is “too big”, nor whether categories should lend themselves to browsing (and thus what number of categories would be an ideal number), and so forth.)
Here is the procedure:
Propose the new category on FreeBSD ports mailing list. Include a detailed rationale for the new category, including why the existing categories are not sufficient, and the list of existing ports proposed to move. (If there are new ports pending in Bugzilla that would fit this category, list them too.) If you are the maintainer and/or submitter, respectively, mention that as it may help the case.
Participate in the discussion.
If it seems that there is support for the idea, file a PR which includes both the rationale and the list of existing ports that need to be moved. Ideally, this PR would also include these patches:
Makefile
s for the new ports
once they are repocopied
Makefile
for the new
category
Makefile
for the old ports'
categories
Makefile
s for ports that
depend on the old ports
(for extra credit, include the other files that have to change, as per the procedure in the Committer's Guide.)
Since it affects the ports infrastructure and involves
moving and patching many ports but also possibly running
regression tests on the build cluster, assign the PR to
the Ports Management Team <[email protected]>
.
If that PR is approved, a committer will need to follow the rest of the procedure that is outlined in the Committer's Guide.
Proposing a new virtual category is similar to the
above but much less involved, since no ports will actually
have to move. In this case, the only patches to include in
the PR would be those to add the new category to
CATEGORIES
of the affected ports.
Occasionally someone proposes reorganizing the categories with either a 2-level structure, or some other kind of keyword structure. To date, nothing has come of any of these proposals because, while they are very easy to make, the effort involved to retrofit the entire existing ports collection with any kind of reorganization is daunting to say the very least. Please read the history of these proposals in the mailing list archives before posting this idea. Furthermore, be prepared to be challenged to offer a working prototype.
The second part of the Makefile
describes the files that must be downloaded to build
the port, and where they can be downloaded.
DISTNAME
is the name of the port as
called by the authors of the software.
DISTNAME
defaults to
${PORTNAME}-${DISTVERSIONPREFIX}${DISTVERSION}${DISTVERSIONSUFFIX}
,
and DISTVERSION
defaults to
${PORTVERSION}
so override it
only if necessary. DISTNAME
is only used
in two places. First, the distribution file list
(DISTFILES
) defaults to
${DISTNAME}
${EXTRACT_SUFX}
.
Second, the distribution file is expected to extract into a
subdirectory named WRKSRC
, which defaults
to work/${DISTNAME}
.
Some vendor's distribution names which do not fit into the
${PORTNAME}-${PORTVERSION}
-scheme can be
handled automatically by setting
DISTVERSION
.
PORTVERSION
will be derived from it
automatically.
Only one of PORTVERSION
and
DISTVERSION
can be set at a time. If
DISTVERSION
does not derive a correct
PORTVERSION
, do not use
DISTVERSION
, set
PORTVERSION
to the right value and set
DISTNAME
with PORTNAME
with either some computation of
PORTVERSION
or the verbatim upstream
version.
DISTVERSION
and the
Derived PORTVERSION
DISTVERSION | PORTVERSION |
---|---|
0.7.1d | 0.7.1.d |
10Alpha3 | 10.a3 |
3Beta7-pre2 | 3.b7.p2 |
8:f_17 | 8f.17 |
PKGNAMEPREFIX
and
PKGNAMESUFFIX
do not affect
DISTNAME
. Also note that if
WRKSRC
is equal to
${WRKDIR}/${DISTNAME}
while
the original source archive is named something other than
${PORTNAME}-${PORTVERSION}${EXTRACT_SUFX}
,
leave DISTNAME
alone— defining only
DISTFILES
is easier than both
DISTNAME
and WRKSRC
(and possibly EXTRACT_SUFX
).
Record the directory part of the FTP/HTTP-URL pointing at
the original tarball in MASTER_SITES
. Do
not forget the trailing slash (/
)!
The make
macros will try to use this
specification for grabbing the distribution file with
FETCH
if they cannot find it already on the
system.
It is recommended that multiple sites are included on this list, preferably from different continents. This will safeguard against wide-area network problems. We are even planning to add support for automatically determining the closest master site and fetching from there; having multiple sites will go a long way towards helping this effort.
MASTER_SITES
must not be blank. It
must point to the actual site hosting the distribution
files. It cannot point to web archives, or the FreeBSD
distribution files cache sites. The only exception to this
rule is ports that do not have any distribution files. For
example, meta-ports do not have any distribution files, so
MASTER_SITES
does not need to be
set.
Shortcut abbreviations are available for popular
archives like SourceForge (SOURCEFORGE
),
GNU (GNU
), or Perl CPAN
(PERL_CPAN
).
MASTER_SITES
can use them
directly:
MASTER_SITES= GNU/make
The older expanded format still works, but all ports have been converted to the compact format. The expanded format looks like this:
MASTER_SITES= ${MASTER_SITE_GNU} MASTER_SITE_SUBDIR= make
These values and variables are defined in Mk/bsd.sites.mk
.
New entries are added often, so make sure to check the
latest version of this file before submitting a port.
For any
MASTER_SITE_
variable, the shorthand
FOO
can be
used. For example, use:FOO
MASTER_SITES= FOO
If MASTER_SITE_SUBDIR
is needed,
use this:
MASTER_SITES=FOO
/bar
Several “magic” macros exist for
popular sites with a predictable directory structure. For
these, just use the abbreviation and the system will choose
a subdirectory automatically. For a port
named Stardict
, of version
1.2.3
, and hosted on SourceForge, adding
this line:
MASTER_SITES= SF
infers a subdirectory named
/project/stardict/stardict/1.2.3
. If the
inferred directory is incorrect, it can be
overridden:
MASTER_SITES= SF/stardict/WyabdcRealPeopleTTS/${PORTVERSION}
This can also be written as
MASTER_SITES= SF MASTER_SITE_SUBDIR= stardict/WyabdcRealPeopleTTS/${PORTVERSION}
MASTER_SITES
MacrosMacro | Assumed subdirectory |
---|---|
APACHE_COMMONS_BINARIES | ${PORTNAME:S,commons-,,} |
APACHE_COMMONS_SOURCE | ${PORTNAME:S,commons-,,} |
APACHE_JAKARTA | ${PORTNAME:S,-,/,}/source |
BERLIOS | ${PORTNAME:tl}.berlios |
CHEESESHOP | source/${DISTNAME:C/(.).*/\1/}/${DISTNAME:C/(.*)-[0-9].*/\1/} |
CPAN | ${PORTNAME:C/-.*//} |
DEBIAN | pool/main/${PORTNAME:C/^((lib)?.).*$/\1/}/${PORTNAME} |
FARSIGHT | ${PORTNAME} |
FESTIVAL | ${PORTREVISION} |
GCC | releases/${DISTNAME} |
GENTOO | distfiles |
GIMP | ${PORTNAME}/${PORTVERSION:R}/ |
GH | ${GH_ACCOUNT}/${GH_PROJECT}/tar.gz/${GH_TAGNAME}?dummy=/ |
GHC | ${GH_ACCOUNT}/${GH_PROJECT}/ |
GNOME | sources/${PORTNAME}/${PORTVERSION:C/^([0-9]+\.[0-9]+).*/\1/} |
GNU | ${PORTNAME} |
GNUPG | ${PORTNAME} |
GNU_ALPHA | ${PORTNAME} |
HORDE | ${PORTNAME} |
LODEV | ${PORTNAME} |
MATE | ${PORTVERSION:C/^([0-9]+\.[0-9]+).*/\1/} |
MOZDEV | ${PORTNAME:tl} |
NL | ${PORTNAME} |
QT | archive/qt/${PORTVERSION:R} |
SAMBA | ${PORTNAME} |
SAVANNAH | ${PORTNAME:tl} |
SF | ${PORTNAME:tl}/${PORTNAME:tl}/${PORTVERSION} |
If the distribution file comes from a specific commit or
tag on GitHub
for which there is no officially released file, there is an
easy way to set the right DISTNAME
and
MASTER_SITES
automatically. These
variables are available:
USE_GITHUB
DescriptionVariable | Description | Default |
---|---|---|
GH_ACCOUNT | Account name of the GitHub user hosting the project | ${PORTNAME} |
GH_PROJECT | Name of the project on GitHub | ${PORTNAME} |
GH_TAGNAME | Name of the tag to download (2.0.1, hash, ...) Using the name of a branch here is incorrect. It is also possible to use the hash of a commit id to do a snapshot. | ${DISTVERSIONPREFIX}${DISTVERSION}${DISTVERSIONSUFFIX} |
USE_GITHUB
While trying to make a port for version
1.2.7
of pkg
from the FreeBSD user on github, at https://github.com/freebsd/pkg, The
Makefile
would end up looking like
this (slightly stripped for the example):
PORTNAME= pkg PORTVERSION= 1.2.7 USE_GITHUB= yes GH_ACCOUNT= freebsd
It will automatically have
MASTER_SITES
set to GH
GHC
and WRKSRC
to
${WRKDIR}/pkg-1.2.7
.
USE_GITHUB
While trying to make a port for the bleeding edge
version of pkg from the FreeBSD
user on github, at https://github.com/freebsd/pkg, the
Makefile
ends up looking like
this (slightly stripped for the example):
PORTNAME= pkg-devel PORTVERSION= 1.3.0.a.20140411 USE_GITHUB= yes GH_ACCOUNT= freebsd GH_PROJECT= pkg GH_TAGNAME= 6dbb17b
It will automatically have
MASTER_SITES
set to GH
GHC
and WRKSRC
to
${WRKDIR}/pkg-6dbb17b
.
USE_GITHUB
with
DISTVERSIONPREFIX
From time to time, GH_TAGNAME
is a
slight variation from DISTVERSION
.
For example, if the version is 1.0.2
,
the tag is v1.0.2
. In those cases, it
is possible to use DISTVERSIONPREFIX
or
DISTVERSIONSUFFIX
:
PORTNAME= foo PORTVERSION= 1.0.2 DISTVERSIONPREFIX= v USE_GITHUB= yes
It will automatically set
GH_TAGNAME
to
v1.0.2
, while WRKSRC
will be kept to
${WRKDIR}/foo-1.0.2
.
The USE_GITHUB
framework also
supports fetching multiple distribution files from
different places in GitHub. It works in a way very
similar to Section 5.4.8, “Multiple Distribution or Patches Files from Multiple
Locations”.
Multiple values are added to
GH_ACCOUNT
,
GH_PROJECT
, and
GH_TAGNAME
. Each different value is
assigned a tag. The main value can either have no tag, or
the :DEFAULT
tag. A value can be
omitted if it is the same as the default as listed in
Table 5.5, “USE_GITHUB
Description”.
For each tag, a
${WRKSRC_
helper variable is created, containing the directory into
which the file has been extracted. The
tag
}${WRKSRC_
variables can be used to move directories around during
tag
}post-extract
, or add to
CONFIGURE_ARGS
, or whatever is needed
so that the software builds correctly.
USE_GITHUB
with Multiple
Distribution FilesFrom time to time, there is a need to fetch more
than one distribution file. For example, when the
upstream git repository uses submodules. This can be
done easily using tags in the
GH_
variables:*
PORTNAME= foo PORTVERSION= 1.0.2 USE_GITHUB= yes GH_ACCOUNT= bar:icons,contrib GH_PROJECT= foo-icons:icons foo-contrib:contrib GH_TAGNAME= 1.0:icons fa579bc:contrib CONFIGURE_ARGS= --with-contrib=${WRKSRC_contrib} post-extract: @${MV} ${WRKSRC_icons} ${WRKSRC}/icons
This will fetch three distribution files from
github. The default one comes from
foo/foo
and is version
1.0.2
. The second one, tagged
icons
, comes from
bar/foo-icons
and is in version
1.0
. The third one comes from
bar/foo-contrib
and uses the
Git commit
fa579bc
. The distribution files are
named foo-foo-1.0.2_GH0.tar.gz
,
bar-foo-icons-1.0_GH0.tar.gz
, and
bar-foo-contrib-fa579bc_GH0.tar.gz
.
All the distribution files are extracted in
${WRKDIR}
in their respective
subdirectories. The default file is still extracted in
${WRKSRC}
, in this case,
${WRKDIR}/foo-1.0.2
. Each
additional distribution file is extracted in
${WRKSRC_
.
Here, for the tag
}icons
tag, it is called
${WRKSRC_icons}
and it contains
${WRKDIR}/foo-icons-1.0
. The file
with the contrib
tag is called
${WRKSRC_contrib}
and contains
${WRKDIR}/foo-contrib-fa579bc
.
If there is one distribution file, and it uses an odd
suffix to indicate the compression mechanism, set
EXTRACT_SUFX
.
For example, if the distribution file was named
foo.tar.gzip
instead of the more normal
foo.tar.gz
, write:
DISTNAME= foo EXTRACT_SUFX= .tar.gzip
The
USES=tar[:
,
xxx
]USES=lha
or USES=zip
automatically set EXTRACT_SUFX
to the most
common archives extensions as necessary, see Chapter 15, Values of
USES
for more details. If neither of
these are set then EXTRACT_SUFX
defaults to
.tar.gz
.
As EXTRACT_SUFX
is only used in
DISTFILES
, only set one of them..
Sometimes the names of the files to be downloaded have no
resemblance to the name of the port. For example, it might be
called source.tar.gz
or similar. In
other cases the application's source code might be in several
different archives, all of which must be downloaded.
If this is the case, set DISTFILES
to
be a space separated list of all the files that must be
downloaded.
DISTFILES= source1.tar.gz source2.tar.gz
If not explicitly set, DISTFILES
defaults to
${DISTNAME}${EXTRACT_SUFX}
.
If only some of the DISTFILES
must be
extracted—for example, one of them is the source code,
while another is an uncompressed document—list the
filenames that must be extracted in
EXTRACT_ONLY
.
DISTFILES= source.tar.gz manual.html EXTRACT_ONLY= source.tar.gz
When none of the DISTFILES
need to be
uncompressed, set EXTRACT_ONLY
to the empty
string.
EXTRACT_ONLY=
If the port requires some additional patches that are
available by FTP or
HTTP, set PATCHFILES
to
the names of the files and PATCH_SITES
to
the URL of the directory that contains them (the format is the
same as MASTER_SITES
).
If the patch is not relative to the top of the source tree
(that is, WRKSRC
) because it contains some
extra pathnames, set PATCH_DIST_STRIP
accordingly. For instance, if all the pathnames in the patch
have an extra foozolix-1.0/
in front of the
filenames, then set
PATCH_DIST_STRIP=-p1
.
Do not worry if the patches are compressed; they will be
decompressed automatically if the filenames end with
.Z
, .gz
,
.bz2
or .xz
.
If the patch is distributed with some other files, such as
documentation, in a gzip
ped tarball, using
PATCHFILES
is not possible. If that is the
case, add the name and the location of the patch tarball to
DISTFILES
and
MASTER_SITES
. Then, use
EXTRA_PATCHES
to point to those
files and bsd.port.mk
will automatically
apply them. In particular, do
not copy patch files into
${PATCHDIR}
. That directory may
not be writable.
If there are multiple patches and they need mixed values
for the strip parameter, it can be added alongside the patch
name in PATCHFILES
, e.g:
PATCHFILES= patch1 patch2:-p1
This does not conflict with the master site grouping feature, adding a group also works:
PATCHFILES= patch2:-p1:source2
The tarball will have been extracted alongside the
regular source by then, so there is no need to explicitly
extract it if it is a regular gzip
ped or
compress
ed tarball. Take extra care not
to overwrite something that already exists in that
directory if extracting it manually. Also, do not forget to
add a command to remove the copied patch in the
pre-clean
target.
(Consider this to be a somewhat “advanced topic”; those new to this document may wish to skip this section at first).
This section has information on the fetching mechanism
known as both MASTER_SITES:n
and
MASTER_SITES_NN
. We will refer to this
mechanism as MASTER_SITES:n
.
A little background first. OpenBSD has a neat feature
inside DISTFILES
and
PATCHFILES
which allows files and
patches to be postfixed with :n
identifiers. Here, n
can be both
[0-9]
and denote a group designation. For
example:
DISTFILES= alpha:0 beta:1
In OpenBSD, distribution file alpha
will be associated with variable
MASTER_SITES0
instead of our common
MASTER_SITES
and
beta
with
MASTER_SITES1
.
This is a very interesting feature which can decrease that endless search for the correct download site.
Just picture 2 files in DISTFILES
and
20 sites in MASTER_SITES
, the sites slow as
hell where beta
is carried by all sites
in MASTER_SITES
, and
alpha
can only be found in the 20th site.
It would be such a waste to check all of them if the
maintainer knew this beforehand, would it not? Not a good
start for that lovely weekend!
Now that you have the idea, just imagine more
DISTFILES
and more
MASTER_SITES
. Surely our
“distfiles survey meister” would appreciate the
relief to network strain that this would bring.
In the next sections, information will follow on the FreeBSD implementation of this idea. We improved a bit on OpenBSD's concept.
This section explains how to quickly prepare fine
grained fetching of multiple distribution files and patches
from different sites and subdirectories. We describe here a
case of simplified MASTER_SITES:n
usage.
This will be sufficient for most scenarios. More detailed
information are available in Section 5.4.8.2, “Detailed Information”.
Some applications consist of multiple distribution files that must be downloaded from a number of different sites. For example, Ghostscript consists of the core of the program, and then a large number of driver files that are used depending on the user's printer. Some of these driver files are supplied with the core, but many others must be downloaded from a variety of different sites.
To support this, each entry in
DISTFILES
may be followed by a colon and
a “tag name”. Each site listed in
MASTER_SITES
is then followed by a colon,
and the tag that indicates which distribution files are
downloaded from this site.
For example, consider an application with the source
split in two parts, source1.tar.gz
and
source2.tar.gz
, which must be
downloaded from two different sites. The port's
Makefile
would include lines like Example 5.5, “Simplified Use of MASTER_SITES:n
with One File Per Site”.
MASTER_SITES:n
with One File Per SiteMASTER_SITES= ftp://ftp1.example.com/:source1 \ http://www.example.com/:source2 DISTFILES= source1.tar.gz:source1 \ source2.tar.gz:source2
Multiple distribution files can have the same tag.
Continuing the previous example, suppose that there was a
third distfile, source3.tar.gz
, that
is downloaded from
ftp.example2.com
. The
Makefile
would then be written like
Example 5.6, “Simplified Use of MASTER_SITES:n
with More Than One File Per Site”.
MASTER_SITES:n
with More Than One File Per SiteMASTER_SITES= ftp://ftp.example.com/:source1 \ http://www.example.com/:source2 DISTFILES= source1.tar.gz:source1 \ source2.tar.gz:source2 \ source3.tar.gz:source2
Okay, so the previous example did not reflect the new
port's needs? In this section we will explain in detail how
the fine grained fetching mechanism
MASTER_SITES:n
works and how it can
be used.
Elements can be postfixed with
:
where
n
n
is
[^:,]+
, that is,
n
could conceptually be any
alphanumeric string but we will limit it to
[a-zA-Z_][0-9a-zA-Z_]+
for
now.
Moreover, string matching is case sensitive; that
is, n
is different from
N
.
However, these words cannot be used for
postfixing purposes since they yield special meaning:
default
, all
and
ALL
(they are used internally in
item ii).
Furthermore, DEFAULT
is a special
purpose word (check item 3).
Elements postfixed with :n
belong to the group n
,
:m
belong to group
m
and so forth.
Elements without a postfix are groupless, they
all belong to the special group
DEFAULT
. Any elements postfixed
with DEFAULT
, is just being
redundant unless an element belongs
to both DEFAULT
and other groups at
the same time (check item 5).
These examples are equivalent but the first one is preferred:
MASTER_SITES= alpha
MASTER_SITES= alpha:DEFAULT
Groups are not exclusive, an element may belong to several different groups at the same time and a group can either have either several different elements or none at all.
When an element belongs to several groups
at the same time, use the comma operator
(,
).
Instead of repeating it several times, each time
with a different postfix, we can list several groups at
once in a single postfix. For instance,
:m,n,o
marks an element that belongs
to group m
, n
and
o
.
All these examples are equivalent but the last one is preferred:
MASTER_SITES= alpha alpha:SOME_SITE
MASTER_SITES= alpha:DEFAULT alpha:SOME_SITE
MASTER_SITES= alpha:SOME_SITE,DEFAULT
MASTER_SITES= alpha:DEFAULT,SOME_SITE
All sites within a given group are sorted according
to MASTER_SORT_AWK
. All groups
within MASTER_SITES
and
PATCH_SITES
are sorted as
well.
Group semantics can be used in any of the
variables MASTER_SITES
,
PATCH_SITES
,
MASTER_SITE_SUBDIR
,
PATCH_SITE_SUBDIR
,
DISTFILES
, and
PATCHFILES
according to this
syntax:
All MASTER_SITES
,
PATCH_SITES
,
MASTER_SITE_SUBDIR
and
PATCH_SITE_SUBDIR
elements must
be terminated with the forward slash
/
character. If any elements
belong to any groups, the group postfix
:
must come right after the terminator
n
/
. The
MASTER_SITES:n
mechanism relies
on the existence of the terminator
/
to avoid confusing elements
where a :n
is a valid part of the
element with occurrences where :n
denotes group n
. For
compatibility purposes, since the
/
terminator was not required
before in both MASTER_SITE_SUBDIR
and PATCH_SITE_SUBDIR
elements,
if the postfix immediate preceding character is not
a /
then :n
will be considered a valid part of the element
instead of a group postfix even if an element is
postfixed with :n
. See both
Example 5.7, “Detailed Use of
MASTER_SITES:n
in
MASTER_SITE_SUBDIR
”
and Example 5.8, “Detailed Use of
MASTER_SITES:n
with Comma
Operator, Multiple Files, Multiple Sites and
Multiple Subdirectories”.
MASTER_SITES:n
in
MASTER_SITE_SUBDIR
MASTER_SITE_SUBDIR= old:n new/:NEW
Directories within group
DEFAULT
->
old:n
Directories within group
NEW
-> new
MASTER_SITES:n
with Comma
Operator, Multiple Files, Multiple Sites and
Multiple SubdirectoriesMASTER_SITES= http://site1/%SUBDIR%/ http://site2/:DEFAULT \ http://site3/:group3 http://site4/:group4 \ http://site5/:group5 http://site6/:group6 \ http://site7/:DEFAULT,group6 \ http://site8/%SUBDIR%/:group6,group7 \ http://site9/:group8 DISTFILES= file1 file2:DEFAULT file3:group3 \ file4:group4,group5,group6 file5:grouping \ file6:group7 MASTER_SITE_SUBDIR= directory-trial:1 directory-n/:groupn \ directory-one/:group6,DEFAULT \ directory
The previous example results in this fine grained fetching. Sites are listed in the exact order they will be used.
file1
will be
fetched from
MASTER_SITE_OVERRIDE
http://site1/directory-trial:1/
http://site1/directory-one/
http://site1/directory/
http://site2/
http://site7/
MASTER_SITE_BACKUP
file2
will be fetched
exactly as file1
since
they both belong to the same group
MASTER_SITE_OVERRIDE
http://site1/directory-trial:1/
http://site1/directory-one/
http://site1/directory/
http://site2/
http://site7/
MASTER_SITE_BACKUP
file3
will be fetched
from
MASTER_SITE_OVERRIDE
http://site3/
MASTER_SITE_BACKUP
file4
will be
fetched from
MASTER_SITE_OVERRIDE
http://site4/
http://site5/
http://site6/
http://site7/
http://site8/directory-one/
MASTER_SITE_BACKUP
file5
will be fetched
from
MASTER_SITE_OVERRIDE
MASTER_SITE_BACKUP
file6
will be fetched
from
MASTER_SITE_OVERRIDE
http://site8/
MASTER_SITE_BACKUP
How do I group one of the special macros from
bsd.sites.mk
, for example,
SourceForge (SF
)?
This has been simplified as much as possible. See
Example 5.9, “Detailed Use of MASTER_SITES:n
with SourceForge (SF
)”.
MASTER_SITES:n
with SourceForge (SF
)MASTER_SITES= http://site1/ SF/something/1.0:sourceforge,TEST DISTFILES= something.tar.gz:sourceforge
something.tar.gz
will be
fetched from all sites within SourceForge.
How do I use this with
PATCH
?*
All examples were done with
MASTER
but they work exactly the same for
*
PATCH
ones as can be seen in Example 5.10, “Simplified Use of
*
MASTER_SITES:n
with
PATCH_SITES
”.
MASTER_SITES:n
with
PATCH_SITES
PATCH_SITES= http://site1/ http://site2/:test PATCHFILES= patch1:test
All current ports remain the same. The
MASTER_SITES:n
feature code is only
activated if there are elements postfixed with
:
like
elements according to the aforementioned syntax rules,
especially as shown in item 7.n
The port targets remain the same:
checksum
,
makesum
,
patch
,
configure
,
build
, etc. With the obvious
exceptions of do-fetch
,
fetch-list
,
master-sites
and
patch-sites
.
do-fetch
: deploys
the new grouping postfixed
DISTFILES
and
PATCHFILES
with their matching
group elements within both
MASTER_SITES
and
PATCH_SITES
which use matching
group elements within both
MASTER_SITE_SUBDIR
and
PATCH_SITE_SUBDIR
. Check Example 5.8, “Detailed Use of
MASTER_SITES:n
with Comma
Operator, Multiple Files, Multiple Sites and
Multiple Subdirectories”.
fetch-list
: works
like old fetch-list
with
the exception that it groups just like
do-fetch
.
master-sites
and
patch-sites
:
(incompatible with older versions) only return the
elements of group DEFAULT
; in
fact, they execute targets
master-sites-default
and
patch-sites-default
respectively.
Furthermore, using target either
master-sites-all
or
patch-sites-all
is
preferred to directly checking either
MASTER_SITES
or
PATCH_SITES
. Also,
directly checking is not guaranteed to work in any
future versions. Check item B
for more information on these new port
targets.
New port targets
There are
master-sites-
and
n
patch-sites-
targets which will list the elements of the
respective group n
n
within MASTER_SITES
and
PATCH_SITES
respectively. For
instance, both
master-sites-DEFAULT
and patch-sites-DEFAULT
will return the elements of group
DEFAULT
,
master-sites-test
and
patch-sites-test
of
group test
, and thereon.
There are new targets
master-sites-all
and
patch-sites-all
which do
the work of the old
master-sites
and
patch-sites
ones. They
return the elements of all groups as if they all
belonged to the same group with the caveat that it
lists as many MASTER_SITE_BACKUP
and MASTER_SITE_OVERRIDE
as there
are groups defined within either
DISTFILES
or
PATCHFILES
; respectively for
master-sites-all
and
patch-sites-all
.
Do not let the port clutter
/usr/ports/distfiles
. If the port
requires a lot of files to be fetched, or contains a file that
has a name that might conflict with other ports (for example,
Makefile
), set
DIST_SUBDIR
to the name of the port
(${PORTNAME}
or
${PKGNAMEPREFIX}${PORTNAME}
are
fine). This will change DISTDIR
from the
default /usr/ports/distfiles
to
/usr/ports/distfiles/${DIST_SUBDIR}
, and
in effect puts everything that is required for the port into
that subdirectory.
It will also look at the subdirectory with the same name
on the backup master site at
ftp.FreeBSD.org
. (Setting
DISTDIR
explicitly in
Makefile
will not accomplish this, so
please use DIST_SUBDIR
.)
This does not affect
MASTER_SITES
defined in the
Makefile
.
If the port uses binary distfiles and has a license that
requires that the source code is provided with packages
distributed in binary form, like GPL,
ALWAYS_KEEP_DISTFILES
will instruct the
FreeBSD build cluster to keep a copy of the files specified in
DISTFILES
. Users of these ports will
generally not need these files, so it is a good idea to only
add the source distfiles to DISTFILES
when
PACKAGE_BUILDING
is defined.
ALWAYS_KEEP_DISTFILES
.if defined(PACKAGE_BUILDING)
DISTFILES+= foo.tar.gz
ALWAYS_KEEP_DISTFILES= yes
.endif
When adding extra files to DISTFILES
,
make sure to also add them to distinfo
.
Also, the additional files will normally be extracted into
WRKDIR
as well, which for some ports may
lead to undesirable side effects and require special
handling.
Set your mail-address here. Please. :-)
Only a single address without the comment part is
allowed as a MAINTAINER
value. The format
used is [email protected]
. Please
do not include any descriptive text such as a real name in
this entry. That merely confuses the Ports infrastructure
and most tools using it.
The maintainer is responsible for keeping the port up to date and making sure that it works correctly. For a detailed description of the responsibilities of a port maintainer, refer to The challenge for port maintainers.
A maintainer volunteers to keep a port in good working order. Maintainers have the primary responsibility for their ports, but not exclusive ownership. Ports exist for the benefit of the community and, in reality, belong to the community. What this means is that people other than the maintainer can make changes to a port. Large changes to the Ports Collection might require changes to many ports. The FreeBSD Ports Management Team or members of other teams might modify ports to fix dependency issues or other problems, like a version bump for a shared library update.
Some types of fixes have “blanket approval”
from the Ports Management Team <[email protected]>
, allowing any committer to fix those
categories of problems on any port. These fixes do not need
approval from the maintainer. Blanket approval does not apply
to ports that are maintained by teams like <[email protected]>
, <[email protected]>
, <[email protected]>
, or <[email protected]>
. These teams use
external repositories and can have work that would conflict
with changes that would normally fall under blanket
approval.
Blanket approval for most ports applies to these types of fixes:
Most infrastructure changes to a port (that is,
modernizing, but not changing the functionality). For
example, converting to staging,
USE_GMAKE
to
USES=gmake
, the new
LIB_DEPENDS
format...
Trivial and tested build and runtime fixes.
Other changes to the port will be sent to the maintainer
for review and approval before being committed. If the
maintainer does not respond to an update request after two weeks
(excluding major public holidays), then that is considered a
maintainer timeout, and the update may be made without explicit
maintainer approval. If the maintainer does not respond within
three months, or if there have been three consecutive timeouts,
then that maintainer is considered absent without
leave, and can be replaced as the maintainer of the particular
port in question. Exceptions to this are anything maintained by
the Ports Management Team <[email protected]>
, or the Security Officer Team <[email protected]>
. No unauthorized
commits may ever be made to ports maintained by those
groups.
We reserve the right to modify the maintainer's submission to better match existing policies and style of the Ports Collection without explicit blessing from the submitter or the maintainer. Also, large infrastructural changes can result in a port being modified without the maintainer's consent. These kinds of changes will never affect the port's functionality.
The Ports Management Team <[email protected]>
reserves the right to revoke or override
anyone's maintainership for any reason, and the
Security Officer Team <[email protected]>
reserves the right to revoke or override
maintainership for security reasons.
This is a one-line description of the port. Please respect these rules:
Try to keep the COMMENT value at no longer than 70
characters, as this line will be used by
pkg info
(see pkg-info(8)) to
display a one-line summary of the port;
Do not include the package name (or version number of the software);
The comment must begin with a capital and end without a period;
Do not start with an indefinite article (that is, A or An);
Names are capitalized (for example, Apache, JavaScript, Perl);
For lists of words, use the Oxford comma (for example, green, red, and blue);
Spell check the text.
Here is an example:
COMMENT= Cat chasing a mouse all over the screen
The COMMENT variable immediately follows the
MAINTAINER variable in the Makefile
.
Portscout is an automated distfile check utility for the FreeBSD Ports Collection, described in detail in Section 14.5, “Portscout: the FreeBSD Ports Distfile Scanner”.
PORTSCOUT
defines special
conditions within which the Portscout
distfile scanner is restricted.
Situations where PORTSCOUT
is set include:
When distfiles have to be ignored, whether for specific
versions, or specific minor revisions. For example, to
exclude version 8.2
from distfile
version checks because it is known to be broken, add:
PORTSCOUT= ignore:8.2
When specific versions or specific major and minor
revisions of a distfile must be checked. For example, if
only version 0.6.4
must be
monitored because newer versions have compatibility issues
with FreeBSD, add:
PORTSCOUT= limit:^0\.6\.4
When URLs listing the available versions differ from the download URLs. For example, to limit distfile version checks to the download page for the databases/pgtune port, add:
PORTSCOUT= site:http://pgfoundry.org/frs/?group_id=1000416
Many ports depend on other ports. This is a very convenient feature of most Unix-like operating systems, including FreeBSD. Multiple ports can share a common dependency, rather than bundling that dependency with every port or package that needs it. There are seven variables that can be used to ensure that all the required bits will be on the user's machine. There are also some pre-supported dependency variables for common cases, plus a few more to control the behavior of dependencies.
This variable specifies the shared libraries this port
depends on. It is a list of
lib
:dir
tuples where lib
is the name of
the shared library, dir
is the
directory in which to find it in case it is not available.
For example,
LIB_DEPENDS= libjpeg.so:${PORTSDIR}/graphics/jpeg
will check for a shared jpeg library with any version, and
descend into the graphics/jpeg
subdirectory of the ports tree to build and install it if it
is not found.
The dependency is checked twice, once from within the
build
target and then from within
the install
target. Also, the name
of the dependency is put into the package so that
pkg install
(see pkg-install(8)) will
automatically install it if it is not on the user's
system.
This variable specifies executables or files this port
depends on during run-time. It is a list of
path
:dir
[:target
]
tuples where path
is the name of
the executable or file, dir
is the
directory in which to find it in case it is not available, and
target
is the target to call in
that directory. If path
starts
with a slash (/
), it is treated as a file
and its existence is tested with test -e
;
otherwise, it is assumed to be an executable, and
which -s
is used to determine if the
program exists in the search path.
For example,
RUN_DEPENDS= ${LOCALBASE}/news/bin/innd:${PORTSDIR}/news/inn \ xmlcatmgr:${PORTSDIR}/textproc/xmlcatmgr
will check if the file or directory
/usr/local/news/bin/innd
exists, and
build and install it from the news/inn
subdirectory of the ports tree if it is not found. It will
also see if an executable called xmlcatmgr
is in the search path, and descend into
textproc/xmlcatmgr
to build and install it if it is not found.
In this case, innd
is actually an
executable; if an executable is in a place that is not
expected to be in the search path, use the full
pathname.
The official search PATH
used on the
ports build cluster is
/sbin:/bin:/usr/sbin:/usr/bin:/usr/local/sbin:/usr/local/bin
The dependency is checked from within the
install
target. Also, the name of
the dependency is put into the package so that
pkg install
(see pkg-install(8)) will
automatically install it if it is not on the user's system.
The target
part can be omitted if
it is the same as DEPENDS_TARGET
.
A quite common situation is when
RUN_DEPENDS
is literally the same as
BUILD_DEPENDS
, especially if ported
software is written in a scripted language or if it requires
the same build and run-time environment. In this case, it is
both tempting and intuitive to directly assign one to the
other:
RUN_DEPENDS= ${BUILD_DEPENDS}
However, such assignment can pollute run-time
dependencies with entries not defined in the port's original
BUILD_DEPENDS
. This happens because of
make(1)'s lazy evaluation of variable assignment.
Consider a Makefile
with
USE_
,
which are processed by *
ports/Mk/bsd.*.mk
to augment initial build dependencies. For example,
USES= gmake
adds
devel/gmake to
BUILD_DEPENDS
. To prevent such additional
dependencies from polluting RUN_DEPENDS
,
create another variable with the current content of
BUILD_DEPENDS
and assign it to both
BUILD_DEPENDS
and
RUN_DEPENDS
:
MY_DEPENDS= some:${PORTSDIR}/devel/some \ other:${PORTSDIR}/lang/other BUILD_DEPENDS= ${MY_DEPENDS} RUN_DEPENDS= ${MY_DEPENDS}
This variable specifies executables or files this port
requires to build. Like RUN_DEPENDS
, it
is a list of
path
:dir
[:target
]
tuples. For example,
BUILD_DEPENDS= unzip:${PORTSDIR}/archivers/unzip
will check for an executable called
unzip
, and descend into the
archivers/unzip
subdirectory of the
ports tree to build and install it if it is not found.
“build” here means everything from
extraction to compilation. The dependency is checked from
within the extract
target. The
target
part can be omitted if it
is the same as DEPENDS_TARGET
This variable specifies executables or files this port
requires to fetch. Like the previous two, it is a list of
path
:dir
[:target
]
tuples. For example,
FETCH_DEPENDS= ncftp2:${PORTSDIR}/net/ncftp2
will check for an executable called
ncftp2
, and descend into the
net/ncftp2
subdirectory of the ports
tree to build and install it if it is not found.
The dependency is checked from within the
fetch
target. The
target
part can be omitted if it is
the same as DEPENDS_TARGET
.
This variable specifies executables or files this port
requires for extraction. Like the previous, it is a list of
path
:dir
[:target
]
tuples. For example,
EXTRACT_DEPENDS= unzip:${PORTSDIR}/archivers/unzip
will check for an executable called
unzip
, and descend into the
archivers/unzip
subdirectory of the
ports tree to build and install it if it is not found.
The dependency is checked from within the
extract
target. The
target
part can be omitted if it
is the same as DEPENDS_TARGET
.
Use this variable only if the extraction does not
already work (the default assumes tar
)
and cannot be made to work using
USES=tar
, USES=lha
or
USES=zip
described in Chapter 15, Values of
USES
.
This variable specifies executables or files this port
requires to patch. Like the previous, it is a list of
path
:dir
[:target
]
tuples. For example,
PATCH_DEPENDS= ${NONEXISTENT}:${PORTSDIR}/java/jfc:extract
will descend into the java/jfc
subdirectory of the ports tree to extract it.
The dependency is checked from within the
patch
target. The
target
part can be omitted if it
is the same as DEPENDS_TARGET
.
Parameters can be added to define different features and
dependencies used by the port. They are specified by adding
this line to the Makefile
:
USES= feature[:arguments]
For the complete list of values, please see
Chapter 15, Values of
USES
.
USES
cannot be assigned after
inclusion of bsd.port.pre.mk
.
Several variables exist to define common dependencies
shared by many ports. Their use is optional, but helps to
reduce the verbosity of the port
Makefile
s. Each of them is styled as
USE_
. These
variables may be used only in the port
*
Makefile
s and
ports/Mk/bsd.*.mk
. They are not meant
for user-settable options — use
PORT_OPTIONS
for that purpose.
It is always incorrect to set any
USE_
in
*
/etc/make.conf
. For instance,
setting
USE_GCC=X.Y
(where X.Y is version number) would add a dependency
on gccXY for every port, including
lang/gccXY
itself!
USE_*
Variable | Means |
---|---|
USE_GCC | The port requires GCC (gcc or
g++ ) to build. Some ports need any
GCC version, some require modern, recent versions. It
is typically set to any (in this
case, GCC from base would be used on versions of FreeBSD
that still have it, or lang/gcc
port would be installed when default C/C++ compiler is
Clang); or yes (means always use
stable, modern GCC from lang/gcc
port). The exact version can also be specified, with
a value such as 4.7 . The minimal
required version can be specified as
4.6+ . The GCC from the base system
is used when it satisfies the requested version,
otherwise an appropriate compiler is built from the
port, and CC and
CXX are adjusted
accordingly. |
Variables related to gmake and
configure
are described in
Section 6.5, “Building Mechanisms”, while
autoconf,
automake and
libtool are described in
Section 6.6, “Using GNU Autotools”.
Perl related variables are
described in Section 6.8, “Using Perl”. X11 variables are
listed in Section 6.9, “Using X11”.
Section 6.10, “Using GNOME” deals with GNOME and
Section 6.12, “Using KDE” with KDE related variables.
Section 6.13, “Using Java” documents Java variables, while
Section 6.14, “Web Applications, Apache and PHP” contains information on
Apache,
PHP and PEAR modules.
Python is discussed in
Section 6.15, “Using Python”, while
Ruby in
Section 6.18, “Using Ruby”. Section 6.19, “Using SDL”
provides variables used for SDL
applications and finally, Section 6.23, “Using Xfce”
contains information on
Xfce.
A minimal version of a dependency can be specified in any
except *
_DEPENDSLIB_DEPENDS
using this
syntax:
p5-Spiffy>=0.26:${PORTSDIR}/devel/p5-Spiffy
The first field contains a dependent package name, which must match the entry in the package database, a comparison sign, and a package version. The dependency is satisfied if p5-Spiffy-0.26 or newer is installed on the machine.
As mentioned above, the default target to call when a
dependency is required is
DEPENDS_TARGET
. It defaults to
install
. This is a user variable; it is
never defined in a port's Makefile
. If
the port needs a special way to handle a dependency, use the
:target
part of
instead of redefining
*
_DEPENDSDEPENDS_TARGET
.
When running make clean
, the port
dependencies are automatically cleaned too. If this is not
desirable, define
NOCLEANDEPENDS
in the environment. This
may be particularly desirable if the port has something that
takes a long time to rebuild in its dependency list, such as
KDE, GNOME or Mozilla.
To depend on another port unconditionally, use the
variable ${NONEXISTENT}
as the first field
of BUILD_DEPENDS
or
RUN_DEPENDS
. Use this only when
the source of the other port is needed. Compilation time can
be saved by specifying the target too. For
instance
BUILD_DEPENDS= ${NONEXISTENT}:${PORTSDIR}/graphics/jpeg:extract
will always descend to the jpeg
port
and extract it.
Do not introduce any circular dependencies into the ports tree!
The ports building technology does not tolerate circular
dependencies. If one is introduced, someone, somewhere in the
world, will have their FreeBSD installation broken
almost immediately, with many others quickly to follow. These
can really be hard to detect. If in doubt, before making
that change, make sure to run:
cd /usr/ports; make index
. That process
can be quite slow on older machines, but it may be able to
save a large number of people, including yourself,
a lot of grief in the process.
Dependencies must be declared either explicitly or by using the OPTIONS framework. Using other methods like automatic detection complicates indexing, which causes problems for port and package management.
.include <bsd.port.pre.mk> .if exists(${LOCALBASE}/bin/foo) LIB_DEPENDS= libbar.so:${PORTSDIR}/foo/bar .endif
The problem with trying to automatically add dependencies is that files and settings outside an individual port can change at any time. For example: an index is built, then a batch of ports are installed. But one of the ports installs the tested file. The index is now incorrect, because an installed port unexpectedly has a new dependency. The index may still be wrong even after rebuilding if other ports also determine their need for dependencies based on the existence of other files.
OPTIONS_DEFINE= BAR BAR_DESC= Calling cellphones via bar BAR_LIB_DEPENDS= libbar.so:${PORTSDIR}/foo/bar
Testing option variables is the correct method. It will not cause inconsistencies in the index of a batch of ports, provided the options were defined prior to the index build. Simple scripts can then be used to automate the building, installation, and updating of these ports and their packages.
USE_
are
set by the port maintainer to define software on which this
port depends. A port that needs Firefox would set*
USE_FIREFOX= yes
Some USE_
can accept version numbers or other parameters. For example,
a port that requires Apache 2.2 would set*
USE_APACHE= 22
For more control over dependencies in some cases,
WANT_
are
available to more precisely specify what is needed. For
example, consider the mail/squirrelmail port. This
port needs some PHP modules, which are listed in
*
USE_PHP
:
USE_PHP= session mhash gettext mbstring pcre openssl xml
Those modules may be available in CLI or web versions, so
the web version is selected with
WANT_
:*
WANT_PHP_WEB= yes
Available
USE_
and
*
WANT_
are
defined in the files in
*
/usr/ports/Mk
.
If the port needs to build slightly different versions of
packages by having a variable (for instance, resolution, or
paper size) take different values, create one subdirectory per
package to make it easier for users to see what to do, but try
to share as many files as possible between ports. Typically, by
using variables cleverly, only a very short
Makefile
is needed in all but one of the
directories. In the sole Makefile
, use
MASTERDIR
to specify the directory where the
rest of the files are. Also, use a variable as part of PKGNAMESUFFIX
so the packages will have different names.
This will be best demonstrated by an example. This is part
of japanese/xdvi300/Makefile
;
PORTNAME= xdvi PORTVERSION= 17 PKGNAMEPREFIX= ja- PKGNAMESUFFIX= ${RESOLUTION} # default RESOLUTION?= 300 .if ${RESOLUTION} != 118 && ${RESOLUTION} != 240 && \ ${RESOLUTION} != 300 && ${RESOLUTION} != 400 pre-everything:: @${ECHO_MSG} "Error: invalid value for RESOLUTION: \"${RESOLUTION}\"" @${ECHO_MSG} "Possible values are: 118, 240, 300 (default) and 400." @${FALSE} .endif
japanese/xdvi300 also has all
the regular patches, package files, etc. Running
make
there, it will take the default value
for the resolution (300) and build the port normally.
As for other resolutions, this is the
entire
xdvi118/Makefile
:
RESOLUTION= 118 MASTERDIR= ${.CURDIR}/../xdvi300 .include "${MASTERDIR}/Makefile"
(xdvi240/Makefile
and
xdvi400/Makefile
are similar).
MASTERDIR
definition tells
bsd.port.mk
that the regular set of
subdirectories like FILESDIR
and
SCRIPTDIR
are to be found under
xdvi300
. The
RESOLUTION=118
line will override the
RESOLUTION=300
line in
xdvi300/Makefile
and the port will be built
with resolution set to 118.
If the port anchors its man tree somewhere other than
PREFIX
, use
MANDIRS
to specify those directories. Note
that the files corresponding to manual pages must be placed in
pkg-plist
along with the rest of the files.
The purpose of MANDIRS
is to enable automatic
compression of manual pages, therefore the file names are
suffixed with .gz
.
If the package needs to install GNU info
files, list them in INFO
(without the
trailing .info
), one entry per document.
These files are assumed to be installed to
PREFIX/INFO_PATH
. Change
INFO_PATH
if the package uses a different
location. However, this is not recommended. These entries
contain just the path relative to
PREFIX/INFO_PATH
. For example,
lang/gcc34 installs info files to
PREFIX/INFO_PATH/gcc34
, and
INFO
will be something like this:
INFO= gcc34/cpp gcc34/cppinternals gcc34/g77 ...
Appropriate installation/de-installation code will be
automatically added to the temporary
pkg-plist
before package
registration.
Many applications can be built with optional or differing configurations. Examples include choice of natural (human) language, GUI versus command-line, or type of database to support. Users may need a different configuration than the default, so the ports system provides hooks the port author can use to control which variant will be built. Supporting these options properly will make users happy, and effectively provide two or more ports for the price of one.
OPTIONS_
give the user installing the port a dialog showing the
available options, and then saves those options to
*
${PORT_DBDIR}/${OPTIONS_NAME}/options
.
The next time the port is built, the options are
reused. PORT_DBDIR
defaults to
/var/db/ports
.
OPTIONS_NAME
is to the port origin with
an underscore as the space separator, for example, for
dns/bind99 it will be
dns_bind99
.
When the user runs make config
(or
runs make build
for the first time), the
framework checks for
${PORT_DBDIR}/${OPTIONS_NAME}/options
.
If that file does not exist, the values of
OPTIONS_
are used, and a dialog box is
displayed where the options can be enabled or disabled.
Then *
options
is saved and the
configured variables are used when building the port.
If a new version of the port adds new
OPTIONS
, the dialog will be presented to
the user with the saved values of old
OPTIONS
prefilled.
make showconfig
shows the saved
configuration. Use make rmconfig
to remove the saved configuration.
OPTIONS_DEFINE
contains a list of
OPTIONS
to be used. These are
independent of each other and are not grouped:
OPTIONS_DEFINE= OPT1 OPT2
Once defined, OPTIONS
are
described (optional, but strongly recommended):
OPT1_DESC= Describe OPT1 OPT2_DESC= Describe OPT2 OPT3_DESC= Describe OPT3 OPT4_DESC= Describe OPT4 OPT5_DESC= Describe OPT5 OPT6_DESC= Describe OPT6
ports/Mk/bsd.options.desc.mk
has descriptions for many common OPTIONS
.
While often useful, override them if the
description is insufficient for the port.
When describing options, view it from the
perspective of the user: “What functionality does it
change?”
and “Why would I want to enable this?”
Do not just repeat the name. For example, describing the
NLS
option as
“include NLS support” does not help the user,
who can already see the option name but may not know what
it means. Describing it as “Native Language Support
via gettext utilities” is much more
helpful.
Option names are always in all uppercase. They cannot use mixed case or lowercase.
OPTIONS
can be grouped as radio
choices, where only one choice from each group is
allowed:
OPTIONS_SINGLE= SG1 OPTIONS_SINGLE_SG1= OPT3 OPT4
There must be one of each
OPTIONS_SINGLE
group selected at all
times for the options to be valid. One option of each
group must be added to
OPTIONS_DEFAULT
.
OPTIONS
can be grouped as radio
choices, where none or only one choice from each group
is allowed:
OPTIONS_RADIO= RG1 OPTIONS_RADIO_RG1= OPT7 OPT8
OPTIONS
can also be grouped as
“multiple-choice” lists, where
at least one option must be
enabled:
OPTIONS_MULTI= MG1 OPTIONS_MULTI_MG1= OPT5 OPT6
OPTIONS
can also be grouped as
“multiple-choice” lists, where none or any
option can be enabled:
OPTIONS_GROUP= GG1 OPTIONS_GROUP_GG1= OPT9 OPT10
OPTIONS
are unset by default,
unless they are listed in
OPTIONS_DEFAULT
:
OPTIONS_DEFAULT= OPT1 OPT3 OPT6
OPTIONS
definitions must appear
before the inclusion of
bsd.port.options.mk
.
PORT_OPTIONS
values can only be tested
after the inclusion of
bsd.port.options.mk
. Inclusion of
bsd.port.pre.mk
can be used instead,
too, and is still widely used in ports written before the
introduction of bsd.port.options.mk
.
But be aware that some variables will not work as expected
after the inclusion of bsd.port.pre.mk
,
typically some
USE_
flags.*
OPTIONS
OPTIONS_DEFINE= FOO BAR FOO_DESC= Option foo support BAR_DESC= Feature bar support OPTIONS_DEFAULT=FOO # Will add --with-foo / --without-foo FOO_CONFIGURE_WITH= foo BAR_RUN_DEPENDS= bar:${PORTSDIR}/bar/bar .include <bsd.port.mk>
OPTIONS
.if ! ${PORT_OPTIONS:MEXAMPLES} CONFIGURE_ARGS+=--without-examples .endif
The form shown above is discouraged. The preferred method is using a configure knob to really enable and disable the feature to match the option:
# Will add --with-examples / --without-examples EXAMPLES_CONFIGURE_WITH= examples
OPTIONS
OPTIONS_DEFINE= EXAMPLES OPTIONS_SINGLE= BACKEND OPTIONS_SINGLE_BACKEND= MYSQL PGSQL BDB OPTIONS_MULTI= AUTH OPTIONS_MULTI_AUTH= LDAP PAM SSL EXAMPLES_DESC= Install extra examples MYSQL_DESC= Use MySQL as backend PGSQL_DESC= Use PostgreSQL as backend BDB_DESC= Use Berkeley DB as backend LDAP_DESC= Build with LDAP authentication support PAM_DESC= Build with PAM support SSL_DESC= Build with OpenSSL support OPTIONS_DEFAULT= PGSQL LDAP SSL # Will add USE_PGSQL=yes PGSQL_USE= pgsql=yes # Will add --enable-postgres / --disable-postgres PGSQL_CONFIGURE_ENABLE= postgres ICU_LIB_DEPENDS= libicuuc.so:${PORTSDIR}/devel/icu # Will add --with-examples / --without-examples EXAMPLES_CONFIGURE_WITH= examples # Check other OPTIONS .include <bsd.port.mk>
These options are always on by default.
DOCS
— build and install
documentation.
NLS
— Native Language
Support.
EXAMPLES
— build and
install examples.
IPV6
— IPv6 protocol
support.
There is no need to add these to
OPTIONS_DEFAULT
. To have them active,
and show up in the options selection dialog, however, they
must be added to OPTIONS_DEFINE
.
When using a GNU configure script, keep an eye on which
optional features are activated by auto-detection. Explicitly
disable optional features that are not needed by
adding --without-xxx
or
--disable-xxx
in
CONFIGURE_ARGS
.
.if ${PORT_OPTIONS:MFOO} LIB_DEPENDS+= libfoo.so:${PORTSDIR}/devel/foo CONFIGURE_ARGS+= --enable-foo .endif
In the example above, imagine a library libfoo is
installed on the system. The user does not want this
application to use libfoo, so he toggled the option off in the
make config
dialog. But the application's
configure script detects the library present in the system and
includes its support in the resulting executable. Now when
the user decides to remove libfoo from the system, the ports
system does not protest (no dependency on libfoo was recorded)
but the application breaks.
FOO_LIB_DEPENDS= libfoo.so:${PORTSDIR}/devel/foo # Will add --enable-foo / --disable-foo FOO_CONFIGURE_ENABLE= foo
Under some circumstances, the shorthand conditional
syntax can cause problems with complex constructs. The
errors are usually
Malformed conditional
, an alternative
syntax can be used.
.if !empty(VARIABLE:MVALUE)
as an alternative to
.if ${VARIABLE:MVALUE}
There are some macros to help simplify conditional values which differ based on the options set.
If OPTIONS_SUB
is set to
yes
then each of the options added to
OPTIONS_DEFINE
will be added to
PLIST_SUB
and
SUB_LIST
, for example:
OPTIONS_DEFINE= OPT1 OPTIONS_SUB= yes
is equivalent to:
OPTIONS_DEFINE= OPT1 .include <bsd.port.options.mk> .if ${PORT_OPTIONS:MOPT1} PLIST_SUB+= OPT1="" NO_OPT1="@comment " SUB_LIST+= OPT1="" NO_OPT1="@comment " .else PLIST_SUB+= OPT1="@comment " NO_OPT1="" SUB_LIST+= OPT1="@comment " NO_OPT1="" .endif
The value of OPTIONS_SUB
is
ignored. Setting it to any value will add
PLIST_SUB
and
SUB_LIST
entries for
all options.
When option OPT
is selected,
for each
pair in
key
=value
,
OPT
_USEvalue
is appended to the
corresponding
USE_
. If
KEY
value
has spaces in it, replace
them with commas and they will be changed back to spaces
during processing. For example:
OPTIONS_DEFINE= OPT1 OPT1_USE= mysql=yes xorg=x11,xextproto,xext,xrandr
is equivalent to:
OPTIONS_DEFINE= OPT1 .include <bsd.port.options.mk> .if ${PORT_OPTIONS:MOPT1} USE_MYSQL= yes USE_XORG= x11 xextproto xext xrandr .endif
When option OPT
is
not selected, for each
pair in
key
=value
,
OPT
_USE_OFFvalue
is appended to the
corresponding
USE_
. If
KEY
value
has spaces in it, replace
them with commas and they will be changed back to spaces
during processing. For example:
OPTIONS_DEFINE= OPT1 OPT1_USE_OFF= mysql=yes xorg=x11,xextproto,xext,xrandr
is equivalent to:
OPTIONS_DEFINE= OPT1 .include <bsd.port.options.mk> .if ! ${PORT_OPTIONS:MOPT1} USE_MYSQL= yes USE_XORG= x11 xextproto xext xrandr .endif
When option OPT
is selected,
for each entry
in
then
OPT
_CONFIGURE_ENABLE--enable-
is appended to entry
CONFIGURE_ARGS
. When
option OPT
is not selected,
--disable-
is appended to entry
CONFIGURE_ARGS
. An
optional argument can be specified with an
=
symbol. This argument is only appended
to the
--enable-
configure option. For example:entry
OPTIONS_DEFINE= OPT1 OPT2 OPT1_CONFIGURE_ENABLE= test1 test2 OPT2_CONFIGURE_ENABLE= test2=exhaustive
is equivalent to:
OPTIONS_DEFINE= OPT1 .include <bsd.port.options.mk> .if ${PORT_OPTIONS:MOPT1} CONFIGURE_ARGS+= --enable-test1 --enable-test2 .else CONFIGURE_ARGS+= --disable-test1 --disable-test2 .endif .if ${PORT_OPTIONS:MOPT2} CONFIGURE_ARGS+= --enable-test2=exhaustive .else CONFIGURE_ARGS+= --disable-test2 .endif
When option OPT
is selected,
for each entry
in
then
OPT
_CONFIGURE_WITH--with-
is appended to entry
CONFIGURE_ARGS
. When
option OPT
is not selected,
--without-
is appended to entry
CONFIGURE_ARGS
. An
optional argument can be specified with an
=
symbol. This argument is only appended
to the
--with-
configure option. For example:entry
OPTIONS_DEFINE= OPT1 OPT2 OPT1_CONFIGURE_WITH= test1 OPT2_CONFIGURE_WITH= test2=exhaustive
is equivalent to:
OPTIONS_DEFINE= OPT1 OPT2 .include <bsd.port.options.mk> .if ${PORT_OPTIONS:MOPT1} CONFIGURE_ARGS+= --with-test1 .else CONFIGURE_ARGS+= --without-test1 .endif .if ${PORT_OPTIONS:MOPT2} CONFIGURE_ARGS+= --with-test2=exhaustive .else CONFIGURE_ARGS+= --without-test2 .endif
When option OPT
is selected,
the value of
,
if defined, is appended to
OPT
_CONFIGURE_ONCONFIGURE_ARGS
. For example:
OPTIONS_DEFINE= OPT1 OPT1_CONFIGURE_ON= --add-test
is equivalent to:
OPTIONS_DEFINE= OPT1 .include <bsd.port.options.mk> .if ${PORT_OPTIONS:MOPT1} CONFIGURE_ARGS+= --add-test .endif
When option OPT
is
not selected, the value of
,
if defined, is appended to
OPT
_CONFIGURE_ONCONFIGURE_ARGS
. For example:
OPTIONS_DEFINE= OPT1 OPT1_CONFIGURE_OFF= --no-test
is equivalent to:
OPTIONS_DEFINE= OPT1 .include <bsd.port.options.mk> .if ! ${PORT_OPTIONS:MOPT1} CONFIGURE_ARGS+= --no-test .endif
When option OPT
is selected,
the value of
,
if defined, is appended to OPT
_CMAKE_ONCMAKE_ARGS
.
For example:
OPTIONS_DEFINE= OPT1 OPT1_CMAKE_ON= -DTEST:BOOL=true
is equivalent to:
OPTIONS_DEFINE= OPT1 .include <bsd.port.options.mk> .if ${PORT_OPTIONS:MOPT1} CMAKE_ARGS+= -DTEST:BOOL=true .endif
When option OPT
is
not selected, the value of
,
if defined, is appended to OPT
_CMAKE_OFFCMAKE_ARGS
.
For example:
OPTIONS_DEFINE= OPT1 OPT1_CMAKE_OFF= -DTEST:BOOL=false
is equivalent to:
OPTIONS_DEFINE= OPT1 .include <bsd.port.options.mk> .if ! ${PORT_OPTIONS:MOPT1} CMAKE_ARGS+= -DTEST:BOOL=false .endif
When option OPT
is selected,
the value of
,
if defined, is appended to
OPT
_QMAKE_ONQMAKE_ARGS
. For example:
OPTIONS_DEFINE= OPT1 OPT1_QMAKE_ON= -DTEST:BOOL=true
is equivalent to:
OPTIONS_DEFINE= OPT1 .include <bsd.port.options.mk> .if ${PORT_OPTIONS:MOPT1} QMAKE_ARGS+= -DTEST:BOOL=true .endif
When option OPT
is
not selected, the value of
,
if defined, is appended to
OPT
_QMAKE_OFFQMAKE_ARGS
. For example:
OPTIONS_DEFINE= OPT1 OPT1_QMAKE_OFF= -DTEST:BOOL=false
is equivalent to:
OPTIONS_DEFINE= OPT1 .include <bsd.port.options.mk> .if ! ${PORT_OPTIONS:MOPT1} QMAKE_ARGS+= -DTEST:BOOL=false .endif
For any of these dependency types:
PKG_DEPENDS
EXTRACT_DEPENDS
PATCH_DEPENDS
FETCH_DEPENDS
BUILD_DEPENDS
LIB_DEPENDS
RUN_DEPENDS
When option OPT
is
selected, the value of
,
if defined, is appended to
OPT
_ABOVEVARIABLE
.
For example:ABOVEVARIABLE
OPTIONS_DEFINE= OPT1 OPT1_LIB_DEPENDS= liba.so:${PORTSDIR}/devel/a
is equivalent to:
OPTIONS_DEFINE= OPT1 .include <bsd.port.options.mk> .if ${PORT_OPTIONS:MOPT1} LIB_DEPENDS+= liba.so:${PORTSDIR}/devel/a .endif
When option OPT
is not selected, the value of
,
if defined, is appended to
OPT
_ABOVEVARIABLE
_OFF
.
For example:ABOVEVARIABLE
OPTIONS_DEFINE= OPT1 OPT1_LIB_DEPENDS_OFF= liba.so:${PORTSDIR}/devel/a
is equivalent to:
OPTIONS_DEFINE= OPT1 .include <bsd.port.options.mk> . if ! ${PORT_OPTIONS:MOPT1} LIB_DEPENDS+= liba.so:${PORTSDIR}/devel/a .endif
For any of these variables:
ALL_TARGET
CATEGORIES
CFLAGS
CPPFLAGS
CXXFLAGS
CONFIGURE_ENV
CONFLICTS
CONFLICTS_BUILD
CONFLICTS_INSTALL
DISTFILES
EXTRA_PATCHES
INFO
INSTALL_TARGET
LDFLAGS
MAKE_ARGS
MAKE_ENV
PATCH_SITES
PATCHFILES
PLIST_FILES
PLIST_DIRS
PLIST_DIRSTRY
PLIST_SUB
USES
Some variables are not in this list, in particular
PKGNAMEPREFIX
and
PKGNAMESUFFIX
. This is intentional. A
port must not change its name when
its option set changes.
Some of these variables, at least
ALL_TARGET
and
INSTALL_TARGET
, have their default
values set after the options are
processed.
With these lines in the
Makefile
:
ALL_TARGET= all DOCS_ALL_TARGET= doc
If the DOCS
option is enabled,
ALL_TARGET
will have a final value of
all doc
; if the option is disabled, it
would have a value of all
.
With only the options helper line in the
Makefile
:
DOCS_ALL_TARGET= doc
If the DOCS
option is enabled,
ALL_TARGET
will have a final value of
doc
; if the option is disabled, it
would have a value of all
.
When option OPT
is
selected, the value of
,
if defined, is appended to
OPT
_ABOVEVARIABLE
.
For example:ABOVEVARIABLE
OPTIONS_DEFINE= OPT1 OPT1_USES= gmake OPT1_CFLAGS= -DTEST
is equivalent to:
OPTIONS_DEFINE= OPT1 .include <bsd.port.options.mk> .if ${PORT_OPTIONS:MOPT1} USES+= gmake CFLAGS+= -DTEST .endif
When option OPT is not selected, the value of
,
if defined, is appended to
OPT
_ABOVEVARIABLE
_OFF
.
For example:ABOVEVARIABLE
OPTIONS_DEFINE= OPT1 OPT1_USES_OFF= gmake
is equivalent to:
OPTIONS_DEFINE= OPT1 .include <bsd.port.options.mk> .if ! ${PORT_OPTIONS:MOPT1} USES+= gmake .endif
Each port is extracted into a working directory, which must
be writable. The ports system defaults to having
DISTFILES
unpack in to a directory called
${DISTNAME}
. In other words, if the
Makefile
has:
PORTNAME= foo PORTVERSION= 1.0
then the port's distribution files contain a top-level
directory, foo-1.0
, and the rest of the
files are located under that directory.
A number of variables can be overridden if that is not the case.
The variable lists the name of the directory that is
created when the application's distfiles are extracted. If
our previous example extracted into a directory called
foo
(and not
foo-1.0
) write:
WRKSRC= ${WRKDIR}/foo
or possibly
WRKSRC= ${WRKDIR}/${PORTNAME}
If the source files needed for the port are in a
subdirectory of the extracted distribution file, set
WRKSRC_SUBDIR
to that directory.
WRKSRC_SUBDIR= src
If the port does not extract in to a subdirectory at all,
then set NO_WRKSUBDIR
to
indicate that.
NO_WRKSUBDIR= yes
Because WRKDIR
is the only directory
that is supposed to be writable during the build, and is
used to store many files recording the status of the build,
it is always better to force extraction into a subdirectory
anyway.
There are three different variables to register a conflict
between packages and ports: CONFLICTS
,
CONFLICTS_INSTALL
and
CONFLICTS_BUILD
.
The conflict variables automatically set the variable
IGNORE
, which is more fully documented in
Section 12.13, “Marking a Port Not Installable with
BROKEN
, FORBIDDEN
, or
IGNORE
”.
When removing one of several conflicting ports, it is
advisable to retain CONFLICTS
in
those other ports for a few months to cater for users who only
update once in a while.
If the package cannot coexist with other packages
(because of file conflicts, runtime incompatibilities, etc.),
list the other package names in
CONFLICTS_INSTALL
. Use
shell globs like *
and ?
here. Enumerate package names in there, not port names or
origins. Please make sure
that CONFLICTS_INSTALL
does not match this
port's package itself. Otherwise enforcing its installation
with FORCE_PKG_REGISTER
will no longer
work. CONFLICTS_INSTALL
check is done
after the build stage and prior to the install stage.
If the port cannot be built when other specific ports are
already installed, list the other port names in
CONFLICTS_BUILD
. Use
shell globs like *
and ?
here. Use package names, not port names or origins.
CONFLICTS_BUILD
check is done prior to the
build stage. Build conflicts are not recorded in the
resulting package.
If the port cannot be built if a certain port is already
installed and the resulting package cannot coexist with the
other package, list the other package name in
CONFLICTS
. use shell
globs like *
and ?
here.
Enumerate package names in there, not port names or
origins. Please make sure that
CONFLICTS
does not match this
port's package itself. Otherwise enforcing its installation
with FORCE_PKG_REGISTER
will no longer
work. CONFLICTS
check is done prior to the
build stage and prior to the install stage.
Use the macros provided in
bsd.port.mk
to ensure correct modes of
files in the port's *-install
targets. Set ownership directly in
pkg-plist
with the corresponding entries,
such as
@(
,
owner
,group
,)@owner
,
and owner
@group
.
These operators work until overridden, or until the end
of group
pkg-plist
, so do not forget to reset
them after they are no longer needed. The default ownership
is root:wheel
. See Section 7.6.10, “Base Keywords” for more information.
INSTALL_PROGRAM
is a command to
install binary executables.
INSTALL_SCRIPT
is a command to
install executable scripts.
INSTALL_LIB
is a command to install
shared libraries (but not static libraries).
INSTALL_KLD
is a command to
install kernel loadable modules. Some architectures
do not like having the modules stripped, so
use this command instead of
INSTALL_PROGRAM
.
INSTALL_DATA
is a command to
install sharable data, including static libraries.
INSTALL_MAN
is a command to
install manpages and other documentation (it does not
compress anything).
These variables are set to the install(1) command with the appropriate flags for each situation.
Do not use INSTALL_LIB
to install
static libraries, because stripping them renders them
useless. Use INSTALL_DATA
instead.
Installed binaries should be stripped. Do not strip
binaries manually unless absolutely required. The
INSTALL_PROGRAM
macro installs and
strips a binary at the same time. The
INSTALL_LIB
macro does the same thing to
shared libraries.
When a file must be stripped, but neither
INSTALL_PROGRAM
nor
INSTALL_LIB
macros are desirable,
${STRIP_CMD}
strips the program or
shared library. This is typically done within the
post-install
target. For
example:
post-install: ${STRIP_CMD} ${STAGEDIR}${PREFIX}/bin/xdl
When multiple files need to be stripped:
post-install: .for l in geometry media body track world ${STRIP_CMD} ${STAGEDIR}${PREFIX}/lib/lib${PORTNAME}-${l}.so.0 .endfor
Use file(1) on a file to determine if it has been
stripped. Binaries are reported by file(1) as
stripped
, or
not stripped
. Additionally, strip(1)
will detect programs that have already been stripped and exit
cleanly.
Sometimes, a large number of files must be installed while
preserving their hierarchical organization. For example,
copying over a whole directory tree from
WRKSRC
to a target directory under
PREFIX
. Note that
PREFIX
, EXAMPLESDIR
,
DATADIR
, and other path variables must
always be prepended with STAGEDIR
to
respect staging (see Section 6.1, “Staging”).
Two macros exist for this situation. The advantage of
using these macros instead of cp
is that
they guarantee proper file ownership and permissions on target
files. The first macro, COPYTREE_BIN
, will
set all the installed files to be executable, thus being
suitable for installing into PREFIX/bin
.
The second macro, COPYTREE_SHARE
, does not
set executable permissions on files, and is therefore suitable
for installing files under PREFIX/share
target.
post-install: ${MKDIR} ${STAGEDIR}${EXAMPLESDIR} (cd ${WRKSRC}/examples && ${COPYTREE_SHARE} . ${STAGEDIR}${EXAMPLESDIR})
This example will install the contents of the
examples
directory in the vendor distfile
to the proper examples location of the port.
post-install: ${MKDIR} ${STAGEDIR}${DATADIR}/summer (cd ${WRKSRC}/temperatures && ${COPYTREE_SHARE} "June July August" ${STAGEDIR}${DATADIR}/summer)
And this example will install the data of summer months to
the summer
subdirectory of a
DATADIR
.
Additional find
arguments can be
passed via the third argument to
COPYTREE_
macros. For example, to install
all files from the first example except Makefiles, one can use
these commands.*
post-install: ${MKDIR} ${STAGEDIR}${EXAMPLESDIR} (cd ${WRKSRC}/examples && \ ${COPYTREE_SHARE} . ${STAGEDIR}${EXAMPLESDIR} "! -name Makefile")
These macros do not add the installed files to
pkg-plist
. They must be added manually.
For optional documentation (PORTDOCS
, see
Section 5.15.4, “Install Additional Documentation”) and examples
(PORTEXAMPLES
), the
%%PORTDOCS%%
or
%%PORTEXAMPLES%%
prefixes must be prepended
in pkg-plist
.
If the software has some documentation other than the
standard man and info pages that is useful for the
user, install it under DOCSDIR
This can be done, like the previous item, in the
post-install
target.
Create a new directory for the port. The directory name
is DOCSDIR
. This usually equals
PORTNAME
. However, if the user
might want different versions of the port to be installed at
the same time, the whole
PKGNAME
can be used.
Since only the files listed in
pkg-plist
are installed, it is safe to
always install documentation to STAGEDIR
(see Section 6.1, “Staging”). Hence .if
blocks are only needed when the installed files are large
enough to cause significant I/O overhead.
post-install: ${MKDIR} ${STAGEDIR}${DOCSDIR} ${INSTALL_MAN} ${WRKSRC}/docs/xvdocs.ps ${STAGEDIR}${DOCSDIR}
Here are some handy variables and how they are expanded by
default when used in the Makefile
:
DATADIR
gets expanded to
PREFIX/share/PORTNAME
.
DATADIR_REL
gets expanded to
share/PORTNAME
.
DOCSDIR
gets expanded to
PREFIX/share/doc/PORTNAME
.
DOCSDIR_REL
gets expanded to
share/doc/PORTNAME
.
EXAMPLESDIR
gets expanded to
PREFIX/share/examples/PORTNAME
.
EXAMPLESDIR_REL
gets expanded to
share/examples/PORTNAME
.
The DOCS
option only controls
additional documentation installed in
DOCSDIR
. It does not apply to standard
man pages and info pages. Things installed in
DATADIR
and
EXAMPLESDIR
are controlled by
DATA
and EXAMPLES
options, respectively.
These variables are exported to
PLIST_SUB
. Their values will appear there
as pathnames relative to PREFIX
if
possible. That is, share/doc/PORTNAME
will be substituted for %%DOCSDIR%%
in the
packing list by default, and so on. (See more on
pkg-plist
substitution
here.)
All conditionally installed documentation files and
directories are included in
pkg-plist
with the
%%PORTDOCS%%
prefix, for example:
%%PORTDOCS%%%%DOCSDIR%%/AUTHORS %%PORTDOCS%%%%DOCSDIR%%/CONTACT
As an alternative to enumerating the documentation files
in pkg-plist
, a port can set the variable
PORTDOCS
to a list of file names and shell
glob patterns to add to the final packing list. The names
will be relative to DOCSDIR
. Therefore, a
port that utilizes PORTDOCS
, and uses a
non-default location for its documentation, must set
DOCSDIR
accordingly. If a directory is
listed in PORTDOCS
or matched by a glob
pattern from this variable, the entire subtree of contained
files and directories will be registered in the final packing
list. If the DOCS
option has been unset
then files and directories listed in
PORTDOCS
would not be installed or added to
port packing list. Installing the documentation at
PORTDOCS
as shown above remains up to the
port itself. A typical example of utilizing
PORTDOCS
looks as follows:
PORTDOCS= README.* ChangeLog docs/*
The equivalents of PORTDOCS
for files
installed under DATADIR
and
EXAMPLESDIR
are
PORTDATA
and
PORTEXAMPLES
, respectively.
The contents of pkg-message
are
displayed upon installation. See
the section on using
pkg-message
for details.
pkg-message
does not need to be added
to pkg-plist
.
Try to let the port put things in the right subdirectories
of PREFIX
. Some ports lump everything and
put it in the subdirectory with the port's name, which is
incorrect. Also, many ports put everything except binaries,
header files and manual pages in a subdirectory of
lib
, which does not work well with the
BSD paradigm. Many of the files must be moved to one of these
directories: etc
(setup/configuration
files), libexec
(executables started
internally), sbin
(executables for
superusers/managers), info
(documentation
for info browser) or share
(architecture
independent files). See hier(7) for details; the rules
governing /usr
pretty much apply to
/usr/local
too. The exception are ports
dealing with USENET “news”. They may use
PREFIX/news
as a destination for their
files.
gettext
iconv
rc
Scripts)This section explains the most common things to consider when creating a port.
bsd.port.mk
expects ports to work
with a “stage directory”. This means that a port
must not install files directly to the regular destination
directories (that is, under PREFIX
, for
example) but instead into a separate directory from which the
package is then built. In many cases, this does not require
root privileges, making it possible to build packages as an
unprivileged user. With staging, the port is built and
installed into the stage directory,
STAGEDIR
. A package is created from the
stage directory and then installed on the system. Automake
tools refer to this concept as DESTDIR
, but
in FreeBSD, DESTDIR
has a different meaning
(see Section 9.4, “PREFIX
and
DESTDIR
”).
No port really needs to be root. It
can mostly be avoided by using USES=uidfix
.
If the port still runs commands like chown(8),
chgrp(1), or forces owner or group with install(1)
then use USES=fakeroot
to fake those calls. Sligh patching of the port's
Makefiles
will be needed.
Meta ports, or ports that do not install files themselves but only depend on other ports, must avoid needlessly extracting the mtree(8) to the stage directory. This is the basic directory layout of the package, and these empty directories will be seen as orphans. To prevent mtree(8) extraction, add this line:
NO_MTREE= yes
Metaports should use USES=metaport
.
It sets up defaults for ports that do not fetch, build, or
install anything.
Staging is enabled by prepending
STAGEDIR
to paths used in the
pre-install
,
do-install
, and
post-install
targets (see the
examples through the book). Typically, this includes
PREFIX
, ETCDIR
,
DATADIR
, EXAMPLESDIR
,
MANPREFIX
, DOCSDIR
, and
so on. Directories should be created as part of the
post-install
target. Avoid using
absolute paths whenever possible.
When creating a symlink, STAGEDIR
is prepended to the target path only. For
example:
${LN} -sflibfoo.so.42
${STAGEDIR}${PREFIX}/lib/libfoo.so
The source path
${PREFIX}/lib/
looks fine but
could, in fact, be incorrect. Absolute paths can point to a
wrong location, like when a remote file system has been
mounted with NFS under a non-root mount
point. Relative paths are less fragile, and often much
shorter.libfoo.so.42
Ports that install kernel modules must prepend
STAGEDIR
to
their destination, by default
/boot/modules
.
This section explains why bundled dependencies are considered bad and what to do about them.
Some software requires the porter to locate third-party libraries and add the required dependencies to the port. Other software bundles all necessary libraries into the distribution file. The second approach seems easier at first, but there are some serious drawbacks:
This list is loosely based on the Fedora and Gentoo wikis, both licensed under the CC-BY-SA 3.0 license.
If vulnerabilities are found in the upstream library and fixed there, they might not be fixed in the library bundled with the port. One reason could be that the author is not aware of the problem. This means that the porter must fix them, or upgrade to a non-vulnerable version, and send a patch to the author. This all takes time, which results in software being vulnerable longer than necessary. This in turn makes it harder to coordinate a fix without unnecessarily leaking information about the vulnerability.
This problem is similar to the problem with security in the last paragraph, but generally less severe.
It is easier for the author to fork the upstream library once it is bundled. While convenient on first sight, it means that the code diverges from upstream making it harder to address security or other problems with the software. A reason for this is that patching becomes harder.
Another problem of forking is that because code diverges from upstream, bugs get solved over and over again instead of just once at a central location. This defeats the idea of open source software in the first place.
When a library is installed on the system, it might collide with the bundled version. This can cause immediate errors at compile or link time. It can also cause errors when running the program which might be harder to track down. The latter problem could be caused because the versions of the two libraries are incompatible.
When bundling projects from different sources, license issues can arise more easily, especially when licenses are incompatible.
Bundled libraries waste resources on several levels. It takes longer to build the actual application, especially if these libraries are already present on the system. At run-time, they can take up unnecessary memory when the system-wide library is already loaded by one program and the bundled library is loaded by another program.
When a library needs patches for FreeBSD, these patches have to be duplicated again in the bundled library. This wastes developer time because the patches might not apply cleanly. It can also be hard to notice that these patches are required in the first place.
Whenever possible, use the unbundled version of the
library by adding a LIB_DEPENDS
to the
port. If such a port does not exist yet, consider creating
it.
Only use bundled libraries if the upstream has a good track record on security and using unbundled versions leads to overly complex patches.
In some very special cases, for example emulators, like
Wine, a port has to bundle
libraries, because they are in a different architecture, or
they have been modified to fit the software's use. In that
case, those libraries should not be exposed to other ports
for linking. Add BUNDLE_LIBS=yes
to the
port's Makefile
. This will tell
pkg(8) to not compute provided libraries. Always ask
the Ports Management Team <[email protected]>
before adding this to a port.
If the port installs one or more shared libraries, define
a USE_LDCONFIG
make variable, which will
instruct a bsd.port.mk
to run
${LDCONFIG} -m
on the directory
where the new library is installed (usually
PREFIX/lib
) during
post-install
target to register it
into the shared library cache. This variable, when defined,
will also facilitate addition of an appropriate
@exec /sbin/ldconfig -m
and
@unexec /sbin/ldconfig -R
pair into
pkg-plist
, so that a user who
installed the package can start using the shared library
immediately and de-installation will not cause the system to
still believe the library is there.
USE_LDCONFIG= yes
The default directory can be overridden by
setting USE_LDCONFIG
to a list of
directories into which shared libraries are to be installed.
For example, if the port installs shared libraries into
PREFIX/lib/foo
and
PREFIX/lib/bar
use this in
Makefile
:
USE_LDCONFIG= ${PREFIX}/lib/foo ${PREFIX}/lib/bar
Please double-check, often this is not necessary at all or
can be avoided through -rpath
or setting
LD_RUN_PATH
during linking (see
lang/moscow_ml for an
example), or through a shell-wrapper which sets
LD_LIBRARY_PATH
before invoking the binary,
like www/seamonkey
does.
When installing 32-bit libraries on 64-bit system, use
USE_LDCONFIG32
instead.
If the software uses autotools, and specifically
libtool
, add USES=libtool
.
When the major library version number increments in the
update to the new port version, all other ports that link to
the affected library must have their
PORTREVISION
incremented, to force
recompilation with the new library version.
Licenses vary, and some of them place restrictions on how the application can be packaged, whether it can be sold for profit, and so on.
It is the responsibility of a porter to read the licensing terms of the software and make sure that the FreeBSD project will not be held accountable for violating them by redistributing the source or compiled binaries either via FTP/HTTP or CD-ROM. If in doubt, please contact the FreeBSD ports mailing list.
In situations like this, the variables described in the next sections can be set.
This variable indicates that we may not generate a binary package of the application. For instance, the license may disallow binary redistribution, or it may prohibit distribution of packages created from patched sources.
However, the port's DISTFILES
may be
freely mirrored on FTP/HTTP. They may also be distributed
on a CD-ROM (or similar media) unless
NO_CDROM
is set as well.
If the
binary package is not generally useful, and the application
must always be compiled from the source code, use
NO_PACKAGE
. For
example, if the application has configuration information
that is site specific hard coded into it at compile time,
set NO_PACKAGE
.
Set NO_PACKAGE
to a string
describing the reason why the package cannot be
generated.
This variable alone indicates that, although we are
allowed to generate binary packages, we may put neither
those packages nor the port's DISTFILES
onto a CD-ROM (or similar media) for resale. However, the
binary packages and the port's DISTFILES
will still be available via FTP/HTTP.
If this variable is set along with
NO_PACKAGE
, then only the port's
DISTFILES
will be available, and only via
FTP/HTTP.
Set NO_CDROM
to a string
describing the reason why the port cannot be redistributed
on CD-ROM. For instance, use this if the port's
license is for “non-commercial” use
only.
Files defined in NOFETCHFILES
are not fetchable from any of
MASTER_SITES
. An example of such a file
is when the file is supplied on CD-ROM by the vendor.
Tools which check for the availability of these files
on MASTER_SITES
have to ignore these
files and not report about them.
Set this variable alone if the application's license
permits neither mirroring the application's
DISTFILES
nor distributing the binary
package in any way.
Do not set NO_CDROM
or
NO_PACKAGE
along with
RESTRICTED
, since the latter variable
implies the former ones.
Set RESTRICTED
to a string
describing the reason why the port cannot be redistributed.
Typically, this indicates that the port contains proprietary
software and that the user will need to manually download
the DISTFILES
, possibly after registering
for the software or agreeing to accept the terms of an
EULA.
When RESTRICTED
or
NO_CDROM
is set, this variable defaults
to ${DISTFILES} ${PATCHFILES}
, otherwise
it is empty. If only some of the distribution files are
restricted, then set this variable to list them.
If the port has legal concerns not addressed by the
above variables, set LEGAL_TEXT
to a string explaining the concern. For
example, if special permission was obtained for FreeBSD to
redistribute the binary, this variable must indicate
so.
A port which sets any of the above variables must also
be added to /usr/ports/LEGAL
. The
first column is a glob which matches the restricted
distfiles. The second column is the port's origin. The
third column is the output of
make -VLEGAL
.
The preferred way to state "the distfiles for this port must be fetched manually" is as follows:
.if !exists(${DISTDIR}/${DISTNAME}${EXTRACT_SUFX})
IGNORE= may not be redistributed because of licensing reasons. Please visit some-website
to accept their license and download ${DISTFILES} into ${DISTDIR}
.endif
This both informs the user, and sets the proper metadata on the user's machine for use by automated programs.
Note that this stanza must be preceded by an inclusion
of bsd.port.pre.mk
.
The FreeBSD ports framework supports parallel building
using multiple make
sub-processes, which
allows SMP systems to utilize all of
their available CPU power, allowing port
builds to be faster and more effective.
This is achieved by passing -jX
flag
to make(1) running on vendor code. This is the default
build behavior of ports. Unfortunately, not all ports
handle parallel building well and it may be required to
explicitly disable this feature by adding the
MAKE_JOBS_UNSAFE=yes
variable. It is
used when a port is known to be broken with
-jX
.
Several differing make
implementations exist. Ported software often requires a
particular implementation, like GNU
make
, known in FreeBSD as
gmake
, or fmake
, the
legacy FreeBSD make
.
If the port uses GNU make,
add gmake
to USES
. If
the legacy FreeBSD make
is needed, add
fmake
there.
MAKE_CMD
can be used to reference the
specific command configured by the USES
setting in the port's Makefile
. In
rare cases when more than one make
implementation is listed in USES
, the
variables GMAKE
(for the
GNU version) or FMAKE
(for the legacy FreeBSD version) are available.
Only use MAKE_CMD
within the
application Makefile
s in
WRKSRC
to call the
make
implementation expected by the
ported software.
If the port is an X application that uses
imake to create
Makefile
s from
Imakefile
s, set USES=
imake
.. See the USES=imake
section of Chapter 15, Values of
USES
for more details.
If the port's source Makefile
has
something other than all
as the
main build target, set ALL_TARGET
accordingly. The same goes for
install
and
INSTALL_TARGET
.
If the port uses the configure
script to generate Makefile
from
Makefile.in
, set
GNU_CONFIGURE=yes
. To give
extra arguments to the configure
script
(the default argument is --prefix=${PREFIX}
--infodir=${PREFIX}/${INFO_PATH}
--mandir=${MANPREFIX}/man
--build=${CONFIGURE_TARGET}
), set those
extra arguments in CONFIGURE_ARGS
. Extra
environment variables can be passed using
CONFIGURE_ENV
.
configure
Variable | Means |
---|---|
GNU_CONFIGURE | The port uses configure
script to prepare build. |
HAS_CONFIGURE | Same as GNU_CONFIGURE ,
except default configure target is not added to
CONFIGURE_ARGS . |
CONFIGURE_ARGS | Additional arguments passed to
configure script. |
CONFIGURE_ENV | Additional environment variables to be set
for configure script run. |
CONFIGURE_TARGET | Override default configure target. Default
value is
${MACHINE_ARCH}-portbld-freebsd${OSREL} . |
For ports that use CMake,
define USES= cmake
, or
USES= cmake:outsource
to build in a
separate directory (see below).
cmake
Variable | Means |
---|---|
CMAKE_ARGS | Port specific CMake
flags to be passed to the cmake
binary. |
CMAKE_BUILD_TYPE | Type of build (CMake
predefined build profiles). Default is
Release , or
Debug if
WITH_DEBUG is set. |
CMAKE_ENV | Environment variables to be set for the
cmake binary. Default is
${CONFIGURE_ENV} . |
CMAKE_SOURCE_PATH | Path to the source directory. Default is
${WRKSRC} . |
cmake
BuildsVariable | Means |
---|---|
CMAKE_VERBOSE | Enable verbose build output. Default not set,
unless BATCH or
PACKAGE_BUILDING are set. |
CMAKE_NOCOLOR | Disables colour build output. Default not set,
unless BATCH or
PACKAGE_BUILDING are set. |
CMake supports these
build profiles: Debug
,
Release
,
RelWithDebInfo
and
MinSizeRel
. Debug
and
Release
profiles respect system
*FLAGS
, RelWithDebInfo
and MinSizeRel
will set
CFLAGS
to -O2 -g
and
-Os -DNDEBUG
correspondingly. The
lower-cased value of CMAKE_BUILD_TYPE
is
exported to PLIST_SUB
and must be
used if the port installs
depending on the build type (see
deskutils/strigi for an
example). Please note that some projects may define their
own build profiles and/or force particular build type by
setting *
.cmakeCMAKE_BUILD_TYPE
in
CMakeLists.txt
. To
make a port for such a project respect
CFLAGS
and WITH_DEBUG
,
the CMAKE_BUILD_TYPE
definitions must be
removed from those files.
Most CMake-based projects
support an out-of-source method of building. The
out-of-source build for a port can be requested by using the
:outsource
suffix. When enabled,
CONFIGURE_WRKSRC
,
BUILD_WRKSRC
and
INSTALL_WRKSRC
will be set to
${WRKDIR}/.build
and this
directory will be used to keep all files generated during
configuration and build stages, leaving the source directory
intact.
USES= cmake
ExampleThis snippet demonstrates the use of
CMake for a port.
CMAKE_SOURCE_PATH
is not usually
required, but can be set when the sources are not located
in the top directory, or if only a subset of the project
is intended to be built by the port.
USES= cmake:outsource CMAKE_SOURCE_PATH= ${WRKSRC}/subproject
If the port uses SCons,
define USE_SCONS=yes
.
scons
Variable | Means |
---|---|
SCONS_ARGS | Port specific SCons flags passed to the SCons environment. |
SCONS_BUILDENV | Variables to be set in system environment. |
SCONS_ENV | Variables to be set in SCons environment. |
SCONS_TARGET | Last argument passed to SCons, similar to
MAKE_TARGET . |
To make third party SConstruct
respect everything that is passed to SCons in
SCONS_ENV
(that is, most importantly,
CC/CXX/CFLAGS/CXXFLAGS
), patch
SConstruct
so build
Environment
is constructed like
this:
env = Environment(**ARGUMENTS)
It may be then modified with
env.Append
and
env.Replace
.
The various GNU autotools provide an abstraction mechanism for building a piece of software over a wide variety of operating systems and machine architectures. Within the Ports Collection, an individual port can make use of these tools via a simple construct:
USE_AUTOTOOLS= tool
[:env] ...
At the time of writing, tool
can be one of autoconf
,
autoheader
, automake
,
aclocal
, libtoolize
.
It can also be one the older
legacy of autoconf213
,
autoheader213
,
automake14
,
aclocal14
.
env
is used to specify that the
environmental variables are needed. It also adds a build
dependency on the tool. The relevant tool is
not ran as part of the
run-autotools
target.
Multiple tools can be specified at once, either by
including them all on a single line, or using the
+=
Makefile construct.
Ports shipping with their own copy of libtool (search for
a file named ltmain.sh) need to have
USES=libtool
. If a port has
USE_AUTOTOOLS=libtoolize
it probably also
needs USES=libtool
. See the USES=libtool section in Chapter 15, Values of
USES
for more details.
Some ports make use of the libltdl.so
library package, which is part of the
libtool
suite. Use of this library does
not automatically necessitate the use of
libtool
itself. If the port needs
libltdl.so
, add a dependency on
it:
LIB_DEPENDS= libltdl.so:${PORTSDIR}/devel/libltdl
Some ports do not contain a configure script, but do
contain an autoconf template in
configure.ac
. Use these
assignments to let autoconf
create the configure script, and also have
autoheader
create template headers for
use by the configure script.
USE_AUTOTOOLS= autoconf[:env]
and
USE_AUTOTOOLS= autoheader
which also implies the use of
autoconf
.
The additional optional variables
AUTOCONF_ARGS
and
AUTOHEADER_ARGS
can be overridden by the
port Makefile
if specifically
requested. Most ports are unlikely to need this. See
bsd.autotools.mk
for further
details.
Some packages only contain
Makefile.am
. These have to be
converted into Makefile.in
using
automake
, and the further processed by
configure
to generate an actual
Makefile
.
Similarly, packages occasionally do not ship with
an included aclocal.m4
, again
required to build the software. This can be achieved with
aclocal
, which scans
configure.ac
or
configure.in
.
aclocal
has a similar relationship to
automake
as autoheader
does to autoconf
, described in the
previous section. aclocal
implies the
use of automake
, thus we have:
USE_AUTOTOOLS= automake[:env
]
and
USE_AUTOTOOLS= aclocal
As with autoconf
and
autoheader
, both
automake
and aclocal
have optional argument variables,
AUTOMAKE_ARGS
and
ACLOCAL_ARGS
respectively, which may be
overridden by the port Makefile
if
required.
If the port requires gettext
, set
USES= gettext
, and the port will inherit
a dependency on libintl.so
from
devel/gettext. Other
values for gettext
usage are listed in
USES=gettext
.
A rather common case is a port using
gettext
and configure
.
Generally, GNU configure
should be able
to locate gettext
automatically.
USES= gettext GNU_CONFIGURE= yes
If it ever fails to, hints at the location of
gettext
can be passed in
CPPFLAGS
and LDFLAGS
as
follows:
USES= gettext CPPFLAGS+= -I${LOCALBASE}/include LDFLAGS+= -L${LOCALBASE}/lib GNU_CONFIGURE= yes
Some software products allow for disabling NLS. For example,
through passing --disable-nls
to
configure
. In that case, the port
must use gettext
conditionally,
depending on the status of the NLS
option. For ports of low to medium complexity, use
this idiom:
GNU_CONFIGURE= yes OPTIONS_DEFINE= NLS OPTIONS_SUB= yes NLS_USES= gettext NLS_CONFIGURE_ENABLE= nls .include <bsd.port.mk>
Or using the older way of using options:
GNU_CONFIGURE= yes OPTIONS_DEFINE= NLS .include <bsd.port.options.mk> .if ${PORT_OPTIONS:MNLS} USES+= gettext PLIST_SUB+= NLS="" .else CONFIGURE_ARGS+= --disable-nls PLIST_SUB+= NLS="@comment " .endif .include <bsd.port.mk>
The next item on the to-do list is to arrange so that
the message catalog files are included in the packing list
conditionally. The Makefile
part of
this task is already provided by the idiom. It is explained
in the section on advanced
pkg-plist
practices. In a
nutshell, each occurrence of %%NLS%%
in
pkg-plist
will be replaced by
“@comment
” if NLS is
disabled, or by a null string if NLS is enabled.
Consequently, the lines prefixed by
%%NLS%%
will become mere comments in the
final packing list if NLS is off; otherwise the prefix will
be just left out. Then insert
%%NLS%%
before each path to a message
catalog file in pkg-plist
. For
example:
%%NLS%%share/locale/fr/LC_MESSAGES/foobar.mo %%NLS%%share/locale/no/LC_MESSAGES/foobar.mo
In high complexity cases, more advanced techniques may be needed, such as dynamic packing list generation.
There is a point to note about installing message
catalog files. The target directories for them, which
reside under
LOCALBASE/share/locale
,
must not be created and removed by a port. The most
popular languages have their respective directories listed
in
PORTSDIR/Templates/BSD.local.dist
.
The directories for many other languages are governed by the
devel/gettext port.
Consult its pkg-plist
and see whether
the port is going to install a message catalog file for a
unique language.
If MASTER_SITES
is set to
CPAN
, the correct subdirectory is usually
selected automatically. If the default subdirectory is wrong,
CPAN/Module
can be used to change it.
MASTER_SITES
can also be set to the old
MASTER_SITE_PERL_CPAN
, then the preferred
value of MASTER_SITE_SUBDIR
is the
top-level hierarchy name. For example, the recommended value
for p5-Module-Name
is
Module
. The top-level hierarchy can be
examined at cpan.org.
This keeps the port working when the author of the module
changes.
The exception to this rule is when the relevant directory
does not exist or the distfile does not exist in that
directory. In such case, using author's id as
MASTER_SITE_SUBDIR
is allowed.
The CPAN:AUTHOR
macro can be used, which will
be translated to the hashed author directory. For example,
CPAN:AUTHOR
will be converted to
authors/id/A/AU/AUTHOR
.
When a port needs Perl support,
it must set USES=perl5
with the optional
USE_PERL5
described in the perl5 USES description.
Read only variables | Means |
---|---|
PERL | The full path of the Perl 5 interpreter,
either in the system or installed from a port, but
without the version number. Use this when the software
needs the path to the Perl
interpreter. To replace
“#! ”lines in scripts,
use USES=shebangfix. |
PERL_VERSION | The full version of Perl
installed (for example, 5.8.9 ). |
PERL_LEVEL | The installed Perl version as
an integer of the form MNNNPP
(for example, 500809 ). |
PERL_ARCH | Where Perl stores architecture
dependent libraries. Defaults to
${ARCH}-freebsd . |
PERL_PORT | Name of the Perl port that is
installed (for example, perl5 ). |
SITE_PERL | Directory name where site specific
Perl packages go. This value is
added to PLIST_SUB . |
Ports of Perl modules which do not have an official
website must link to cpan.org
in
the WWW line of pkg-descr
. The
preferred URL form is
http://search.cpan.org/dist/Module-Name/
(including the trailing slash).
Do not use ${SITE_PERL}
in dependency
declarations. Doing so assumes that
perl5.mk
has been included, which is
not always true. Ports depending on this port will have
incorrect dependencies if this port's files move later in an
upgrade. The right way to declare Perl module dependencies
is shown in the example below.
For Perl ports that install manual pages, the macro
PERL5_MAN3
can be used
inside pkg-plist
. For example,
lib/perl5/5.14/man/man3/AnyEvent::I3.3.gz
can be replaced with
%%PERL5_MAN3%%/AnyEvent::I3.3.gz
There are no PERL5_MANx
macros for the
other sections (x
in
1
, 2
and
4
to 9
) because those
get installed in the regular directories.
The X11 implementation available in The Ports Collection
is X.Org. If the application depends on X components, set
USE_XORG
to the list of required
components. Available components, at the time of writing,
are:
bigreqsproto compositeproto damageproto dmx
dmxproto dri2proto dri3proto evieproto fixesproto
fontcacheproto fontenc fontsproto fontutil glproto ice
inputproto kbproto libfs oldx pciaccess pixman presentproto
printproto randrproto recordproto renderproto resourceproto
scrnsaverproto sm trapproto videoproto x11 xau xaw xaw6 xaw7
xbitmaps xcb xcmiscproto xcomposite xcursor xdamage xdmcp
xevie xext xextproto xf86bigfontproto xf86dgaproto
xf86driproto xf86miscproto xf86rushproto xf86vidmodeproto
xfixes xfont xfontcache xft xi xinerama xineramaproto
xkbfile xkbui xmu xmuu xorg-macros xorg-server xp xpm
xprintapputil xprintutil xproto xproxymngproto xrandr
xrender xres xscrnsaver xshmfence xt xtrans xtrap xtst xv
xvmc xxf86dga xxf86misc xxf86vm
.
Always up-to-date list can be found in
/usr/ports/Mk/bsd.xorg.mk
.
The Mesa Project is an effort to provide free OpenGL
implementation. To specify a dependency on various
components of this project, use USE_GL
.
Valid options are:
egl, gl, glesv2, glew, glu, glut, glw
and
linux
. For backwards compatibility, the
value of yes
maps to
glu
.
USES= imake | The port uses imake . |
XMKMF | Set to the path of xmkmf if
not in the PATH . Defaults to
xmkmf -a . |
If the port requires a Motif library, define
USES= motif
in the
Makefile
. Default Motif implementation
is
x11-toolkits/open-motif.
Users can choose
x11-toolkits/lesstif
instead by setting WANT_LESSTIF
in their make.conf
.
MOTIFLIB
will be set by
motif.mk
to reference the
appropriate Motif library. Please patch the source of the
port to use ${MOTIFLIB}
wherever
the Motif library is referenced in the original
Makefile
or
Imakefile
.
There are two common cases:
If the port refers to the Motif library as
-lXm
in its
Makefile
or
Imakefile
, substitute
${MOTIFLIB}
for it.
If the port uses XmClientLibs
in
its Imakefile
, change it to
${MOTIFLIB} ${XTOOLLIB}
${XLIB}
.
Note that MOTIFLIB
(usually) expands
to -L/usr/local/lib -lXm -lXp
or
/usr/local/lib/libXm.a
, so there is no
need to add -L
or -l
in front.
If the port installs fonts for the X Window System, put
them in
LOCALBASE/lib/X11/fonts/local
.
Some applications require a working X11 display for
compilation to succeed. This pose a problem for machines
that operate headless. When this variable is used,
the build infrastructure will start the virtual framebuffer
X server. The working DISPLAY
is then passed
to the build. See USES=display
for the possible arguments.
USES= display
Desktop entries (a Freedesktop standard) provide a way to automatically adjust desktop features when a new program is installed, without requiring user intervention. For example, newly-installed programs automatically appear in the application menus of compatible desktop environments. Desktop entries originated in the GNOME desktop environment, but are now a standard and also work with KDE and Xfce. This bit of automation provides a real benefit to the user, and desktop entries are encouraged for applications which can be used in a desktop environment.
Ports that include predefined
must
include those files in *
.desktoppkg-plist
and install them in the
$LOCALBASE/share/applications
directory. The INSTALL_DATA
macro is useful for installing these
files.
If a port has a MimeType entry in its
,
the desktop database must be updated after install and
deinstall. To do this, define portname
.desktopUSES
=
desktop-file-utils.
Desktop entries can be easily created for applications
by using DESKTOP_ENTRIES
. A
file named
will be created, installed, and added to
name
.desktoppkg-plist
automatically. Syntax
is:
DESKTOP_ENTRIES= "NAME" "COMMENT" "ICON" "COMMAND" "CATEGORY" StartupNotify
The list of possible categories is available on the
Freedesktop
website. StartupNotify
indicates whether the application is compatible with
startup notifications. These are
typically a graphic indicator like a clock that appear at
the mouse pointer, menu, or panel to give the user an
indication when a program is starting. A program that is
compatible with startup notifications clears the indicator
after it has started. Programs that are not compatible
with startup notifications would never clear the indicator
(potentially confusing and infuriating the user), and
must have StartupNotify
set to
false
so the indicator is not shown at
all.
Example:
DESKTOP_ENTRIES= "ToME" "Roguelike game based on JRR Tolkien's work" \ "${DATADIR}/xtra/graf/tome-128.png" \ "tome -v -g" "Application;Game;RolePlaying;" \ false
The FreeBSD/GNOME project uses its own set of variables to define which GNOME components a particular port uses. A comprehensive list of these variables exists within the FreeBSD/GNOME project's homepage.
The Ports Collection provides support for Qt 4 and Qt 5
frameworks with
USE_QT
,
where x
x
is
4
or 5
.
Set USE_QT
to the list of required Qt components (libraries,
tools, plugins). The Qt 4 and Qt 5 frameworks are quite
similar. The main difference is the set of supported
components.x
The Qt framework exports a number of variables which can be used by ports, some of them listed below:
QT_PREFIX | Set to the path where Qt was installed
(${LOCALBASE} ). |
QMAKE | Full path to qmake
binary. |
LRELEASE | Full path to lrelease
utility. |
MOC | Full path to moc . |
RCC | Full path to rcc . |
UIC | Full path to uic . |
QT_INCDIR | Qt include directory. |
QT_LIBDIR | Qt libraries path. |
QT_PLUGINDIR | Qt plugins path. |
When using the Qt framework, these settings are deployed:
CONFIGURE_ARGS+= --with-qt-includes=${QT_INCDIR} \ --with-qt-libraries=${QT_LIBDIR} \ --with-extra-libs=${LOCALBASE}/lib \ --with-extra-includes=${LOCALBASE}/include CONFIGURE_ENV+= QTDIR="${QT_PREFIX}" QMAKE="${QMAKE}" \ MOC="${MOC}" RCC="${RCC}" UIC="${UIC}" \ QMAKESPEC="${QMAKESPEC}" PLIST_SUB+= QT_INCDIR=${QT_INCDIR_REL} \ QT_LIBDIR=${QT_LIBDIR_REL} \ QT_PLUGINDIR=${QT_PLUGINDIR_REL}
Some configure scripts do not support the arguments above.
To suppress modification ofCONFIGURE_ENV
and CONFIGURE_ARGS
, set
QT_NONSTANDARD
.
Individual Qt tool and library dependencies must be
specified in
USE_QT
.
Every component can be suffixed with
x
_build
or _run
, the
suffix indicating whether the dependency on the component is
at buildtime or runtime. If unsuffixed, the component will be
depended on at both build- and runtime. Usually, library
components are specified unsuffixed, tool components
are mostly specified with the _build
suffix
and plugin components are specified with the
_run
suffix. The most commonly used
components are listed below (all available components are
listed in _USE_QT_ALL
,
_USE_QT4_ONLY
, and
_USE_QT5_ONLY
in
/usr/ports/Mk/bsd.qt.mk
):
Name | Description |
---|---|
core | core library (Qt 5 only) |
corelib | core library (Qt 4 only) |
dbus | Qt DBus library |
gui | graphical user interface library |
network | network library |
opengl | Qt OpenGL library |
script | script library |
sql | SQL library |
testlib | unit testing library |
webkit | Qt WebKit library |
xml | Qt XML library |
To determine the libraries an application
depends on, run ldd
on the main
executable after a successful compilation.
Name | Description |
---|---|
qmake | Makefile generator/build utility |
buildtools | build tools (moc ,
rcc ), needed for almost
every Qt application (Qt 5 only) |
linguisttools | localization tools: lrelease ,
lupdate (Qt 5 only) |
linguist | localization tools: lrelease ,
lupdate (Qt 4 only) |
moc | meta object compiler, needed for almost every Qt application at buildtime (Qt 4 only) |
rcc | resource compiler, needed if the application
comes with *.rc or
*.qrc files (Qt 4 only) |
uic | user interface compiler, needed if the
application comes with *.ui
files, in practice, every Qt
application with a GUI (Qt 4 only) |
Name | Description |
---|---|
iconengines | SVG icon engine plugin, needed if the application ships SVG icons (Qt 4 only) |
imageformats | plugins for TGA, TIFF, and MNG image formats |
In this example, the ported application uses the Qt 4
graphical user interface library, the Qt 4 core library,
all of the Qt 4 code generation tools and Qt 4's Makefile
generator. Since the gui
library
implies a dependency on the core library,
corelib
does not need to be specified.
The Qt 4 code generation tools moc
,
uic
and rcc
, as well
as the Makefile generator qmake
are
only needed at buildtime, thus they are specified with the
_build
suffix:
USE_QT4= gui moc_build qmake_build rcc_build uic_build
If the application provides a
qmake project file
(*.pro
), define
USES= qmake
along with
USE_QT
. Note
that x
USES= qmake
already implies a build
dependency on qmake, therefore the qmake component can be
omitted from
USE_QT
.
Similar to CMake,
qmake supports out-of-source
builds, which can be enabled by specifying the
x
outsource
argument (see USES= qmake
example).
qmake
Variable | Means |
---|---|
QMAKE_ARGS | Port specific qmake
flags to be passed to the qmake
binary. |
QMAKE_ENV | Environment variables to be set for the
qmake binary. The default is
${CONFIGURE_ENV} . |
QMAKE_SOURCE_PATH | Path to qmake project files
(.pro ). The default is
${WRKSRC} if an
out-of-source build is requested, empty
otherwise. |
USES= qmake
ExampleThis snippet demonstrates the use of qmake for a Qt 4 port:
USES= qmake:outsource USE_QT4= moc_build
For a Qt 5 port:
USES= qmake:outsource USE_QT5= buildtools_build
Qt applications are often written to be cross-platform and often X11/Unix is not the platform they are developed on, which in turn leads to certain loose ends, like:
Missing additional include
paths. Many applications come with
system tray icon support, but neglect to look for
includes and/or libraries in the X11 directories. To add
directories to qmake
's
include and library search paths via the command
line, use:
QMAKE_ARGS+= INCLUDEPATH+=${LOCALBASE}/include \ LIBS+=-L${LOCALBASE}/lib
Bogus installation paths.
Sometimes data such as icons or .desktop files are by
default installed into directories which are not scanned
by XDG-compatible applications.
editors/texmaker is
an example for this - look at
patch-texmaker.pro
in the
files
directory of that port for a
template on how to remedy this directly in the
qmake
project file.
If the application depends on KDE 4, set
USE_KDE4
to the list of required
components. _build
and
_run
suffixes can be used to force
components dependency type (for example,
baseapps_run
). If no suffix is set, a
default dependency type will be used. To force
both types, add the component twice with both suffixes
(for example, automoc4_build automoc4_run
). The
most commonly used components are listed below (up-to-date
components are documented at the top of
/usr/ports/Mk/bsd.kde4.mk
):
Name | Description |
---|---|
kdehier | Hierarchy of common KDE directories |
kdelibs | KDE core libraries |
kdeprefix | If set, port will be installed into
${KDE4_PREFIX} |
automoc4 | Build tool to automatically generate moc files |
akonadi | Storage server for KDE PIM data |
soprano | Library for Resource Description Framework (RDF) |
strigi | Strigi desktop search library |
libkcddb | KDE CDDB (compact disc database) library |
libkcompactdisc | KDE library for interfacing with audio CDs |
libkdeedu | Libraries used by educational applications |
libkdcraw | KDE LibRaw library |
libkexiv2 | KDE Exiv2 library |
libkipi | KDE Image Plugin Interface |
libkonq | Konqueror core library |
libksane | KDE SANE ("Scanner Access Now Easy") library |
pimlibs | Personal information management libraries |
kate | Advanced text editor framework |
marble | Virtual globe and world atlas |
okular | Universal document viewer |
korundum | KDE Ruby bindings |
perlkde | KDE Perl bindings |
pykde4 | KDE Python bindings |
pykdeuic4 | PyKDE user interface compiler |
smokekde | KDE SMOKE libraries |
KDE 4 ports are installed into
KDE4_PREFIX
. This is
achieved by specifying the kdeprefix
component, which overrides the default
PREFIX
. The ports, however, respect any
PREFIX
set via the MAKEFLAGS
environment variable and/or make
arguments. Currently KDE4_PREFIX
is identical to the default PREFIX
,
${LOCALBASE}
.
USE_KDE4
ExampleThis is a simple example for a KDE 4 port.
USES= cmake:outsource
instructs the
port to utilize CMake, a
configuration tool widely used by KDE 4 projects (see
Section 6.5.4, “Using cmake
” for detailed usage).
USE_KDE4
brings dependency on KDE
libraries and makes port using
automoc4
at build stage.
Required KDE components and other dependencies can be
determined through configure log.
USE_KDE4
does not imply
USE_QT4
. If a port requires some
Qt 4 components, specify them in
USE_QT4
.
USES= cmake:outsource USE_KDE4= kdelibs kdeprefix automoc4 USE_QT4= moc_build qmake_build rcc_build uic_build
If the port needs a Java™ Development Kit
(JDK™) to either build, run or even extract the
distfile, then define
USE_JAVA
.
There are several JDKs in the ports collection, from various vendors, and in several versions. If the port must use one of these versions, define which one. The most current version, and FreeBSD default is java/openjdk6.
Variable | Means |
---|---|
USE_JAVA | Define for the remaining variables to have any effect. |
JAVA_VERSION | List of space-separated suitable Java versions
for the port. An optional "+"
allows specifying a range of versions (allowed
values:
1.5[+] 1.6[+] 1.7[+] ). |
JAVA_OS | List of space-separated suitable JDK port
operating systems for the port (allowed values:
native linux ). |
JAVA_VENDOR | List of space-separated suitable JDK port
vendors for the port (allowed values:
freebsd bsdjava sun
openjdk ). |
JAVA_BUILD | When set, add the selected JDK port to the build dependencies. |
JAVA_RUN | When set, add the selected JDK port to the run dependencies. |
JAVA_EXTRACT | When set, add the selected JDK port to the extract dependencies. |
Below is the list of all settings a port will receive
after setting USE_JAVA
:
Variable | Value |
---|---|
JAVA_PORT | The name of the JDK port (for example,
java/openjdk6 ). |
JAVA_PORT_VERSION | The full version of the JDK port (for example,
1.6.0 ). Only the first two
digits of this version number are needed, use
${JAVA_PORT_VERSION:C/^([0-9])\.([0-9])(.*)$/\1.\2/} . |
JAVA_PORT_OS | The operating system used by the JDK port
(for example, 'native' ). |
JAVA_PORT_VENDOR | The vendor of the JDK port (for example,
'openjdk' ). |
JAVA_PORT_OS_DESCRIPTION | Description of the operating system used by the
JDK port (for example,
'Native' ). |
JAVA_PORT_VENDOR_DESCRIPTION | Description of the vendor of the JDK port
(for example, 'OpenJDK BSD Porting
Team' ). |
JAVA_HOME | Path to the installation directory of the JDK
(for example,
'/usr/local/openjdk6' ). |
JAVAC | Path to the Java compiler to use (for example,
'/usr/local/openjdk6/bin/javac' ). |
JAR | Path to the jar tool to use
(for example,
'/usr/local/openjdk6/bin/jar'
or
'/usr/local/bin/fastjar' ). |
APPLETVIEWER | Path to the appletviewer
utility (for example,
'/usr/local/openjdk6/bin/appletviewer' ). |
JAVA | Path to the java executable.
Use this for executing Java programs (for example,
'/usr/local/openjdk6/bin/java' ). |
JAVADOC | Path to the javadoc utility
program. |
JAVAH | Path to the javah
program. |
JAVAP | Path to the javap
program. |
JAVA_KEYTOOL | Path to the keytool utility
program. |
JAVA_N2A | Path to the native2ascii
tool. |
JAVA_POLICYTOOL | Path to the policytool
program. |
JAVA_SERIALVER | Path to the serialver
utility program. |
RMIC | Path to the RMI stub/skeleton generator,
rmic . |
RMIREGISTRY | Path to the RMI registry program,
rmiregistry . |
RMID | Path to the RMI daemon program
rmid . |
JAVA_CLASSES | Path to the archive that contains the JDK class
files,
${JAVA_HOME}/jre/lib/rt.jar . |
Use the java-debug
make
target to get information for debugging the port. It will
display the value of many of the previously listed variables.
Additionally, these constants are defined so all Java ports may be installed in a consistent way:
Constant | Value |
---|---|
JAVASHAREDIR | The base directory for everything related to
Java. Default:
${PREFIX}/share/java . |
JAVAJARDIR | The directory where JAR files is
installed. Default:
${JAVASHAREDIR}/classes . |
JAVALIBDIR | The directory where JAR files installed by
other ports are located. Default:
${LOCALBASE}/share/java/classes . |
The related entries are defined in both
PLIST_SUB
(documented in
Section 7.1, “Changing pkg-plist
Based on Make
Variables”) and
SUB_LIST
.
When the port is to be built using Apache Ant, it has to
define USE_ANT
. Ant is thus considered
to be the sub-make command. When no
do-build
target is defined by the port, a
default one will be set that runs Ant according to
MAKE_ENV
, MAKE_ARGS
and ALL_TARGET
. This is similar to the
USES= gmake
mechanism, which is
documented in Section 6.5, “Building Mechanisms”.
When porting a Java library, the port has to install
the JAR file(s) in ${JAVAJARDIR}
, and
everything else under
${JAVASHAREDIR}/${PORTNAME}
(except for
the documentation, see below). To reduce the
packing file size, reference the JAR file(s)
directly in the Makefile
. Use this
statement (where
is the name of the JAR file installed as part of the
port):myport
.jar
PLIST_FILES+= %%JAVAJARDIR%%/myport
.jar
When porting a Java application, the port usually
installs everything under a single directory (including its
JAR dependencies). The use of
${JAVASHAREDIR}/${PORTNAME}
is strongly
encouraged in this regard. It is up the porter to decide
whether the port installs the additional JAR
dependencies under this directory or uses the
already installed ones (from
${JAVAJARDIR}
).
When porting a Java™ application that requires an
application server such as
www/tomcat7 to run the
service, it is quite common for a vendor to distribute a
.war
. A .war
is a Web application ARchive and is extracted when
called by the application. Avoid adding a
.war
to pkg-plist
.
It is not considered best practice. An application server
will expand war archive, but not
clean it up properly if the port is removed. A more
desirable way of working with this file is to extract the
archive, then install the files, and lastly add these files
to pkg-plist
.
TOMCATDIR= ${LOCALBASE}/apache-tomcat-7.0 WEBAPPDIR= myapplication post-extract: @${MKDIR} ${WRKDIR}/${PORTDIRNAME} @${TAR} xf ${WRKDIR}/myapplication.war -C ${WRKDIR}/${PORTDIRNAME} do-install: cd ${WRKDIR} && \ ${INSTALL} -d -o ${WWWOWN} -g ${WWWGRP} ${TOMCATDIR}/webapps/${PORTDIRNAME} @cd ${WRKDIR}/${PORTDIRNAME} && ${COPYTREE_SHARE} \* ${WEBAPPDIR}/${PORTDIRNAME}
Regardless of the type of port (library or
application), the additional documentation is
installed in the
same location
as for any other port. The JavaDoc tool is known to produce
a different set of files depending on the version of the JDK
that is used. For ports that do not enforce the use of a
particular JDK, it is therefore a complex task to specify
the packing list (pkg-plist
). This is
one reason why porters are strongly encouraged to use
PORTDOCS
. Moreover, even if the
set of files that will be generated by
javadoc
can be predicted, the size of the resulting
pkg-plist
advocates for the use of
PORTDOCS
.
The default value for DATADIR
is
${PREFIX}/share/${PORTNAME}
. It is a
good idea to override DATADIR
to
${JAVASHAREDIR}/${PORTNAME}
for Java
ports. Indeed, DATADIR
is automatically
added to PLIST_SUB
(documented in
Section 7.1, “Changing pkg-plist
Based on Make
Variables”) so use
%%DATADIR%%
directly in
pkg-plist
.
As for the choice of building Java ports from source or directly installing them from a binary distribution, there is no defined policy at the time of writing. However, people from the FreeBSD Java Project encourage porters to have their ports built from source whenever it is a trivial task.
All the features that have been presented in this
section are implemented in bsd.java.mk
.
If the port needs more sophisticated
Java support, please first have a look at the bsd.java.mk
Subversion log as it
usually takes some time to document the latest features.
Then, if the needed support that is lacking would be
beneficial to many other Java ports, feel free to discuss it
on the FreeBSD Java Language mailing list.
Although there is a java
category for
PRs, it refers to the JDK porting effort from the FreeBSD Java
project. Therefore, submit the Java port in the
ports
category as for any other port,
unless the issue is related to
either a JDK implementation or
bsd.java.mk
.
Similarly, there is a defined policy regarding the
CATEGORIES
of a Java port, which is
detailed in Section 5.3, “Categorization”.
USE_APACHE | The port requires Apache. Possible values:
yes (gets any version),
22 , 24 ,
22-24 , 22+ ,
etc. The default APACHE version is
22 . More details are available
in ports/Mk/bsd.apache.mk and
at wiki.freebsd.org/Apache/. |
APXS | Full path to the apxs
binary. Can be overridden in the port. |
HTTPD | Full path to the httpd
binary. Can be overridden in the port. |
APACHE_VERSION | The version of present Apache installation
(read-only variable). This variable is only
available after inclusion of
bsd.port.pre.mk . Possible
values: 22 ,
24 . |
APACHEMODDIR | Directory for Apache modules. This variable is
automatically expanded in
pkg-plist . |
APACHEINCLUDEDIR | Directory for Apache headers. This variable is
automatically expanded in
pkg-plist . |
APACHEETCDIR | Directory for Apache configuration files. This
variable is automatically expanded in
pkg-plist . |
MODULENAME | Name of the module. Default value is
PORTNAME . Example:
mod_hello |
SHORTMODNAME | Short name of the module. Automatically
derived from MODULENAME , but can
be overridden. Example:
hello |
AP_FAST_BUILD | Use apxs to compile and
install the module. |
AP_GENPLIST | Also automatically creates a
pkg-plist . |
AP_INC | Adds a directory to a header search path during compilation. |
AP_LIB | Adds a directory to a library search path during compilation. |
AP_EXTRAS | Additional flags to pass to
apxs . |
Web applications must be installed into
PREFIX/www/
.
This path is available both in
appname
Makefile
and in
pkg-plist
as WWWDIR
,
and the path relative to PREFIX
is
available in Makefile
as
WWWDIR_REL
.
The user and group of web server process are available
as WWWOWN
and WWWGRP
,
in case the ownership of some files needs to be changed. The
default values of both are www
. Use
WWWOWN?= myuser
and WWWGRP?=
mygroup
if the port needs different values. This
allows the user to override them easily.
Do not depend on Apache unless the web app explicitly needs Apache. Respect that users may wish to run a web app on different web server than Apache.
USE_PHP | The port requires PHP. The value
yes adds a dependency on PHP.
The list of required PHP extensions can be specified
instead. Example:
pcre xml gettext |
DEFAULT_PHP_VER | Selects which major version of PHP will be
installed as a dependency when no PHP is installed
yet. Default is 5 . Possible
values: 4 ,
5 |
IGNORE_WITH_PHP | The port does not work with PHP of the given
version. Possible values: 4 ,
5 |
USE_PHPIZE | The port will be built as a PHP extension. |
USE_PHPEXT | The port will be treated as a PHP extension, including installation and registration in the extension registry. |
USE_PHP_BUILD | Set PHP as a build dependency. |
WANT_PHP_CLI | Want the CLI (command line) version of PHP. |
WANT_PHP_CGI | Want the CGI version of PHP. |
WANT_PHP_MOD | Want the Apache module version of PHP. |
WANT_PHP_SCR | Want the CLI or the CGI version of PHP. |
WANT_PHP_WEB | Want the Apache module or the CGI version of PHP. |
Porting PEAR modules is a very simple process.
Add USES=pear
to the port's
Makefile
. The framework will install the
relevant files in the right places and automatically generate
the plist at install time.
PORTNAME= Date PORTVERSION= 1.4.3 CATEGORIES= devel www pear MAINTAINER= [email protected] COMMENT= PEAR Date and Time Zone Classes USES= pear .include <bsd.port.mk>
In the same way, porting Horde modules is a simple process.
Add USES=horde
to the port's
Makefile
. The framework will install
the relevant files in the right places and automatically
generate the plist at install time.
The USE_HORDE_BUILD
and
USE_HORDE_RUN
variables can be used to
add buildtime and runtime dependencies on other
Horde modules. See
Mk/Uses/horde.mk
for a complete list of
available modules.
PORTNAME= Horde_Core PORTVERSION= 2.14.0 CATEGORIES= devel www pear MAINTAINER= [email protected] COMMENT= Horde Core Framework libraries OPTIONS_DEFINE= KOLAB SOCKETS KOLAB_DESC= Enable Kolab server support SOCKETS_DESC= Depend on sockets PHP extension USES= horde USE_PHP= session USE_HORDE_BUILD= Horde_Role USE_HORDE_RUN= Horde_Role Horde_History Horde_Pack \ Horde_Text_Filter Horde_View KOLAB_USE= HORDE_RUN=Horde_Kolab_Server,Horde_Kolab_Session SOCKETS_USE= PHP=sockets .include <bsd.port.mk>
The Ports Collection supports parallel installation of
multiple Python versions. Ports must use a
correct python
interpreter, according to
the user-settable PYTHON_VERSION
.
Most prominently, this means replacing the path to
python
executable in scripts with the value
of PYTHON_CMD
.
Ports that install files under
PYTHON_SITELIBDIR
must use the
pyXY-
package name prefix, so their package
name embeds the version of Python they are installed
into.
PKGNAMEPREFIX= ${PYTHON_PKGNAMEPREFIX}
USES=python | The port needs Python. The minimal required version
can be specified with values such as
2.7+ . Version ranges can also be
specified by separating two version numbers with a
dash: USES=python:3.2-3.3 |
USE_PYTHON=distutils | Use Python distutils for configuring, compiling,
and installing. This is required when the port comes
with setup.py . This overrides
the do-build and
do-install targets and may
also override do-configure
if GNU_CONFIGURE is not
defined. |
USE_PYTHON=autoplist | Create the packaging list automatically. This also requires
USE_PYTHON=distutils to be set.
|
USE_PYTHON=concurrent | The port will use an unique prefix, typically
PYTHON_PKGNAMEPREFIX for certain directories, such
as EXAMPLESDIR and DOCSDIR and
also will append a suffix, the python version from
PYTHON_VER , to binaries and scripts to be
installed. This allows ports to be installed for different Python
versions at the same time, which otherwise would install conflicting
files. |
PYTHON_PKGNAMEPREFIX | Used as a PKGNAMEPREFIX to
distinguish packages for different Python versions.
Example: py27- |
PYTHON_SITELIBDIR | Location of the site-packages tree, that contains
installation path of Python (usually
LOCALBASE ).
PYTHON_SITELIBDIR can be
very useful when installing Python modules. |
PYTHONPREFIX_SITELIBDIR | The PREFIX-clean variant of PYTHON_SITELIBDIR.
Always use %%PYTHON_SITELIBDIR%% in
pkg-plist when possible. The
default value of
%%PYTHON_SITELIBDIR%% is
lib/python%%PYTHON_VERSION%%/site-packages |
PYTHON_CMD | Python interpreter command line, including version number. |
PYNUMERIC | Dependency line for numeric extension. |
PYNUMPY | Dependency line for the new numeric extension, numpy. (PYNUMERIC is deprecated by upstream vendor). |
PYXML | Dependency line for XML extension (not needed for Python 2.0 and higher as it is also in base distribution). |
A complete list of available variables can be found in
/usr/ports/Mk/Uses/python.mk
.
PORTNAME= sample PORTVERSION= 1.2.3 CATEGORIES= devel MAINTAINER= [email protected] COMMENT= Python sample module USES= python USE_PYTHON= autoplist distutils .include <bsd.port.mk>
Some Python applications claim to have
DESTDIR
support (which would be required
for staging) but it is broken (Mailman up to 2.1.16, for
instance). This can be worked around by recompiling the
scripts. This can be done, for example, in the
post-build
target. Assuming the
Python scripts are supposed to reside in
PYTHONPREFIX_SITELIBDIR
after installation,
this solution can be applied:
(cd ${STAGEDIR}${PREFIX} \ && ${PYTHON_CMD} ${PYTHON_LIBDIR}/compileall.py \ -d ${PREFIX} -f ${PYTHONPREFIX_SITELIBDIR:S;${PREFIX}/;;})
This recompiles the sources with a path relative to the
stage directory, and prepends the value of
PREFIX
to the file name recorded in the
byte-compiled output file by -d
.
-f
is required to force recompilation, and
the :S;${PREFIX}/;;
strips prefixes from
the value of PYTHONPREFIX_SITELIBDIR
to make it relative to
PREFIX
.
The Ports Collection supports parallel installation of
multiple Tcl/Tk versions. Ports
should try to support at least the default
Tcl/Tk version and higher with
USES=tcl
. It is possible to specify the
desired version of tcl
by appending
:
, for example,
xx
USES=tcl:85
.
TCL_VER | chosen major.minor version of Tcl |
TCLSH | full path of the Tcl interpreter |
TCL_LIBDIR | path of the Tcl libraries |
TCL_INCLUDEDIR | path of the Tcl C header files |
TK_VER | chosen major.minor version of Tk |
WISH | full path of the Tk interpreter |
TK_LIBDIR | path of the Tk libraries |
TK_INCLUDEDIR | path of the Tk C header files |
See the USES=tcl
and
USES=tk
of
Chapter 15, Values of
USES
for a full description of those
variables. A complete list of those variables is available in
/usr/ports/Mk/Uses/tcl.mk
.
Variable | Description |
---|---|
USE_RUBY | The port requires Ruby. |
USE_RUBY_EXTCONF | The port uses extconf.rb to
configure. |
USE_RUBY_SETUP | The port uses setup.rb to
configure. |
RUBY_SETUP | Set to the alternative name of
setup.rb . Common value is
install.rb . |
This table shows the selected variables available
to port authors via the ports infrastructure. These variables
are used to install files into their proper locations.
Use them in pkg-plist
as much as
possible. Do not redefine these variables in the port.
Variable | Description | Example value |
---|---|---|
RUBY_PKGNAMEPREFIX | Used as a PKGNAMEPREFIX to
distinguish packages for different Ruby
versions. | ruby19- |
RUBY_VERSION | Full version of Ruby in the form of
x.y.z[.p] . | 1.9.3.484 |
RUBY_SITELIBDIR | Architecture independent libraries installation path. | /usr/local/lib/ruby/site_ruby/1.9 |
RUBY_SITEARCHLIBDIR | Architecture dependent libraries installation path. | /usr/local/lib/ruby/site_ruby/1.9/amd64-freebsd10 |
RUBY_MODDOCDIR | Module documentation installation path. | /usr/local/share/doc/ruby19/patsy |
RUBY_MODEXAMPLESDIR | Module examples installation path. | /usr/local/share/examples/ruby19/patsy |
A complete list of available variables can be found in
/usr/ports/Mk/bsd.ruby.mk
.
USE_SDL
is used to
autoconfigure the dependencies for ports which use an SDL
based library like devel/sdl12
and graphics/sdl_image.
These SDL libraries for version 1.2 are recognized:
sdl: devel/sdl12
console: devel/sdl_console
gfx: graphics/sdl_gfx
image: graphics/sdl_image
mixer: audio/sdl_mixer
mm: devel/sdlmm
net: net/sdl_net
pango: x11-toolkits/sdl_pango
sound: audio/sdl_sound
ttf: graphics/sdl_ttf
These SDL libraries for version 2.0 are recognized:
sdl: devel/sdl20
gfx: graphics/sdl2_gfx
image: graphics/sdl2_image
mixer: audio/sdl2_mixer
net: net/sdl2_net
ttf: graphics/sdl2_ttf
Therefore, if a port has a dependency on net/sdl_net and audio/sdl_mixer, the syntax will be:
USE_SDL= net mixer
The dependency devel/sdl12, which is required by net/sdl_net and audio/sdl_mixer, is automatically added as well.
Using USE_SDL
with entries for
SDL 1.2, it will automatically:
Add a dependency on
sdl12-config to
BUILD_DEPENDS
Add the variable SDL_CONFIG
to
CONFIGURE_ENV
Add the dependencies of the selected libraries to
LIB_DEPENDS
Using USE_SDL
with entries for
SDL 2.0, it will automatically:
Add a dependency on
sdl2-config to
BUILD_DEPENDS
Add the variable SDL2_CONFIG
to
CONFIGURE_ENV
Add the dependencies of the selected libraries to
LIB_DEPENDS
To check whether an SDL library is available, use
WANT_SDL
:
WANT_SDL= yes .include <bsd.port.pre.mk> .if ${HAVE_SDL:Mmixer}!="" USE_SDL+= mixer .endif .include <bsd.port.post.mk>
This section describes the status of the wxWidgets libraries in the ports tree and its integration with the ports system.
There are many versions of the wxWidgets libraries which conflict between them (install files under the same name). In the ports tree this problem has been solved by installing each version under a different name using version number suffixes.
The obvious disadvantage of this is that each
application has to be modified to find the expected version.
Fortunately, most of the applications call the
wx-config
script to determine the
necessary compiler and linker flags. The script is named
differently for every available version. Majority of
applications respect an environment variable, or accept a
configure argument, to specify which
wx-config
script to call. Otherwise they
have to be patched.
To make the port use a specific version of wxWidgets there are two variables available for defining (if only one is defined the other will be set to a default value):
Variable | Description | Default value |
---|---|---|
USE_WX | List of versions the port can use | All available versions |
USE_WX_NOT | List of versions the port cannot use | None |
The available wxWidgets versions and the corresponding ports in the tree are:
Version | Port |
---|---|
2.4 | x11-toolkits/wxgtk24 |
2.6 | x11-toolkits/wxgtk26 |
2.8 | x11-toolkits/wxgtk28 |
The versions starting from 2.5
also
come in Unicode version and are installed by a slave port
named like the normal one plus a
-unicode
suffix, but this can be
handled with variables (see
Section 6.20.4, “Unicode”).
The variables in Table 6.23, “Variables to Select wxWidgets Versions” can be set to one or more of these combinations separated by spaces:
Description | Example |
---|---|
Single version | 2.4 |
Ascending range | 2.4+ |
Descending range | 2.6- |
Full range (must be ascending) | 2.4-2.6 |
There are also some variables to select the preferred versions from the available ones. They can be set to a list of versions, the first ones will have higher priority.
Name | Designed for |
---|---|
WANT_WX_VER | the port |
WITH_WX_VER | the user |
There are other applications that, while not being
wxWidgets libraries, are related
to them. These applications can be specified in
WX_COMPS
. These
components are available:
Name | Description | Version restriction |
---|---|---|
wx | main library | none |
contrib | contributed libraries | none |
python | wxPython (Python bindings) | 2.4-2.6 |
mozilla | wxMozilla | 2.4 |
svg | wxSVG | 2.6 |
The dependency type can be selected for each component by adding a suffix separated by a semicolon. If not present then a default type will be used (see Table 6.29, “Default wxWidgets Dependency Types”). These types are available:
Name | Description |
---|---|
build | Component is required for building, equivalent
to BUILD_DEPENDS |
run | Component is required for running, equivalent
to RUN_DEPENDS |
lib | Component is required for building and running,
equivalent to LIB_DEPENDS |
The default values for the components are detailed in this table:
Component | Dependency type |
---|---|
wx | lib |
contrib | lib |
python | run |
mozilla | lib |
svg | lib |
This fragment corresponds to a port which
uses wxWidgets version
2.4
and its contributed
libraries.
USE_WX= 2.4 WX_COMPS= wx contrib
The wxWidgets library
supports Unicode since version 2.5
. In
the ports tree both versions are available and can be
selected with these variables:
Variable | Description | Designed for |
---|---|---|
WX_UNICODE | The port works only with the Unicode version | the port |
WANT_UNICODE | The port works with both versions but prefers the Unicode one | the port |
WITH_UNICODE | The port will use the Unicode version | the user |
WITHOUT_UNICODE | The port will use the normal version if
supported (when WX_UNICODE is not
defined) | the user |
Do not use WX_UNICODE
for ports
that can use both Unicode and normal versions. If
the port needs to use Unicode by default, define
WANT_UNICODE
instead.
To detect an installed version, define
WANT_WX
. If it is not set to a
specific version then the components will have a version
suffix. HAVE_WX
will be
filled after detection.
This fragment can be used in a port that uses wxWidgets if it is installed, or an option is selected.
WANT_WX= yes .include <bsd.port.pre.mk> .if defined(WITH_WX) || !empty(PORT_OPTIONS:MWX) || !empty(HAVE_WX:Mwx-2.4) USE_WX= 2.4 CONFIGURE_ARGS+= --enable-wx .endif
This fragment can be used in a port that
enables wxPython support if it
is installed or if an option is selected, in addition to
wxWidgets, both version
2.6
.
USE_WX= 2.6 WX_COMPS= wx WANT_WX= 2.6 .include <bsd.port.pre.mk> .if defined(WITH_WXPYTHON) || !empty(PORT_OPTIONS:MWXPYTHON) || !empty(HAVE_WX:Mpython) WX_COMPS+= python CONFIGURE_ARGS+= --enable-wxpython .endif
These variables are available in the port (after defining one from Table 6.23, “Variables to Select wxWidgets Versions”).
Name | Description |
---|---|
WX_CONFIG | The path to the
wxWidgets
wx-config script (with different
name) |
WXRC_CMD | The path to the
wxWidgets
wxrc program (with different
name) |
WX_VERSION | The wxWidgets
version that is going to be used (for example,
2.6 ) |
WX_UNICODE | If not defined but Unicode is going to be used then it will be defined |
Define WX_PREMK
to be able to use the
variables right after including
bsd.port.pre.mk
.
When defining WX_PREMK
, then the
version, dependencies, components and defined variables
will not change if modifying the
wxWidgets port variables
after including
bsd.port.pre.mk
.
This fragment illustrates the use of
WX_PREMK
by running the
wx-config
script to obtain the full
version string, assign it to a variable and pass it to the
program.
USE_WX= 2.4 WX_PREMK= yes .include <bsd.port.pre.mk> .if exists(${WX_CONFIG}) VER_STR!= ${WX_CONFIG} --release PLIST_SUB+= VERSION="${VER_STR}" .endif
The wxWidgets variables can
be safely used in commands when they are inside targets
without the need of WX_PREMK
.
Some GNU configure
scripts cannot
find wxWidgets with just the
WX_CONFIG
environment variable set,
requiring additional arguments.
WX_CONF_ARGS
can be used for
provide them.
WX_CONF_ARGS
Possible value | Resulting argument |
---|---|
absolute | --with-wx-config=${WX_CONFIG} |
relative | --with-wx=${LOCALBASE}
--with-wx-config=${WX_CONFIG:T} |
This section describes the status of the Lua libraries in the ports tree and its integration with the ports system.
There are many versions of the Lua libraries and corresponding interpreters, which conflict between them (install files under the same name). In the ports tree this problem has been solved by installing each version under a different name using version number suffixes.
The obvious disadvantage of this is that each application has to be modified to find the expected version. But it can be solved by adding some additional flags to the compiler and linker.
A port using Lua only needs to have this line:
USES= lua
If a specific version of Lua is needed, instructions on
how to select it are given in the USES=lua
part
of Chapter 15, Values of
USES
.
These variables are available in the port.
Name | Description |
---|---|
LUA_VER | The Lua version that
is going to be used (for example,
5.1 ) |
LUA_VER_STR | The Lua version
without the dots (for example,
51 ) |
LUA_PREFIX | The prefix where Lua (and components) is installed |
LUA_SUBDIR | The directory under
${PREFIX}/bin ,
${PREFIX}/share and
${PREFIX}/lib where
Lua is installed |
LUA_INCDIR | The directory where Lua and tolua header files are installed |
LUA_LIBDIR | The directory where Lua and tolua libraries are installed |
LUA_MODLIBDIR | The directory where
Lua module libraries
(.so ) are installed |
LUA_MODSHAREDIR | The directory where
Lua modules
(.lua ) are installed |
LUA_PKGNAMEPREFIX | The package name prefix used by Lua modules |
LUA_CMD | The path to the Lua interpreter |
LUAC_CMD | The path to the Lua compiler |
After 2013-10-08 (254273),
FreeBSD 10-CURRENT and newer versions have a native
iconv
in the operating system. On earlier
versions, converters/libiconv
was used as a dependency.
For software that needs iconv
, define
USES=iconv
. FreeBSD versions before
10-CURRENT on 2013-08-13 (254273) do
not have a native iconv
. On these earlier
versions, a dependency on
converters/libiconv will be
added automatically.
When a port defines USES=iconv
, these
variables will be available:
Variable name | Purpose | Value before FreeBSD 10-CURRENT 254273 (2013-08-13) | Value after FreeBSD 10-CURRENT 254273 (2013-08-13) |
---|---|---|---|
ICONV_CMD | Directory where the iconv
binary resides | ${LOCALBASE}/bin/iconv | /usr/bin/iconv |
ICONV_LIB | ld argument to link to
libiconv (if needed) | -liconv | (empty) |
ICONV_PREFIX | Directory where the iconv
implementation resides (useful for configure
scripts) | ${LOCALBASE} | /usr |
ICONV_CONFIGURE_ARG | Preconstructed configure argument for configure scripts | --with-libiconv-prefix=${LOCALBASE} | (empty) |
ICONV_CONFIGURE_BASE | Preconstructed configure argument for configure scripts | --with-libiconv=${LOCALBASE} | (empty) |
These two examples automatically populate the variables
with the correct value for systems using
converters/libiconv or the
native iconv
respectively:
As shown above, ICONV_LIB
is empty when
a native iconv
is present. This can be
used to detect the native iconv
and respond
appropriately.
Sometimes a program has an ld
argument
or search path hardcoded in a Makefile
or
configure script. This approach can be used to solve that
problem:
-liconv
USES= iconv post-patch: @${REINPLACE_CMD} -e 's/-liconv/${ICONV_LIB}/' ${WRKSRC}/Makefile
In some cases it is necessary to set alternate values or
perform operations depending on whether there is a native
iconv
.
bsd.port.pre.mk
must be included before
testing the value of ICONV_LIB
:
iconv
AvailabilityUSES= iconv .include <bsd.port.pre.mk> post-patch: .if empty(ICONV_LIB) # native iconv detected @${REINPLACE_CMD} -e 's|iconv||' ${WRKSRC}/Config.sh .endif .include <bsd.port.post.mk>
Ports that need Xfce libraries or
applications set USES=xfce
.
Specific Xfce library and
application dependencies are set with values assigned to
USE_XFCE
. They are defined in
/usr/ports/Mk/Uses/xfce.mk
. The possible
values are:
USE_XFCE
In this example, the ported application uses the GTK3-specific widgets x11/libxfce4menu and x11/xfce4-conf.
USES= xfce:gtk3 USE_XFCE= libmenu xfconf
Xfce components included this way will automatically include any dependencies they need. It is no longer necessary to specify the entire list. If the port only needs x11-wm/xfce4-panel, use:
USES= xfce USE_XFCE= panel
There is no need to list the components x11-wm/xfce4-panel needs itself like this:
USES= xfce USE_XFCE= libexo libmenu libutil panel
However, Xfce components and non-Xfce dependencies of the port must be included explicitly. Do not count on an Xfce component to provide a sub-dependency other than itself for the main port.
USE_GECKO | Gecko backend the port can handle. Possible
values: libxul
(libxul.so ),
seamonkey
(libgtkembedmoz.so , deprecated,
must not be used any more). |
USE_FIREFOX | The port requires Firefox as a runtime
dependency. Possible values: yes
(get default version), 40 ,
36 , 35 . Default
dependency is on version
40 . |
USE_FIREFOX_BUILD | The port requires Firefox as a buildtime dependency. Possible values: see USE_FIREFOX. This automatically sets USE_FIREFOX and assigns the same value. |
USE_SEAMONKEY | The port requires SeaMonkey as a runtime
dependency. Possible values: yes
(get default version), 20 ,
11 (deprecated, must not be used
any more). Default dependency is on version
20 . |
USE_SEAMONKEY_BUILD | The port requires SeaMonkey as a buildtime dependency. Possible values: see USE_SEAMONKEY. This automatically sets USE_SEAMONKEY and assigns the same value. |
USE_THUNDERBIRD | The port requires Thunderbird as a runtime
dependency. Possible values: yes
(get default version), 31 ,
30 (deprecated, must not be used
any more). Default dependency is on version
31 . |
USE_THUNDERBIRD_BUILD | The port requires Thunderbird as a buildtime dependency. Possible values: see USE_THUNDERBIRD. This automatically sets USE_THUNDERBIRD and assigns the same value. |
A complete list of available variables can be found in
/usr/ports/Mk/bsd.gecko.mk
.
Variable | Means |
---|---|
USE_BDB | If variable is set to yes ,
add dependency on
databases/db5
port. The variable may also be set to values: 48, 5
or 6. It is possible to declare a range of acceptable
values, USE_BDB =48+ will find the
highest installed version, and fall back to 4.8 if
nothing else is installed.
WANT_BDB_VER will always build this
port with a specific version of the Berkely DB.
INVALID_BDB_VER can be used to
specify a version that cannot be used. |
USE_MYSQL | If the variable is set to yes ,
add a dependency on the databases/mysql56-client port.
An associated variable,
WANT_MYSQL_VER , may be set to
values such as 51, 55, or 60. Additionally to
specify use of Percona, use 56p, or for MariaDB, use
53m, 55m or 100m. |
USE_PGSQL | If set to yes , add dependency
on databases/postgresql93-client
port. An associated variable,
WANT_PGSQL_VER , may be set to
values such as 84, 90, 91, 92, 93 or 94. It is
possible to declare a minimum or maximum value;
WANT_PGSQL_VER =
90+ will cause the port to depend on a
minimum version of 9.0. |
USE_SQLITE | If set to yes , add
dependency on
databases/sqlite3
port. The variable may also be set to 3 or 2, to add
a dependency on 3.x or 2.x, respectively. |
More details are available in bsd.database.mk.
rc.d
scripts are used to start
services on system startup, and to give administrators a
standard way of stopping, starting and restarting the service.
Ports integrate into the system rc.d
framework. Details on its usage can be found in the
rc.d Handbook chapter. Detailed explanation of
the available commands is provided in rc(8) and
rc.subr(8). Finally, there is
an
article on practical aspects of
rc.d
scripting.
With a mythical port called
doorman
, which needs to start a
doormand
daemon. Add the following
to the Makefile
:
USE_RC_SUBR= doormand
Multiple scripts may be listed and will be installed.
Scripts must be placed in the files
subdirectory and a .in
suffix must be added
to their filename. Standard SUB_LIST
expansions will be ran against this file. Use of the
%%PREFIX%%
and
%%LOCALBASE%%
expansions is strongly
encouraged as well. More on SUB_LIST
in
the relevant
section.
As of FreeBSD 6.1-RELEASE, local
rc.d
scripts (including those installed
by ports) are included in the overall rcorder(8) of the
base system.
An example simple rc.d
script to start
the doormand daemon:
#!/bin/sh # $FreeBSD$ # # PROVIDE:doormand
# REQUIRE: LOGIN # KEYWORD: shutdown # # Add these lines to /etc/rc.conf.local or /etc/rc.conf # to enable this service: # #doormand
_enable (bool): Set to NO by default. # Set it to YES to enabledoormand
. #doormand
_config (path): Set to %%PREFIX%%/etc/doormand/doormand.cf
# by default. . /etc/rc.subr name=doormand
rcvar=doormand
_enable load_rc_config $name : ${doormand
_enable:="NO"} : ${doormand
_config="%%PREFIX%%/etc/doormand/doormand.cf
"} command=%%PREFIX%%/sbin/${name} pidfile=/var/run/${name}.pid command_args="-p $pidfile -f $doormand_config
" run_rc_command "$1"
Unless there is a very good reason to start the service earlier, or it runs as a particular user (other than root), all ports scripts must use:
REQUIRE: LOGIN
If the startup script launches a daemon that must be shutdown, the following will trigger a stop of the service on system shutdown:
KEYWORD: shutdown
If the script is not starting a persistent service this is not necessary.
For optional configuration elements the "=" style of default variable assignment is preferable to the ":=" style here, since the former sets a default value only if the variable is unset, and the latter sets one if the variable is unset or null. A user might very well include something like:
doormand
_flags=""
in their rc.conf.local
, and a
variable substitution using ":=" would
inappropriately override the user's intention. The
_enable
variable is not optional,
and must use the ":" for the default.
Before contributing a port with an
rc.d
script, and more importantly,
before committing one, please consult this
checklist to be sure that it is ready.
The devel/rclint port can check for most of these, but it is not a substitute for proper review.
If this is a new file, does it have a
.sh
extension? If so, that
must be changed to just
since file
.inrc.d
files may not end
with that extension.
Does the file have a
$FreeBSD$
tag?
Do the name of the file (minus
.in
), the
PROVIDE
line, and
$
name
all match? The file name matching
PROVIDE
makes debugging easier,
especially for rcorder(8) issues. Matching the
file name and
$
name
makes it easier to figure out which variables are
relevant in rc.conf[.local]
. It is
also a policy
for all new scripts, including those in the base
system.
Is the REQUIRE
line set to
LOGIN
? This is mandatory for scripts
that run as a non-root user. If it runs as root, is
there a good reason for it to run prior to
LOGIN
? If not, it must run after
so that local scrips can be loosely grouped to a point in
rcorder(8) after most everything in the base is
already running.
Does the script start a persistent service? If so,
it must have KEYWORD:
shutdown
.
Make sure there is no
KEYWORD: FreeBSD
present. This has
not been necessary or desirable for years. It is also
an indication that the new script was copy/pasted from
an old script, so extra caution must be given to the
review.
If the script uses an interpreted language like
perl
, python
, or
ruby
, make certain that
command_interpreter
is set
appropriately, for example, for Perl,
by adding PERL=${PERL}
to
SUB_LIST
and using
%%PERL%%
. Otherwise,
#
service
name
stop
will probably not work properly. See service(8) for more information.
Have all occurrences of
/usr/local
been replaced with
%%PREFIX%%
?
Do the default variable assignments come after
load_rc_config
?
Are there default assignments to empty strings? They should be removed, but double-check that the option is documented in the comments at the top of the file.
Are things that are set in variables actually used in the script?
Are options listed in the default
name
_flags
things that are actually mandatory? If so, they must
be in command_args
. The
-d
option is a red flag (pardon the
pun) here, since it is usually the option to
“daemonize” the process, and therefore is
actually mandatory.
must never be included in
name
_flagscommand_args
(and vice versa,
although that error is less common).
Does the script execute any code unconditionally?
This is frowned on. Usually these things must be
dealt with through a
start_precmd
.
All boolean tests must use the
checkyesno
function. No
hand-rolled tests for [Yy][Ee][Ss]
,
etc.
If there is a loop (for example, waiting for something to start) does it have a counter to terminate the loop? We do not want the boot to be stuck forever if there is an error.
Does the script create files or directories that
need specific permissions, for example, a
pid
that needs to be owned by
the user that runs the process? Rather than the
traditional touch(1)/chown(8)/chmod(1)
routine, consider using install(1) with the proper
command line arguments to do the whole procedure with
one step.
Some ports require a particular user account to be present, usually
for daemons that run as that user. For these ports, choose a
unique UID from 50 to 999 and register it in
ports/UIDs
(for users) and
ports/GIDs
(for groups). The unique identification
should be the same for users and groups.
Please include a patch against these two files when requiring a new user or group to be created for the port.
Then use USERS
and
GROUPS
in
Makefile
, and the user will be
automatically created when installing the port.
USERS= pulse GROUPS= pulse pulse-access pulse-rt
The current list of reserved UIDs and GIDs can be found
in ports/UIDs
and
ports/GIDs
.
Some ports (such as kernel loadable modules) need the kernel source files so that the port can compile. Here is the correct way to determine if the user has them installed:
USES= kmod
Apart from this check, the kmod
feature
takes care of most items that these ports need to take into
account.
Some ports, particularly the p5-
ports,
need to change their pkg-plist
depending on
what options they are configured with (or version of
perl
, in the case of p5-
ports). To make this easy, any instances in
pkg-plist
of %%OSREL%%
,
%%PERL_VER%%
, and
%%PERL_VERSION%%
will be substituted
appropriately. The value of %%OSREL%%
is the
numeric revision of the operating system (for example,
4.9
). %%PERL_VERSION%%
and %%PERL_VER%%
is the full version number
of perl
(for example, 5.8.9
).
Several other
%%
related
to port's documentation files are described in the relevant
section.VARS
%%
To make other substitutions, set
PLIST_SUB
with a list of
pairs and instances of
VAR
=VALUE
%%
will be
substituted with VAR
%%VALUE
in
pkg-plist
.
For instance, if a port installs many files
in a version-specific subdirectory, use a placeholder for the
version so that pkg-plist
does not have to
be regenerated every time the port is updated. For
example:
OCTAVE_VERSION= ${PORTREVISION} PLIST_SUB= OCTAVE_VERSION=${OCTAVE_VERSION}
in the Makefile
and use
%%OCTAVE_VERSION%%
wherever the version shows
up in pkg-plist
. When
the port is upgraded, it will not be necessary to edit dozens (or in some
cases, hundreds) of lines in
pkg-plist
.
If files are installed conditionally on the options
set in the port, the usual way of handling it is prefixing
pkg-plist
lines with a
%%OPT%%
for lines needed when the option is
enabled, or %%NO_OPT%%
when the option is
disabled, and adding OPTIONS_SUB=yes
to the
Makefile
. See Section 5.12.3.1, “OPTIONS_SUB
” for more information.
For instance, if there are files that are only installed
when the X11
option is enabled, and
Makefile
has:
OPTIONS_DEFINE= X11 OPTIONS_SUB= yes
In pkg-plist
, put
%%X11%%
in front of the lines only being
installed when the option is enabled, like this :
%%X11%%bin/foo-gui
This substitution will be done between the
pre-install
and
do-install
targets, by reading from
PLIST
and writing to
TMPPLIST
(default:
WRKDIR/.PLIST.mktmp
). So if the port
builds PLIST
on the fly, do so in or before
pre-install
. Also, if the port
needs to edit the resulting file, do so in
post-install
to a file named
TMPPLIST
.
Another way of modifying a port's packing list is based on
setting the variables PLIST_FILES
and
PLIST_DIRS
. The value of each variable is
regarded as a list of pathnames to write to
TMPPLIST
along with
PLIST
contents. Names listed in
PLIST_FILES
and
PLIST_DIRS
are subject to
%%
substitution as described above. Except for that, names from
VAR
%%PLIST_FILES
will appear in the final packing
list unchanged, while @dir
will be prepended to names from
PLIST_DIRS
. To take effect,
PLIST_FILES
and
PLIST_DIRS
must be set before
TMPPLIST
is written, that is, in
pre-install
or earlier.
From time to time, using OPTIONS_SUB
is not enough. In those cases, adding a specific
to TAG
PLIST_SUB
inside the Makefile
with a special
value of @comment
, makes package tools to
ignore the line. For instance, if some files are only installed
when the X11
option is on and the
architecture is i386
:
.include <bsd.port.pre.mk> .if ${PORT_OPTIONS:MX11} && ${ARCH} == "i386" PLIST_SUB+= X11I386="" .else PLIST_SUB+= X11I386="@comment " .endif
When being de-installed, a port has to remove empty
directories it created. Most of these directories are removed
automatically by pkg(8), but for directories created
outside of ${PREFIX}
, or empty
directories, some more work needs to be done. This is usually
accomplished by adding @dir
lines for those
directories. Subdirectories must be deleted before deleting
parent directories.
[...] @dir /var/games/oneko/saved-games @dir /var/games/oneko
Empty directories created during port installation need
special attention. They must be present when the package
is created. If they are not created by the port code, create
them in the Makefile
:
post-stage: @${MKDIR} ${STAGEDIR}${PREFIX}/some/directory
Add the directory to pkg-plist
like any other. For example:
@dir some/directory
If the port installs configuration files to
PREFIX/etc
(or elsewhere) do
not list them in
pkg-plist
. That will cause
pkg delete
to remove files that have been carefully
edited by the user, and a re-installation will wipe them
out.
Instead, install sample files with a
extension. The filename
.sample@sample
macro automates this,
see Section 7.6.7, “@sample
file
” for what it does
exactly. For each sample file, add a line to
pkg-plist
:
@sample etc/orbit.conf.sample
If there is a very good reason not to install a working
configuration file by default, only list the sample filename in
pkg-plist
, without the @sample
part, and add a message pointing out that the
user must copy and edit the file before the software will
work.
When a port installs its configuration in a subdirectory
of ${PREFIX}/etc
, use
ETCDIR
, which defaults to
${PREFIX}/etc/${PORTNAME}
, it can be
overridden in the ports Makefile
if there
is a convention for the port to use some other directory. The
%%ETCDIR%%
macro will be used in its
stead in pkg-plist
.
The sample configuration files should always have the
.sample
suffix. If for some historical
reason using the standard suffix is not possible, use
this construct:
@unexec if cmp -s %D/etc/orbit.conf-dist %D/etc/orbit.conf; then rm -f %D/etc/orbit.conf; fi etc/orbit.conf-dist @exec if [ ! -f %D/etc/orbit.conf ] ; then cp -p %D/%F %B/orbit.conf; fi
The order of these lines is important. On deinstallation,
the sample file is compared to the actual configuration file.
If these files are identical, no changes have been made by the
user and the actual file can be safely deleted. Because the
sample file must still exist for the comparison, the
@unexec
line comes before the sample
configuration file name. On installation, if an actual
configuration file is not already present, the sample file is
copied to the actual file. The sample file must be present
before it can be copied, so the @exec
line
comes after the sample configuration file name.
To debug any issues, temporarily remove the
-s
flag to cmp(1) for more
output.
See pkg-create(8) for more information on
%D
and related substitution markers.
A static package list is a package
list which is available in the Ports Collection either as
pkg-plist
(with or without variable
substitution), or embedded into the
Makefile
via
PLIST_FILES
and
PLIST_DIRS
. Even if the contents are
auto-generated by a tool or a target in the Makefile
before the inclusion into the Ports
Collection by a committer (for example, using make
makeplist>
), this is still considered a static list,
since it is possible to examine it without having to download or
compile the distfile.
A dynamic package list is a package
list which is generated at the time the port is compiled based
upon the files and directories which are installed. It is not
possible to examine it before the source code of the ported
application is downloaded and compiled, or after running a
make clean
.
While the use of dynamic package lists is not forbidden, maintainers should use static package lists wherever possible, as it enables users to grep(1) through available ports to discover, for example, which port installs a certain file. Dynamic lists should be primarily used for complex ports where the package list changes drastically based upon optional features of the port (and thus maintaining a static package list is infeasible), or ports which change the package list based upon the version of dependent software used. For example, ports which generate docs with Javadoc.
First, make sure the port is almost complete, with only
pkg-plist
missing. Running make
makeplist
will show an example for
pkg-plist
. The output of
makeplist
must be double checked for
correctness as it tries to automatically guess a few things, and
can get it wrong.
User configuration files should be installed as
,
as it is described in Section 7.3, “Configuration Files”.
filename
.sampleinfo/dir
must not be listed and
appropriate install-info
lines must be
added as noted in the info
files section. Any libraries installed by the port
must be listed as specified in the shared libraries
section.
All keywords can also take optional arguments in parentheses. The arguments are owner, group, and mode. This argument is used on the file or directory referenced. To change the owner, group, and mode of a configuration file, use:
@sample(games,games,640) etc/config.sample
The arguments are optional. If only the group and mode need to be changed, use:
@sample(,games,660) etc/config.sample
Will run update-desktop-database -q
after installation and deinstallation.
Add a @dir
entry for the
directory passed as an argument, and run fc-cache
-s
, mkfontscale
and
mkfontdir
on that directory after
installation and deinstallation. Additionally, on
deinstallation, it removes the
fonts.scale
and
fonts.dir
cache files if they are
empty.
Add the file passed as argument to the plist, and updates
the info document index on installation and deinstallation.
Additionally, it removes the index if empty on
deinstallation. This should never be used manually, but
always through INFO
. See Section 5.11, “Info Files” for more information.
Runs kldxref
on the directory
on installation and deinstallation. Additionally, on
deinstallation, it will remove the directory if empty.
Will remove the file on deinstallation, and not give an error if the file is not there.
Add the file passed as argument to the plist.
On installation, check for a “real” file with
just the base name (the name without the
.sample
extension). If the real file is
not found, copy the sample file to the base file name. On
deinstallation, remove the configuration file if it has not
been modified. See Section 7.3, “Configuration Files” for more
information.
Runs update-mime-database
on the
directory on installation and deinstallation.
Add the file passed as argument to the plist.
On installation, add the full path to
file
to
/etc/shells
, while making sure it is not
added twice. On deinstallation, remove it from
/etc/shells
.
There are a few keywords that are hardcoded, and documented in pkg-create(8). For the sake of completeness, they are also documented here.
The empty keyword is a placeholder to use when the
file's owner, group, or mode need to be changed. For
example, to set the group of the file to
games
and add the setgid bit, add:
@(,games,2755) sbin/daemon
Set the internal directory pointer to point to directory. All subsequent filenames are assumed relative to this directory.
Execute command
as part of
the unpacking process. If command contains any of these
sequences somewhere in it, they are expanded
inline. For these examples, assume that
@cwd
is set to
/usr/local
and the last
extracted file was bin/emacs
.
%F
Expand to the last filename extracted (as
specified). In the example case
bin/emacs
.
%D
Expand to the current directory prefix, as set
with @cwd
. In the example case
/usr/local
.
%B
Expand to the basename of the fully qualified
filename, that is, the current directory prefix plus
the last filespec, minus the trailing filename. In
the example case, that would be
/usr/local/bin
.
%f
Expand to the filename part of the fully qualified
name, or the converse of %B
. In
the example case,
emacs
.
Execute command
as part of
the deinstallation process. Expansion of special
%
sequences is the same as for
@exec
. This command is not executed
during the package add, as @exec
is, but
rather when the package is deleted. This is useful for
deleting links and other ancillary files that were created
as a result of adding the package, but not directly known to
the package's table of contents (and hence not automatically
removable).
Set default permission for all subsequently extracted
files to mode
. Format is the
same as that used by chmod(1). Use without an arg to
set back to default permissions (mode of the file while
being packed).
This must be a numeric mode, like
644
, 4755
, or
600
. It cannnot be a relative mode
like u+s
.
Set default ownership for all subsequent files to
user
. Use without an argument to
set back to default ownership (root
).
Set default group ownership for all subsequent files to
group
. Use without an arg to set
back to default group ownership (wheel
).
Declare directory name. By default, directories created
under PREFIX
by a package installation
are automatically removed. Use this when an empty directory
under PREFIX
needs to be created, or when
the directory needs to have non default owner, group, or
mode. Directories outside of PREFIX
need
to be registered. For example,
/var/db/${PORTNAME}
needs to have a
@dir
entry whereas
${PREFIX}/share/${PORTNAME}
does not if
it contains files or uses the default owner, group, and
mode.
Declare directory name to be deleted at deinstall time.
By default, directories created under
PREFIX
by a package installation are
deleted when the package is deinstalled.
Package list files can be extended by keywords that are
defined in the ${PORTSDIR}/Keywords
directory. The settings for each keyword are stored in a
UCL file named
.
The file must contain at least one of the next
sections:keyword
.ucl
attributes
Changes the owner, group, or mode used by the
keyword. Contains an associative array where the
possible keys are owner
,
group
, and mode
.
The values are, respectively, a user name, a group name,
and a file mode. For example:
attributes: { owner: "games", group: "games", mode: 0555 }
action
Defines what happens to the keyword's parameter. Contains an array where the possible values are:
setprefix
Set the prefix for the next plist entries.
dir
Register a directory to be created on install and removed on deinstall.
dirrm
Register a directory to be deleted on deinstall. Deprecated.
dirrmtry
Register a directory to try and deleted on deinstall. Deprecated.
file
Register a file.
setmode
Set the mode for the next plist entries.
setowner
Set the owner for the next plist entries.
setgroup
Set the group for the next plist entries.
comment
Does not do anything, equivalent to not
entering an action
section.
ignore_next
Ignore the next entry in the plist.
pre-install
, post-install
, pre-deinstall
, post-deinstall
, pre-upgrade
, post-upgrade
These keywords contains a sh(1) script to be
executed before or after installation, deinstallation,
or upgrade of the package. In addition to the usual
@exec
%
placeholders described in Section 7.6.10.3, “foo
@exec
command
”, there is a new
one, %@
, which represents the
argument of the keyword.
@dirrmtryecho
KeywordThis keyword does two things, it adds a
@dirrmtry
line to the
packing list, and echoes the fact that the directory is
removed when deinstalling the package.directory
actions: [dirrmtry] post-deinstall: <<EOD echo "Directory %D/%@ removed." EOD
@sample
is ImplementedThis keyword does three things, it adds the
filename
passed as an argument to
@sample
to the packing list, it adds to
the post-install
script instructions to
copy the sample to the actual configuration file if it does
not already exist, and it adds to the
post-deinstall
instructions to remove the
configuration file if it has not been modified.
actions: [file] post-install: <<EOD case "%@" in /*) sample_file="%@" ;; *) sample_file="%D/%@" ;; esac target_file="${sample_file%.sample}" if ! [ -f "${target_file}" ]; then /bin/cp -p "${sample_file}" "${target_file}" fi EOD pre-deinstall: <<EOD case "%@" in /*) sample_file="%@" ;; *) sample_file="%D/%@" ;; esac target_file="${sample_file%.sample}" if cmp -s "${target_file}" "${sample_file}"; then rm -f "${target_file}" else echo "You may need to manually remove ${target_file} if it's no longer needed." fi EOD
There are some tricks we have not mentioned yet about the
pkg-
files that
come in handy sometimes.*
To display a message when the package is installed,
place the message in pkg-message
. This
capability is often useful to display additional installation
steps to be taken after a pkg install
or to
display licensing information.
When some lines about the build-time knobs or warnings
have to be displayed, use ECHO_MSG
.
pkg-message
is only for
post-installation steps. Likewise, the distinction between
ECHO_MSG
is for printing
informational text to the screen and ECHO_CMD
is for
command pipelining:
update-etc-shells: @${ECHO_MSG} "updating /etc/shells" @${CP} /etc/shells /etc/shells.bak @( ${GREP} -v ${PREFIX}/bin/bash /etc/shells.bak; \ ${ECHO_CMD} ${PREFIX}/bin/bash) >/etc/shells @${RM} /etc/shells.bak
Do not add an entry for pkg-message
in pkg-plist
.
If the port needs to execute commands when the binary
package is installed with pkg add
or
pkg install
, use
pkg-install
. This script will
automatically be added to the package. It will be run twice by
pkg
, the first time as ${SH}
pkg-install ${PKGNAME} PRE-INSTALL
before the
package is installed, and the second time as
${SH} pkg-install ${PKGNAME}
POST-INSTALL
after it has been installed.
$2
can be tested to determine which
mode the script is being run in. The PKG_PREFIX
environmental variable will be set to the package installation
directory.
This script executes when a package is removed.
This script will be run twice by pkg
delete
The first time as ${SH}
pkg-deinstall ${PKGNAME} DEINSTALL
before the
port is de-installed and the second time as
${SH} pkg-deinstall ${PKGNAME}
POST-DEINSTALL
after the port has been de-installed.
$2
can be tested to determine which
mode the script is being run in. The PKG_PREFIX
environmental variable will be set to the package installation
directory
All the names of
pkg-
are
defined using variables that can be changed in the
*
Makefile
if needed. This is especially
useful when sharing the same
pkg-
files
among several ports or when it is necessary to write to one of these files.
See writing to places other than
*
WRKDIR
for why it is a bad idea to
write directly into
the directory containing the
pkg-
files.*
Here is a list of variable names and their default values.
(PKGDIR
defaults to
${MASTERDIR}
.)
Variable | Default value |
---|---|
DESCR | ${PKGDIR}/pkg-descr |
PLIST | ${PKGDIR}/pkg-plist |
PKGINSTALL | ${PKGDIR}/pkg-install |
PKGDEINSTALL | ${PKGDIR}/pkg-deinstall |
PKGMESSAGE | ${PKGDIR}/pkg-message |
SUB_FILES
and
SUB_LIST
are useful for dynamic
values in port files, such as the installation
PREFIX
in
pkg-message
.
SUB_FILES
specifies a list
of files to be automatically modified. Each
in the
file
SUB_FILES
list must have a corresponding
present
in file
.inFILESDIR
. A modified version will be
created as
${WRKDIR}/
.
Files defined as a value of file
USE_RC_SUBR
(or
the deprecated USE_RCORDER
) are automatically
added to SUB_FILES
. For the files
pkg-message
,
pkg-install
, and
pkg-deinstall
, the corresponding Makefile
variable is automatically set to point to the processed
version.
SUB_LIST
is a list of
VAR=VALUE
pairs. For each pair,
%%VAR%%
will be replaced with
VALUE
in each file listed in
SUB_FILES
. Several common pairs are
automatically defined: PREFIX
,
LOCALBASE
, DATADIR
,
DOCSDIR
, EXAMPLESDIR
,
WWWDIR
, and ETCDIR
. Any
line beginning with @comment
will be deleted
from resulting files after a variable substitution.
This example replaces
%%ARCH%%
with the system architecture in a
pkg-message
:
SUB_FILES= pkg-message SUB_LIST= ARCH=${ARCH}
Note that for this example,
pkg-message.in
must exist in
FILESDIR
.
Example of a good
pkg-message.in
:
Now it is time to configure this package. Copy %%PREFIX%%/share/examples/putsy/%%ARCH%%.conf into your home directory as .putsy.conf and edit it.
Several of the FreeBSD port maintenance tools, such as
portupgrade(1), rely on a database called
/usr/ports/INDEX
which keeps track of such
items as port dependencies. INDEX
is
created by the top-level ports/Makefile
via
make index
, which descends into each port
subdirectory and executes make describe
there. Thus, if make describe
fails in any
port, no one can generate INDEX
, and many
people will quickly become unhappy.
It is important to be able to generate this file no matter
what options are present in make.conf
, so
please avoid doing things such as using
.error
statements when (for instance) a
dependency is not satisfied. (See
Section 12.15, “Avoid Use of the .error
Construct”.)
If make describe
produces a string rather
than an error message, everything is probably safe. See
bsd.port.mk
for the meaning of the string
produced.
Also note that running a recent version of
portlint
(as specified in the next section)
will cause make describe
to be run
automatically.
Do check the port with portlint
before submitting or committing it. portlint
warns about many common errors, both functional and
stylistic. For a new (or repocopied) port,
portlint -A
is the most thorough; for an
existing port, portlint -C
is
sufficient.
Since portlint
uses heuristics to try to
figure out errors, it can produce false positive warnings. In
addition, occasionally something that is flagged as a problem
really cannot be done in any other way due to limitations in the
ports framework. When in doubt, the best thing to do is ask on
FreeBSD ports mailing list.
The ports-mgmt/porttools program is part of the Ports Collection.
port
is the front-end script, which can
help simplify the testing job. Whenever a new port or an update
to an existing one needs testing, use
port test
to test the port, including the
portlint
checking. This command also detects and lists any files that
are not listed in pkg-plist
. For
example:
#
port test /usr/ports/net/csup
PREFIX
determines where the port will be
installed. It defaults to /usr/local
, but
can be set by the user to a custom path like
/opt
. The port must respect the value of
this variable.
DESTDIR
, if set by the user, determines
the complete alternative environment, usually a jail or an
installed system mounted somewhere other than
/
. A port will actually install into
DESTDIR/PREFIX
, and register with the
package database in DESTDIR/var/db/pkg
. As
DESTDIR
is handled automatically by the ports
infrastructure with chroot(8). There is no need for
modifications or any extra care to write
DESTDIR
-compliant ports.
The value of PREFIX
will be set to
LOCALBASE
(defaulting to
/usr/local
). If
USE_LINUX_PREFIX
is set,
PREFIX
will be LINUXBASE
(defaulting to /compat/linux
).
Avoiding hard-coded /usr/local
paths in
the source makes the port much more flexible and able to cater
to the needs of other sites. Often, this can be accomplished by
replacing occurrences of /usr/local
in the port's various Makefile
s with
${PREFIX}
. This variable is
automatically passed down to every stage of the build and
install processes.
Make sure the application is not installing things in
/usr/local
instead of
PREFIX
. A quick test for such hard-coded
paths is:
%
make clean; make package PREFIX=/var/tmp/`make -V PORTNAME`
If anything is installed outside of
PREFIX
, the package creation process will
complain that it cannot find the files.
In addition, it is worth checking the same with the stage directory support (see Section 6.1, “Staging”):
%
make stage && make check-plist && make stage-qa && make package
check-plist
checks for files
missing from the plist, and files in the plist that are not
installed by the port.
stage-qa
checks for common
problems like bad shebang, symlinks pointing outside the
stage directory, setuid files, and non-stripped
libraries...
These tests will not find hard-coded paths inside the port's
files, nor will it verify that LOCALBASE
is
being used to correctly refer to files from other ports. The
temporarily-installed port in
/var/tmp/`make -V PORTNAME`
must be
tested for proper operation to make sure there are no problems
with paths.
PREFIX
must not be set explicitly in a
port's Makefile
. Users installing the port
may have set PREFIX
to a custom location, and
the port must respect that setting.
Refer to programs and files from other ports with the
variables mentioned above, not explicit pathnames. For
instance, if the port requires a macro PAGER
to have the full pathname of less
, do not use
a literal path of /usr/local/bin/less
.
Instead, use ${LOCALBASE}
:
-DPAGER=\"${LOCALBASE}/bin/less\"
The path with LOCALBASE
is more likely to
still work if the system administrator has moved the whole
/usr/local
tree somewhere else.
All these tests are done automatically when running
poudriere testport
or poudriere
bulk -t
. It is highly recommended that every
ports contributor install it, and tests all his ports with it.
See Section 9.5, “Poudriere” for more
information.
For a ports contributor, Poudriere is one of the most important and helpful testing and build tools. Its main features include:
Bulk building of the entire ports tree, specific subsets of the ports tree, or a single port including its dependencies
Automatic packaging of build results
Generation of build log files per port
Providing a signed pkg(8) repository
Testing of port builds before submitting a patch to the FreeBSD bug tracker or committing to the ports tree
Testing for successful ports builds using different options
Because Poudriere performs its building in a clean jail(8) environment and uses zfs(8) features, it has several advantages over traditional testing on the host system:
No pollution of the host environment: No leftover files, no accidental removals, no changes of existing configuration files.
Verify pkg-plist
for missing or
superfluous entries
Ports committers sometimes ask for a Poudriere log alongside a patch submission to assess whether the patch is ready for integration into the ports tree
It is also quite straightforward to set up and use, has no dependencies, and will run on any supported FreeBSD release. This section shows how to install, configure, and run Poudriere as part of the normal workflow of a ports contributor.
The examples in this section show a default file layout, as
standard in FreeBSD. Substitute any local changes accordingly.
The ports tree, represented by ${PORTSDIR}
,
is located in /usr/ports
. Both
${LOCALBASE}
and ${PREFIX}
are /usr/local
by default.
Poudriere is available in the ports tree in ports-mgmt/poudriere. It can be installed using pkg(8) or from ports:
#
pkg install poudriere
or
#
make -C /usr/ports/ports-mgmt/poudriere install clean
There is also a work-in-progress version of Poudriere which will eventually become the next release. It is available in ports-mgmt/poudriere-devel. This development version is used for the official FreeBSD package builds, so it is well tested. It often has newer interesting features. A ports committer will want to use the development version because it is what is used in production, and has all the new features that will make sure everything is exactly right. A contributor will not necessarily need those as the most important fixes are backported to released version. The main reason for the use of the development version to build the official package is because it is faster, in a way that will shorten a full build from 18 hours to 17 hours when using a high end 32 CPU server with 128GB of RAM. Those optimizations will not matter a lot when building ports on a desktop machine.
The port installs a default configuration file,
/usr/local/etc/poudriere.conf
. Each
parameter is documented in the configuration file and in
poudriere(8). Here is a minimal example config
file:
ZPOOL=tank ZROOTFS=/poudriere BASEFS=/poudriere DISTFILES_CACHE=/usr/ports/distfiles RESOLV_CONF=/etc/resolv.conf FREEBSD_HOST=ftp://ftp.freebsd.org SVN_HOST=svn0.eu.FreeBSD.org
ZPOOL
The name of the ZFS storage pool
which Poudriere shall use.
Must be listed in the output of zpool
status
.
ZROOTFS
The root of
Poudriere-managed file
systems. This entry will cause
Poudriere to create
zfs(8) file systems under
tank/poudriere
.
BASEFS
The root mount point for
Poudriere file systems. This
entry will cause Poudriere to
mount tank/poudriere
to
/poudriere
.
DISTFILES_CACHE
Defines where distfiles are stored. In this example, Poudriere and the host share the distfiles storage directory. This avoids downloading tarballs which are already present on the system.
RESOLV_CONF
Use the host /etc/resolv.conf
inside jails for DNS. This is needed
so jails can resolve the URLs of
distfiles when downloading. It is not needed when using
a proxy. Refer to the default configuration file for
proxy configuration.
FREEBSD_HOST
The FTP/HTTP
server to use when the jails are installed from FreeBSD
releases and updated with freebsd-update(8).
Choose a server location which is close, for example if
the machine is located in Australia, use
ftp.au.freebsd.org
.
SVN_HOST
The server from where jails are installed and updated when using Subversion. Also used for ports tree when not using portsnap(8). Again, choose a nearby location. A list of official Subversion mirrors can be found in the FreeBSD Handbook Subversion section.
Create the base jails which Poudriere will use for building:
#
poudriere jail -c -j 93Ramd64 -v 9.3-RELEASE -a amd64
Fetch a 9.3-RELEASE
for
amd64
from the FTP
server given by FREEBSD_HOST
in
poudriere.conf
, create the zfs file
system tank/poudriere/jails/93Ramd64
, mount
it on /poudriere/jails/93Ramd64
and
extract the 9.3-RELEASE
tarballs into this
file system.
#
poudriere jail -c -j 10i386 -v stable/10 -a i386 -m svn+https
Create tank/poudriere/jails/10i386
,
mount it on /poudriere/jails/10i386
, then
check out the tip of the Subversion
branch of FreeBSD-10-STABLE
from
SVN_HOST
in
poudriere.conf
into
/poudriere/jails/10i386/usr/src
, then
complete a buildworld
and install
it into /poudriere/jails/10i386
.
If a specific Subversion revision is needed, append it to the version string. For example:
#
poudriere jail -c -j 10i386 -v stable/10@123456 -a i386 -m svn+https
While it is possible to build a newer version of FreeBSD on
an older version, most of the time it will not run. For
example, if a stable/10
jail is needed,
the host will have to run stable/10
too.
Running 10.0-RELEASE
is not
enough.
The default svn
protocol works but is
not very secure. Using svn+https
along
with verifying the remote server's SSL
fingerprint is advised. It will ensure that the files used
for building the jail are from a trusted source.
A list of jails currently known to
Poudriere can be shown with
poudriere jail -l
:
#
poudriere jail -l
JAILNAME VERSION ARCH METHOD 93Ramd64 9.3-RELEASE amd64 ftp 10i386 10.0-STABLE i386 svn+https
Managing updates is very straightforward. The command:
#
poudriere jail -u -j
JAILNAME
updates the specified jail to the latest version available. For FreeBSD releases, update to the latest patchlevel with freebsd-update(8). For FreeBSD versions built from source, update to the latest Subversion revision in the branch.
For jails employing a
svn+
method,
it is helpful to add *
-J
to speed up the build by increasing the number of parallel
compile jobs used. For example, if the building machine has
6 CPUs, use:NumberOfParallelBuildJobs
#
poudriere jail -u -J 6 -j
JAILNAME
There are multiple ways to use ports trees in Poudriere. The most straightforward way is to have Poudriere create a default ports tree for itself:
#
poudriere ports -c
This command creates
tank/poudriere/ports/default
, mount it on
/poudriere/ports/default
, and populate it
using portsnap(8). Afterward it is included in the list
of known ports trees:
#
poudriere ports -l
PORTSTREE METHOD PATH default portsnap /poudriere/ports/default
Note that the “default” ports tree is
special. Each of the build commands explained later will
implicitly use this ports tree unless specifically specified
otherwise. To use another tree, add -p
to the
commands.treename
While useful for regular bulk builds, having this default ports tree with the portsnap(8) method may not be the best way to deal with local modifications for a ports contributor. As with the creation of jails, it is possible to use a different method for creating the ports tree. To add an additional ports tree for testing local modifications and ports development, checking out the tree via Subversion is possible:
#
poudriere ports -c -m svn+https -p subversive
Creates tank/poudriere/ports/subversive
and mounts it on
/poudriere/ports/subversive
. It is then
populated using Subversion.
Finally, it is added to the list of known ports trees:
#
poudriere ports -l
PORTSTREE METHOD PATH default portsnap /poudriere/ports/default subversive svn+https /poudriere/ports/subversive
The svn
method allows extra
qualifiers to tell Subversion
exactly how to fetch data. This is explained in
poudriere(8). For instance, poudriere ports
-c -m svn+ssh -p subversive
uses
SSH for the checkout.
Depending on the workflow, it can be extremely helpful to
use ports trees which are maintained manually. For instance,
if there is a local copy of the ports tree in
/work/ports
, point
Poudriere to the location:
#
poudriere ports -c -F -f none -M /work/ports -p development
This will be listed in the table of known trees:
#
poudriere ports -l
PORTSTREE METHOD PATH development - /work/ports
The dash in the METHOD
column means
that Poudriere will not update or
change this ports tree, ever. It is completely up to the
user to maintain this tree, including all local
modifications that may be used for testing new ports and
submitting patches.
As straightforward as with jails described earlier:
#
poudriere ports -u -p
PORTSTREE
Will update the given
PORTSTREE
, one tree given by the
output of poudriere -l
, to the latest
revision available on the official servers.
Ports trees without a method, see Section 9.5.6, “Using Manually Managed Ports Trees with Poudriere”, cannot be updated like this. They must be updated manually by the porter.
After jails and ports trees have been set up, the result of a contributor's modifications to the ports tree can be tested.
For example, local modifications to the www/firefox port located in
/work/ports/www/firefox
can be tested in
the previously created 9.3-RELEASE jail:
#
poudriere testport -j 93Ramd64 -p development -o www/firefox
This will build all dependencies of Firefox. If a dependency has been built previously and is still up-to-date, the pre-built package is installed. If a dependency has no up-to-date package, one will be built with default options in a jail. Then Firefox itself is built.
The complete build of every port is logged to
/poudriere/data/logs/bulk/93Ri386-development/
.build-time
/logs
The directory name 93Ri386-development
is derived from the arguments to -j
and
-p
, respectively. For convenience, a
symbolic link
/poudriere/data/logs/bulk/93Ri386-development/latest
is also maintained. The link points to the latest
build-time
directory. Also in this
directory is an index.html
for observing
the build process with a web browser.
By default, Poudriere cleans up
the jails and leaves log files in the directories mentioned
above. To ease investigation, jails can be kept running after
the build by adding -i
to
testport
:
#
poudriere testport -j 93Ramd64 -p development -i -o www/firefox
After the build completes, and regardless of whether it
was successful, a shell is provided within the jail. The
shell is used to investigate further.
Poudriere can be told to leave the
jail running after the build finishes with
-I
. Poudriere
will show the command to run when the jail is no longer
needed. It is then possible to jexec(8) into it:
#
poudriere testport -j 93Ramd64 -p development -I -o www/firefox
[...] ====>> Installing local Pkg repository to /usr/local/etc/pkg/repos ====>> Leaving jail 93Ramd64-development-n running, mounted at /poudriere/data/.m/93Ramd64-development/ref for interactive run testing ====>> To enter jail: jexec 93Ramd64-development-n env -i TERM=$TERM /usr/bin/login -fp root ====>> To stop jail: poudriere jail -k -j 93Ramd64 -p development#
jexec 93Ramd64-development-n env -i TERM=$TERM /usr/bin/login -fp root
#
[do some stuff in the jail]
#
exit
#
poudriere jail -k -j 93Ramd64 -p development
====>> Umounting file systems
An integral part of the FreeBSD ports build infrastructure is
the ability to tweak ports to personal preferences with
options. These can be tested with
Poudriere as well. Adding the
-c
:
#
poudriere testport -c -o www/firefox
Presents the port configuration dialog before the port is
built. The ports given after -o
in the
format
will use the specified options, all dependencies will use the
default options. Testing dependent ports with non-default
options can be accomplished using sets, see Section 9.5.9, “Using Sets”.category
/portname
When testing ports where pkg-plist
is altered during build depending on the selected options,
it is recommended to perform a test run with all options
selected and one with all options
deselected.
For all actions involving builds, a so-called
set can be specified using -z
. A set refers
to a fully independent build. This allows, for instance,
usage of setname
testport
with non-standard options
for the dependent ports.
To use sets, Poudriere expects
an existing directory structure similar to
PORT_DBDIR
, defaults to
/var/db/ports
in its configuration
directory. This directory is then nullfs-mounted into the
jails where the ports and their dependencies are built.
Usually a suitable starting point can be obtained by
recursively copying the existing PORT_DBDIR
to
/usr/local/etc/poudriere.d/
.
This is described in detail in poudriere(8). For
instance, testing www/firefox
in a specific set named jailname
-portname
-setname
-optionsdevset
, add the
-z devset
parameter to the testport
command:
#
poudriere testport -j 93Ramd64 -p development -z devset -o www/firefox
This will look for the existence of these directories in this order:
/usr/local/etc/poudriere.d/93Ramd64-development-devset-options
/usr/local/etc/poudriere.d/93Ramd64-devset-options
/usr/local/etc/poudriere.d/93Ramd64-development-options
/usr/local/etc/poudriere.d/devset-options
/usr/local/etc/poudriere.d/development-options
/usr/local/etc/poudriere.d/93Ramd64-options
/usr/local/etc/poudriere.d/options
From this list, Poudriere
nullfs-mounts the first existing
directory tree into the /var/db/ports
directory of the build jails. Hence, all custom options are
used for all the ports during this run of
testport
.
After the directory structure for a set is provided, the options for a particular port can be altered. For example:
#
poudriere options -c www/firefox -z devset
The configuration dialog for www/firefox is shown, and options can
be edited. The selected options are saved to the
devset
set.
Poudriere is very flexible in the option configuration. They can be set for particular jails, ports trees, and for multiple ports by one command. Refer to poudriere(8) for details.
Similar to using sets,
Poudriere will also use a custom
make.conf
if it is provided. No special
command line argument is necessary. Instead,
Poudriere looks for existing files
matching a name scheme derived from the command line. For
instance:
#
poudriere testport -j 93Ramd64 -p development -z devset -o www/firefox
causes Poudriere to check for the existence of these files in this order:
/usr/local/etc/poudriere.d/make.conf
/usr/local/etc/poudriere.d/devset-make.conf
/usr/local/etc/poudriere.d/development-make.conf
/usr/local/etc/poudriere.d/93Ramd64-make.conf
/usr/local/etc/poudriere.d/93Ramd64-development-make.conf
/usr/local/etc/poudriere.d/93Ramd64-devset-make.conf
/usr/local/etc/poudriere.d/93Ramd64-development-devset-make.conf
Unlike with sets, all of the found files will be appended,
in that order, into one
make.conf
inside the build jails. It is
hence possible to have general make variables, intended to
affect all builds in
/usr/local/etc/poudriere.d/make.conf
.
Special variables, intended to affect only certain jails or
sets can be set in specialised make.conf
files, such as
/usr/local/etc/poudriere.d/93Ramd64-development-devset-make.conf
.
make.conf
to Change Default
PerlTo build a set with a non default
Perl version, for example,
5.20
, using a set named
perl5-20
, create a
perl5-20-make.conf
with this
line:
DEFAULT_VERSIONS+= perl=5.20
Note the use of +=
so that if the
variable is already set in the default
make.conf
its content will not be
overwritten.
Poudriere comes with a built-in mechanism to remove outdated distfiles that are no longer used by any port of a given tree. The command
#
poudriere distclean -p
portstree
will scan the distfiles folder,
DISTFILES_CACHE
in
poudriere.conf
, versus the ports tree
given by the -p
argument and
prompt for removal of those distfiles. To skip the prompt and
remove all unused files unconditionally, the
portstree
-y
argument can be added:
#
poudriere distclean -p
portstree
-y
As an avid ports contributor, take a look at Tinderbox. It is a powerful system for building and testing ports. Install Tinderbox using ports-mgmt/tinderbox port. Be sure to read supplied documentation since the configuration is not trivial.
Visit the Tinderbox website for more details.
When a port is not the most recent version available from the
authors, update the local working copy of
/usr/ports
. The port might have already been
updated to the new version.
When working with more than a few ports, it will probably be easier to use Subversion to keep the whole ports collection up-to-date, as described in the Handbook. This will have the added benefit of tracking all the port's dependencies.
The next step is to see if there is an update already pending.
To do this, there are two options. There is a searchable interface
to the FreeBSD
Problem Report (PR) or bug database.
Select Ports Tree
in
the Product
dropdown, and enter the name of the port in the
Summary
field.
However, sometimes people forget to put the name of the port
into the Summary field in an unambiguous fashion. In that
case, try searching in the Comment
field in
the Detailled Bug Information
section, or try
the
FreeBSD Ports Monitoring System
(also known as portsmon
). This system
attempts to classify port PRs by portname. To search for PRs
about a particular port, use the Overview
of One Port.
If there is no pending PR, the next step is to send an email
to the port's maintainer, as shown by
make maintainer
. That person may already be
working on an upgrade, or have a reason to not upgrade the port
right now (because of, for example, stability problems of the
new version), and there is no need to duplicate their work. Note
that unmaintained ports are listed with a maintainer of
[email protected]
, which is just the general
ports mailing list, so sending mail there probably will not help
in this case.
If the maintainer asks you to do the upgrade or there is no maintainer, then help out FreeBSD by preparing the update! Please do this by using the diff(1) command in the base system.
To create a suitable diff
for a single
patch, copy the file that needs patching to
, save the changes to
something
.orig
and then create the
patch:something
%
diff -u
something
.origsomething
> something.diff
Otherwise, either use the
svn diff
method (Section 10.1, “Using Subversion to Make
Patches”)
or copy the contents of the port to an entire different
directory and use the result of the recursive diff(1)
output of the new and old ports directories (for example, if the
modified port directory is called superedit
and the original is in our tree as
superedit.bak
, then save the result of
diff -ruN superedit.bak superedit
). Either
unified or context diff is fine, but port committers generally
prefer unified diffs. Note the use of the -N
option—this is the accepted way to force diff to properly
deal with the case of new files being added or old files being
deleted. Before sending us the diff, please examine the output
to make sure all the changes make sense. (In particular, make
sure to first clean out the work directories with
make clean
).
If some files have been added, copied, moved, or removed, add this information to the problem report so that the committer picking up the patch will know what svn(1) commands to run.
To simplify common operations with patch files, use
make makepatch
as described in Section 4.4, “Patching”.
Other tools exists, like
/usr/ports/Tools/scripts/patchtool.py
.
Before using it, please read
/usr/ports/Tools/scripts/README.patchtool
.
If the port is unmaintained, and you are actively using it, please consider volunteering to become its maintainer. FreeBSD has over 4000 ports without maintainers, and this is an area where more volunteers are always needed. (For a detailed description of the responsibilities of maintainers, refer to the section in the Developer's Handbook.)
To submit the diff, use the bug submit
form (category Ports Tree
). If the
submitter is also
maintaining the port, be sure to put [maintainer
update]
at the beginning of the
Summary
line.
Please mention any added or
deleted files in the message, as they have to be explicitly
specified to svn(1) when doing a commit. Do not compress or
encode the diff.
Before submitting the bug, review the Writing the problem report section in the Problem Reports article. It contains far more information about how to write useful problem reports.
If the upgrade is motivated by security concerns or a
serious fault in the currently committed port, please notify
the Ports Management Team <[email protected]>
to request immediate rebuilding and
redistribution of the port's package. Unsuspecting users
of pkg
will otherwise continue to install
the old version via pkg install
for several
weeks.
Once again, please use diff(1) and not shar(1) to send updates to existing ports! This helps ports committers understand exactly what is being changed.
Now that all of that is done, read about how to keep up-to-date in Chapter 14, Keeping Up.
When possible, please submit a svn(1) diff. They
are easier to handle than diffs between
“new and old” directories. It is easier
to see what has changed, and to update the diff if
something was modified in the Ports Collection since the
work on it began, or if the
committer asks for something to be fixed. Also, a patch
generated with svn diff
can be easily applied
with svn patch
and will save some time to the
committer.
%
cd ~/my_wrkdir
%
svn co
https://svn0.us-west.FreeBSD.org
/ports/head/dns/pdnsd%
cd ~/my_wrkdir/pdnsd
This can be anywhere, of course. Building
ports is not limited to within
| |
svn0.us-west.FreeBSD.org is a public Subversion server. Select the closest mirror and verify the mirror server certificate from the list of Subversion mirror sites. |
While in the port directory, make any changes that are
needed. If adding, copying, moving, or removing a
file, use svn
to track these changes:
%
svn add
new_file
%
svn copy
some_file
file_copy
%
svn move
old_name
new_name
%
svn remove
deleted_file
Make sure to check the port using the checklist in
Section 3.4, “Testing the Port” and
Section 3.5, “Checking the Port with
portlint
”.
%
svn status
%
svn update
This will attempt to merge the differences between the patch and current repository version. Watch the output carefully. The letter in front of each file name indicates what was done with it. See Table 10.1, “Subversion Update File Prefixes” for a complete list.
U | The file was updated without problems. |
G | The file was updated without problems (only when working against a remote repository). |
M | The file had been modified, and was merged without conflicts. |
C | The file had been modified, and was merged with conflicts. |
If C
is displayed as a result of
svn update
, it means something changed in
the Subversion repository and
svn(1) was not able to merge the local changes with those
from the repository. It is always a good idea to inspect the
changes anyway, since svn(1) does not know anything about
the structure of a port, so it might (and probably will) merge
things that do not make sense.
The last step is to make a unified diff(1) of the changes:
%
svn diff > ../`make -VPKGNAME`.diff
If files have been added, copied, moved, or removed,
include the svn(1) add
,
copy
, move
, and
remove
commands that were used.
svn move
or svn copy
must be run before the patch can be applied. svn
add
or svn remove
must be run
after the patch is applied.
Send the patch following the guidelines in Chapter 10, Upgrading a Port.
The patch can be automatically generated and the PR
pre-filled with the contact information by using
port submit
. See Section 9.3, “Port Tools” for more details.
If upgrading the port requires special steps like changing configuration files or running a specific program, it must be documented in this file. The format of an entry in this file is as follows:
YYYYMMDD: AFFECTS: users of portcategory/portname AUTHOR: Your name <Your email address> Special instructions
When including exact portmaster, portupgrade, and/or pkg instructions, please make sure to get the shell escaping right. For example, do not use:
#
pkg delete -g -f docbook-xml* docbook-sk* docbook[2345]??-* docbook-4*
As shown, the command will only work with bourne shells. Instead, use the form shown below, which will work with both bourne shell and c-shell:
#
pkg delete -g -f docbook-xml\* docbook-sk\* docbook\[2345\]\?\?-\* docbook-4\*
It is recommended that the AFFECTS line contains a glob
matching all the ports affected by the entry so that automated
tools can parse it as easily as possible. If an update
concerns all the existing BIND 9
versions the AFFECTS
content must be
users of dns/bind9*
, it must
not be users of BIND
9
This file is used to
list moved or removed ports. Each line in the file is made
up of the name of the port, where the port was moved, when,
and why. If the port was removed, the section detailing where
it was moved can be left blank. Each section must be
separated by the |
(pipe) character, like
so:
old name|new name (blank for deleted)|date of move|reason
The date must be entered in the form
YYYY-MM-DD
. New entries are added to
the top of the file to keep it in reverse chronological order,
with the last entry first.
If a port was removed but has since been restored, delete the line in this file that states that it was removed.
If a port was renamed and then renamed back to its original name, add a new one with the intermediate name to the old name, and remove the old entry as to not create a loop.
Any changes must be validated with
Tools/scripts/MOVEDlint.awk
.
If using a ports directory other than /usr/ports
, use:
%
cd
/home/user/ports
%
env PORTSDIR=$PWD Tools/scripts/MOVEDlint.awk
Bugs are occasionally introduced to the software. Arguably, the most dangerous of them are those opening security vulnerabilities. From the technical viewpoint, such vulnerabilities are to be closed by exterminating the bugs that caused them. However, the policies for handling mere bugs and security vulnerabilities are very different.
A typical small bug affects only those users who have enabled some combination of options triggering the bug. The developer will eventually release a patch followed by a new version of the software, free of the bug, but the majority of users will not take the trouble of upgrading immediately because the bug has never vexed them. A critical bug that may cause data loss represents a graver issue. Nevertheless, prudent users know that a lot of possible accidents, besides software bugs, are likely to lead to data loss, and so they make backups of important data; in addition, a critical bug will be discovered really soon.
A security vulnerability is all different. First, it may remain unnoticed for years because often it does not cause software malfunction. Second, a malicious party can use it to gain unauthorized access to a vulnerable system, to destroy or alter sensitive data; and in the worst case the user will not even notice the harm caused. Third, exposing a vulnerable system often assists attackers to break into other systems that could not be compromised otherwise. Therefore closing a vulnerability alone is not enough: notify the audience of it in the most clear and comprehensive manner, which will allow them to evaluate the danger and take appropriate action.
While on the subject of ports and packages, a security
vulnerability may initially appear in the original distribution
or in the port files. In the former case, the original software
developer is likely to release a patch or a new version
instantly. Update the port promptly
with respect to the author's fix. If the fix is delayed for
some reason, either
mark the port as
FORBIDDEN
or introduce a patch file
to the port. In the case of a vulnerable port, just
fix the port as soon as possible. In either case, follow
the standard procedure for
submitting changes unless having
rights to commit it directly to the ports tree.
Being a ports committer is not enough to commit to an arbitrary port. Remember that ports usually have maintainers, must be respected.
Please make sure that the port's revision is bumped as soon
as the vulnerability has been closed. That is how the users who
upgrade installed packages on a regular basis will see they need
to run an update. Besides, a new package will be built and
distributed over FTP and WWW mirrors, replacing the vulnerable
one. Bump PORTREVISION
unless
PORTVERSION
has changed in the course of
correcting the vulnerability. That is, bump
PORTREVISION
if adding a patch file
to the port, but do not bump it if updating the port to
the latest software version and thus already touched
PORTVERSION
. Please refer to the
corresponding
section for more information.
A very important and urgent step to take as early after a security vulnerability is discovered as possible is to notify the community of port users about the jeopardy. Such notification serves two purposes. First, if the danger is really severe it will be wise to apply an instant workaround. For example, stop the affected network service or even deinstall the port completely until the vulnerability is closed. Second, a lot of users tend to upgrade installed packages only occasionally. They will know from the notification that they must update the package without delay as soon as a corrected version is available.
Given the huge number of ports in the tree, a security advisory cannot be issued on each incident without creating a flood and losing the attention of the audience when it comes to really serious matters. Therefore security vulnerabilities found in ports are recorded in the FreeBSD VuXML database. The Security Officer Team members also monitor it for issues requiring their intervention.
Committers can update the VuXML database themselves, assisting the Security Officer Team and delivering crucial information to the community more quickly. Those who are not committers or have discovered an exceptionally severe vulnerability should not hesitate to contact the Security Officer Team directly, as described on the FreeBSD Security Information page.
The VuXML database is an XML document.
Its source file vuln.xml
is kept right
inside the port security/vuxml.
Therefore the file's full pathname will be
PORTSDIR/security/vuxml/vuln.xml
. Each
time a security vulnerability is discovered in a port, please
add an entry for it to that file. Until familiar with
VuXML, the best thing to do is to find an existing entry
fitting the case at hand, then copy it and use it as a
template.
The full-blown XML format is complex, and far beyond the scope of this book. However, to gain basic insight on the structure of a VuXML entry only the notion of tags is needed. XML tag names are enclosed in angle brackets. Each opening <tag> must have a matching closing </tag>. Tags may be nested. If nesting, the inner tags must be closed before the outer ones. There is a hierarchy of tags, that is, more complex rules of nesting them. This is similar to HTML. The major difference is that XML is eXtensible, that is, based on defining custom tags. Due to its intrinsic structure XML puts otherwise amorphous data into shape. VuXML is particularly tailored to mark up descriptions of security vulnerabilities.
Now consider a realistic VuXML entry:
<vuln vid="f4bc80f4-da62-11d8-90ea-0004ac98a7b9"> <topic>Several vulnerabilities found in Foo</topic> <affects> <package> <name>foo</name> <name>foo-devel</name> <name>ja-foo</name> <range><ge>1.6</ge><lt>1.9</lt></range> <range><ge>2.*</ge><lt>2.4_1</lt></range> <range><eq>3.0b1</eq></range> </package> <package> <name>openfoo</name> <range><lt>1.10_7</lt></range> <range><ge>1.2,1</ge><lt>1.3_1,1</lt></range> </package> </affects> <description> <body xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"> <p>J. Random Hacker reports:</p> <blockquote cite="http://j.r.hacker.com/advisories/1"> <p>Several issues in the Foo software may be exploited via carefully crafted QUUX requests. These requests will permit the injection of Bar code, mumble theft, and the readability of the Foo administrator account.</p> </blockquote> </body> </description> <references> <freebsdsa>SA-10:75.foo</freebsdsa> <freebsdpr>ports/987654</freebsdpr> <cvename>CAN-2010-0201</cvename> <cvename>CAN-2010-0466</cvename> <bid>96298</bid> <certsa>CA-2010-99</certsa> <certvu>740169</certvu> <uscertsa>SA10-99A</uscertsa> <uscertta>SA10-99A</uscertta> <mlist msgid="[email protected]">http://marc.theaimsgroup.com/?l=bugtraq&m=203886607825605</mlist> <url>http://j.r.hacker.com/advisories/1</url> </references> <dates> <discovery>2010-05-25</discovery> <entry>2010-07-13</entry> <modified>2010-09-17</modified> </dates> </vuln>
The tag names are supposed to be self-explanatory so we shall take a closer look only at fields which needs to be filled in:
This is the top-level tag of a VuXML entry. It has a
mandatory attribute, | |
This is a one-line description of the issue found. | |
The names of packages affected are listed there. Multiple names can be given since several packages may be based on a single master port or software product. This may include stable and development branches, localized versions, and slave ports featuring different choices of important build-time configuration options. Important:It is the submitter's responsibility to find all such related
packages when writing a VuXML entry. Keep in mind that
| |
Affected versions of the package(s) are specified
there as one or more ranges using a combination of
In a range specification, The above example specifies that affected are versions
from | |
Several related package groups (essentially, ports)
can be listed in the | |
The version ranges have to allow for
| |
This is a summary of the issue. XHTML is used in this
field. At least enclosing | |
This section contains references to relevant documents. As many references as apply are encouraged. | |
This is a FreeBSD security advisory. | |
This is a FreeBSD problem report. | |
This is a MITRE CVE identifier. | |
This is a SecurityFocus Bug ID. | |
This is a US-CERT security advisory. | |
This is a US-CERT vulnerability note. | |
This is a US-CERT Cyber Security Alert. | |
This is a US-CERT Technical Cyber Security Alert. | |
This is a URL to an archived posting in a mailing
list. The attribute | |
This is a generic URL. Only it if none of the other reference categories apply. | |
This is the date when the issue was disclosed
( | |
This is the date when the entry was added
( | |
This is the date when any information in the entry was
last modified ( |
This example describes a new entry for a
vulnerability in the package dropbear
that
has been fixed in version dropbear-2013.59
.
As a prerequisite, install a fresh version of security/vuxml port.
First, check whether there already is an entry for this
vulnerability. If there were such an entry, it would match
the previous version of the package,
2013.58
:
%
pkg audit dropbear-2013.58
If there is none found, add a new entry for this vulnerability.
%
cd ${PORTSDIR}/security/vuxml
%
make newentry
Verify its syntax and formatting:
%
make validate
At least one of these packages needs to be installed: textproc/libxml2, textproc/jade.
Verify that the <affected>
section of the entry will match the correct packages:
%
pkg audit -f ${PORTSDIR}/security/vuxml/vuln.xml dropbear-2013.58
Make sure that the entry produces no spurious matches in the output.
Now check whether the right package versions are matched by the entry:
%
pkg audit -f ${PORTSDIR}/security/vuxml/vuln.xml dropbear-2013.58 dropbear-2013.59
dropbear-2012.58 is vulnerable: dropbear -- exposure of sensitive information, DoS CVE: CVE-2013-4434 CVE: CVE-2013-4421 WWW: http://portaudit.FreeBSD.org/8c9b48d1-3715-11e3-a624-00262d8b701d.html 1 problem(s) in the installed packages found.
The former version matches while the latter one does not.
WRKDIR
WRKDIRPREFIX
bsd.port.mk
exec
Statement in Wrapper
ScriptsCC
and
CXX
CFLAGS
README.html
BROKEN
, FORBIDDEN
, or
IGNORE
DEPRECATED
or
EXPIRATION_DATE
.error
Constructsysctl
Here is a list of common dos and don'ts that are encountered during the porting process. Check the port against this list, but also check ports in the PR database that others have submitted. Submit any comments on ports as described in Bug Reports and General Commentary. Checking ports in the PR database will both make it faster for us to commit them, and prove that you know what you are doing.
Do not write anything to files outside
WRKDIR
. WRKDIR
is the
only place that is guaranteed to be writable during the port
build (see
installing ports from a CDROM for an example of
building ports from a read-only tree). The
pkg-
files can
be modified by redefining a
variable rather than overwriting the file.*
Make sure the port honors WRKDIRPREFIX
.
Most ports do not have to worry about this. In particular, when
referring to a WRKDIR
of another
port, note that the correct location is
WRKDIRPREFIXPORTSDIR/
not
subdir
/name
/workPORTSDIR/
or
subdir
/name
/work.CURDIR/../../
or some such.subdir
/name
/work
Also, if defining WRKDIR
,
make sure to prepend
${WRKDIRPREFIX}${.CURDIR}
in
the front.
Some code needs modifications or
conditional compilation based upon what version of FreeBSD Unix it
is running under. The preferred way to tell FreeBSD versions apart
are the __FreeBSD_version
and
__FreeBSD__
macros defined in sys/param.h.
If this file is not included add the code,
#include <sys/param.h>
to the proper place in the .c
file.
__FreeBSD__
is defined in all versions
of FreeBSD as their major version number. For example, in FreeBSD
9.x, __FreeBSD__
is defined to be
9
.
#if __FreeBSD__ >= 9 # if __FreeBSD_version >= 901000 /* 9.1+ release specific code here */ # endif #endif
A complete list of __FreeBSD_version
values is available in Chapter 16, __FreeBSD_version
Values.
Do not write anything after the
.include <bsd.port.mk>
line. It
usually can be avoided by including
bsd.port.pre.mk
somewhere in the middle of
the Makefile
and
bsd.port.post.mk
at the end.
Include either the
bsd.port.pre.mk
/bsd.port.post.mk
pair or bsd.port.mk
only; do not mix
these two usages.
bsd.port.pre.mk
only defines a few
variables, which can be used in tests in the
Makefile
,
bsd.port.post.mk
defines the rest.
Here are some important variables defined in
bsd.port.pre.mk
(this is not the complete
list, please read bsd.port.mk
for the
complete list).
Variable | Description |
---|---|
ARCH | The architecture as returned by uname
-m (for example, i386 ) |
OPSYS | The operating system type, as returned by
uname -s (for example,
FreeBSD ) |
OSREL | The release version of the operating system
(for example, 2.1.5 or
2.2.7 ) |
OSVERSION | The numeric version of the operating system; the
same as __FreeBSD_version . |
LOCALBASE | The base of the “local” tree (for example,
/usr/local ) |
PREFIX | Where the port installs itself (see
more on
PREFIX ). |
When MASTERDIR
is needed, always define
it before including
bsd.port.pre.mk
.
Here are some examples of things that can be added after
bsd.port.pre.mk
:
# no need to compile lang/perl5 if perl5 is already in system .if ${OSVERSION} > 300003 BROKEN= perl is in system .endif
Always use tab instead of spaces after
BROKEN=
.
If the port installs a shell script whose purpose is to
launch another program, and if launching that program is the
last action performed by the script, make sure to launch the
program using the exec
statement, for
instance:
#!/bin/sh exec %%LOCALBASE%%/bin/java -jar %%DATADIR%%/foo.jar "$@"
The exec
statement replaces the shell
process with the specified program. If
exec
is omitted, the shell process remains
in memory while the program is executing, and needlessly
consumes system resources.
The Makefile
should do things in a
simple and reasonable manner. Making it a couple of lines shorter or
more readable is always better. Examples include using a make
.if
construct instead of a shell
if
construct, not redefining
do-extract
if redefining
EXTRACT*
is enough, and using
GNU_CONFIGURE
instead of
CONFIGURE_ARGS
+= --prefix=${PREFIX}
.
If a lot of new code is needed to do something, there may
already be an implementation of it in
bsd.port.mk
. While
hard to read, there are a great many seemingly-hard problems for
which bsd.port.mk
already provides a
shorthand solution.
The port must respect both CC
and
CXX
. What we mean by this is that
the port must not set the values of these variables absolutely,
overriding existing values; instead, it may append whatever
values it needs to the existing values. This is so that build
options that affect all ports can be set globally.
If the port does not respect these variables,
please add
NO_PACKAGE=ignores either cc or cxx
to the
Makefile
.
Here is an example of a Makefile
respecting
both CC
and CXX
.
Note the ?=
:
CC?= gcc
CXX?= g++
Here is an example which respects neither
CC
nor CXX
:
CC= gcc
CXX= g++
Both CC
and CXX
can be defined on FreeBSD systems in
/etc/make.conf
. The first example defines
a value if it was not previously set in
/etc/make.conf
, preserving any system-wide
definitions. The second example clobbers anything previously
defined.
The port must respect CFLAGS
.
What we mean by this is that the port must not set
the value of this variable absolutely, overriding the existing
value. Instead, it may append whatever values it needs to the
existing value. This is so that build options that affect all
ports can be set globally.
If it does not, please add
NO_PACKAGE=ignores cflags
to the
Makefile
.
Here is an example of a Makefile
respecting
CFLAGS
. Note the
+=
:
CFLAGS+= -Wall -Werror
Here is an example which does not respect
CFLAGS
:
CFLAGS= -Wall -Werror
CFLAGS
is defined on
FreeBSD systems in /etc/make.conf
. The first
example appends additional flags to
CFLAGS
, preserving any system-wide
definitions. The second example clobbers anything previously
defined.
Remove optimization flags from the third party
Makefile
s. The system
CFLAGS
contains system-wide optimization
flags. An example from an unmodified
Makefile
:
CFLAGS= -O3 -funroll-loops -DHAVE_SOUND
Using system optimization flags, the
Makefile
would look similar to this
example:
CFLAGS+= -DHAVE_SOUND
Do send applicable changes and patches to the upstream maintainer for inclusion in the next release of the code. This makes updating to the next release that much easier.
README.html
is not part of the port,
but generated by make readme
. Do not
include this file in patches or commits.
If make readme
fails, make sure that
the default value of ECHO_MSG
has not
been modified by the port.
Ports that do not have any architecture-dependent files
or requirements are identified by setting
NO_ARCH=yes
.
In certain cases, users must be prevented from installing
a port. There are several variables that can be used in a
port's Makefile
to tell the user that the
port cannot be installed. The value of
these make variables will be the
reason that is shown to users for why the port refuses to
install itself. Please use the correct make
variable. Each variable conveys radically different
meanings, both to users and to automated systems that depend on
Makefile
s, such as
the ports build cluster,
FreshPorts, and
portsmon.
BROKEN
is reserved for ports that
currently do not compile, install, deinstall, or run
correctly. Use it for ports where the problem
is believed to be temporary.
If instructed, the build cluster will still attempt to try to build them to see if the underlying problem has been resolved. (However, in general, the cluster is run without this.)
For instance, use BROKEN
when a
port:
does not compile
fails its configuration or installation process
installs files outside of
${PREFIX}
does not remove all its files cleanly upon deinstall (however, it may be acceptable, and desirable, for the port to leave user-modified files behind)
has runtime issues on systems where it is supposed to run fine.
FORBIDDEN
is used for ports that
contain a security vulnerability or induce grave concern
regarding the security of a FreeBSD system with a given port
installed (for example, a reputably insecure program or a program
that provides easily exploitable services). Mark ports
as FORBIDDEN
as soon as a
particular piece of software has a vulnerability and there
is no released upgrade. Ideally upgrade ports
as soon as possible when a security vulnerability is
discovered so as to reduce the number of vulnerable FreeBSD
hosts (we like being known for being secure), however
sometimes there is a noticeable time gap between
disclosure of a vulnerability and an updated release of
the vulnerable software. Do not mark a port
FORBIDDEN
for any reason other than
security.
IGNORE
is reserved for ports that
must not be built for some other reason. Use it
for ports where the problem is believed to be
structural. The build cluster will not, under any
circumstances, build ports marked as
IGNORE
. For instance, use
IGNORE
when a port:
does not work on the installed version of FreeBSD
has a distfile which may not be automatically fetched due to licensing restrictions
does not work with some other currently installed port (for instance, the port depends on www/apache20 but www/apache22 is installed)
If a port would conflict with a currently
installed port (for example, if they install a file in
the same place that performs a different function),
use
CONFLICTS
instead.
CONFLICTS
will set
IGNORE
by itself.
To mark a port as IGNORE
d
only on certain architectures, there are two other
convenience variables that will automatically set
IGNORE
:
ONLY_FOR_ARCHS
and
NOT_FOR_ARCHS
. Examples:
ONLY_FOR_ARCHS= i386 amd64
NOT_FOR_ARCHS= ia64 sparc64
A custom IGNORE
message can be
set using ONLY_FOR_ARCHS_REASON
and
NOT_FOR_ARCHS_REASON
. Per
architecture entries are possible with
ONLY_FOR_ARCHS_REASON_
and
ARCH
NOT_FOR_ARCHS_REASON_
.ARCH
If a port fetches i386 binaries and installs them,
set IA32_BINARY_PORT
. If this variable
is set, /usr/lib32
must be present
for IA32 versions of libraries and the kernel must support
IA32 compatibility. If one of these two
dependencies is not satisfied, IGNORE
will be set automatically.
Do not quote the values of BROKEN
,
IGNORE
, and related variables. Due to the
way the information is shown to the user, the wording of
messages for each variable differ:
BROKEN= fails to link with base -lcrypto
IGNORE= unsupported on recent versions
resulting in this output from
make describe
:
===> foobar-0.1 is marked as broken: fails to link with base -lcrypto.
===> foobar-0.1 is unsupported on recent versions.
Do remember that BROKEN
and
FORBIDDEN
are to be used as a temporary
resort if a port is not working. Permanently broken ports
will be removed from the tree entirely.
When it makes sense to do so, users can be warned about
a pending port removal with DEPRECATED
and
EXPIRATION_DATE
. The former is a
string stating why the port is scheduled for removal; the latter
is a string in ISO 8601 format (YYYY-MM-DD). Both will be shown
to the user.
It is possible to set DEPRECATED
without an EXPIRATION_DATE
(for instance,
recommending a newer version of the port), but the converse
does not make any sense.
There is no set policy on how much notice to give. Current practice seems to be one month for security-related issues and two months for build issues. This also gives any interested committers a little time to fix the problems.
The correct way for a Makefile
to
signal that the port cannot be installed due to some external
factor (for instance, the user has specified an illegal
combination of build options) is to set a non-blank value to
IGNORE
. This value will be formatted and
shown to the user by make install
.
It is a common mistake to use .error
for this purpose. The problem with this is that many automated
tools that work with the ports tree will fail in this situation.
The most common occurrence of this is seen when trying to build
/usr/ports/INDEX
(see
Section 9.1, “Running make describe
”). However, even more trivial
commands such as make maintainer
also fail in
this scenario. This is not acceptable.
.error
The first of the
next two Makefile
snippets will cause
make index
to fail, while the second one
will not:
.error "option is not supported"
IGNORE=option is not supported
The usage of sysctl
is discouraged
except in targets. This is because the evaluation of any
makevar
s, such as used during
make index
, then has to run the command,
further slowing down that process.
Only use sysctl(8) through
SYSCTL
, as it contains the fully
qualified path and can be overridden, if one has such a
special need.
Sometimes the authors of software change the content of released distfiles without changing the file's name. Verify that the changes are official and have been performed by the author. It has happened in the past that the distfile was silently altered on the download servers with the intent to cause harm or compromise end user security.
Put the old distfile aside, download the new one, unpack
them and compare the content with diff(1). If there is
nothing suspicious, update
distinfo
. Be sure to summarize the
differences in the PR or commit log, so that other people know
that nothing bad has
happened.
Contact the authors of the software and confirm the changes with them.
Do not use /proc
if there are any
other ways of getting the information. For example,
setprogname(argv[0])
in
main()
and then getprogname(3)
to know the executable name>.
Do not rely on behavior that is undocumented by POSIX.
Do not record timestamps in the critical path of the application if it also works without. Getting timestamps may be slow, depending on the accuracy of timestamps in the OS. If timestamps are really needed, determine how precise they have to be and use an API which is documented to just deliver the needed precision.
A number of simple syscalls (for example gettimeofday(2), getpid(2)) are much faster on Linux® than on any other operating system due to caching and the vsyscall performance optimizations. Do not rely on them being cheap in performance-critical applications. In general, try hard to avoid syscalls if possible.
Do not rely on Linux®-specific socket behaviour. In
particular, default socket buffer sizes are different (call
setsockopt(2) with SO_SNDBUF
and
SO_RCVBUF
, and while Linux®'s send(2)
blocks when the socket buffer is full, FreeBSD's will fail and
set ENOBUFS
in errno.
If relying on non-standard behaviour is required, encapsulate it properly into a generic API, do a check for the behaviour in the configure stage, and stop if it is missing.
Check the man pages to see if the function used is a POSIX interface (in the “STANDARDS” section of the man page).
Do not assume that /bin/sh
is
bash. Ensure that a command line
passed to system(3) will work with a
POSIX compliant shell.
A list of common bashisms is available here.
Check that headers are included in the
POSIX or man page recommended way. For example,
sys/types.h
is often forgotten, which is
not as much of a problem for Linux® as it is for FreeBSD.
Here is a sample Makefile
that can be
used to create a new port. Make sure to remove all the extra
comments (ones between brackets).
The format shown is the recommended one for ordering
variables, empty lines between sections, and so on. This format is
designed so that the most important information is easy to locate.
We recommend using
portlint to check the
Makefile
.
[the header...just to make it easier for us to identify the ports.] # Created by: Satoshi Asami <[email protected]> [The optional Created by: line names the person who originally created the port. Note that the “:” is followed by a space and not a tab character. If this line is present, future maintainers must not change or remove it except at the original author's request.] # $FreeBSD$ [ ^^^^^^^^^ This will be automatically replaced with RCS ID string by SVN when it is committed to our repository. If upgrading a port, do not alter this line back to "$FreeBSD$". SVN deals with it automatically.] [section to describe the port itself and the master site - PORTNAME and PORTVERSION are always first, followed by CATEGORIES, and then MASTER_SITES, which can be followed by MASTER_SITE_SUBDIR. PKGNAMEPREFIX and PKGNAMESUFFIX, if needed, will be after that. Then comes DISTNAME, EXTRACT_SUFX and/or DISTFILES, and then EXTRACT_ONLY, as necessary.] PORTNAME= xdvi PORTVERSION= 18.2 CATEGORIES= print [do not forget the trailing slash ("/")! if not using MASTER_SITE_* macros] MASTER_SITES= ${MASTER_SITE_XCONTRIB} MASTER_SITE_SUBDIR= applications PKGNAMEPREFIX= ja- DISTNAME= xdvi-pl18 [set this if the source is not in the standard ".tar.gz" form] EXTRACT_SUFX= .tar.Z [section for distributed patches -- can be empty] PATCH_SITES= ftp://ftp.sra.co.jp/pub/X11/japanese/ PATCHFILES= xdvi-18.patch1.gz xdvi-18.patch2.gz [maintainer; *mandatory*! This is the person who is volunteering to handle port updates, build breakages, and to whom a users can direct questions and bug reports. To keep the quality of the Ports Collection as high as possible, we no longer accept new ports that are assigned to "[email protected]".] MAINTAINER= [email protected] COMMENT= DVI Previewer for the X Window System [dependencies -- can be empty] RUN_DEPENDS= gs:${PORTSDIR}/print/ghostscript [this section is for other standard bsd.port.mk variables that do not belong to any of the above] [If it asks questions during configure, build, install...] IS_INTERACTIVE= yes [If it extracts to a directory other than ${DISTNAME}...] WRKSRC= ${WRKDIR}/xdvi-new [If the distributed patches were not made relative to ${WRKSRC}, this may need to be tweaked] PATCH_DIST_STRIP= -p1 [If it requires a "configure" script generated by GNU autoconf to be run] GNU_CONFIGURE= yes [If it requires GNU make, not /usr/bin/make, to build...] USES= gmake [If it is an X application and requires "xmkmf -a" to be run...] USES= imake [et cetera.] [non-standard variables to be used in the rules below] MY_FAVORITE_RESPONSE= "yeah, right" [then the special rules, in the order they are called] pre-fetch: i go fetch something, yeah post-patch: i need to do something after patch, great pre-install: and then some more stuff before installing, wow [and then the epilogue] .include <bsd.port.mk>
The FreeBSD Ports Collection is constantly changing. Here is some information on how to keep up.
One of the easiest ways to learn about updates that have already been committed is by subscribing to FreshPorts. Multiple ports can be monitored. Maintainers are strongly encouraged to subscribe, because they will receive notification of not only their own changes, but also any changes that any other FreeBSD committer has made. (These are often necessary to keep up with changes in the underlying ports framework—although it would be most polite to receive an advance heads-up from those committing such changes, sometimes this is overlooked or impractical. Also, in some cases, the changes are very minor in nature. We expect everyone to use their best judgement in these cases.)
To use FreshPorts, an account is required. Those with
registered email addresses at @FreeBSD.org
will see the opt-in link on the right-hand side of the web
pages. Those who already have a FreshPorts account but are not
using a @FreeBSD.org
email address can change
the email to @FreeBSD.org
, subscribe, then
change it back again.
FreshPorts also has a sanity test feature which automatically tests each commit to the FreeBSD ports tree. If subscribed to this service, a committer will receive notifications of any errors which FreshPorts detects during sanity testing of their commits.
It is possible to browse the files in the source repository by using a web interface. Changes that affect the entire port system are now documented in the CHANGES file. Changes that affect individual ports are now documented in the UPDATING file. However, the definitive answer to any question is undoubtedly to read the source code of bsd.port.mk, and associated files.
As a ports maintainer, consider subscribing to
FreeBSD ports mailing list. Important changes to the way ports work will be
announced there, and then committed to
CHANGES
.
If the volume of messages on this mailing list is too high, consider following FreeBSD ports announce mailing list which contains only announcements.
One of the least-publicized strengths of FreeBSD is that an entire cluster of machines is dedicated to continually building the Ports Collection, for each of the major OS releases and for each Tier-1 architecture.
Individual ports are built unless they are specifically
marked with IGNORE
. Ports that are marked
with BROKEN
will still be attempted, to see
if the underlying problem has been resolved. (This is done by
passing TRYBROKEN
to the port's
Makefile
.)
The build cluster is dedicated to building the latest release of each port with distfiles that have already been fetched. However, as the Internet continually changes, distfiles can quickly go missing. Portscout, the FreeBSD Ports distfile scanner, attempts to query every download site for every port to find out if each distfile is still available. Portscout can generate HTML reports and send emails about newly available ports to those who request them. Unless not otherwise subscribed, maintainers are asked to check periodically for changes, either by hand or using the RSS feed.
Portscout's first page gives the email address of the port maintainer, the number of ports the maintainer is responsible for, the number of those ports with new distfiles, and the percentage of those ports that are out-of-date. The search function allows for searching by email address for a specific maintainer, and for selecting whether only out-of-date ports are shown.
Upon clicking on a maintainer's email address, a list of all of their ports is displayed, along with port category, current version number, whether or not there is a new version, when the port was last updated, and finally when it was last checked. A search function on this page allows the user to search for a specific port.
Clicking on a port name in the list displays the FreshPorts port information.
Another handy resource is the FreeBSD Ports
Monitoring System (also known as
portsmon
). This system comprises a database
that processes information from several sources and allows it to
be browsed via a web interface. Currently, the ports Problem
Reports (PRs), the error logs from the build cluster, and
individual files from the ports collection are used. In the
future, this will be expanded to include the distfile survey, as
well as other sources.
To get started, use the Overview of One Port search page to find all the information about a port.
This is the only resource available that
maps PR entries to portnames. PR submitters do not
always include the portname in their Synopsis, although we would
prefer that they did. So, portsmon
is a
good place to find out whether an existing
port has any PRs filed against it, any build errors, or
if a new port the porter is considering
creating has already been submitted.
USES
Feature | Arguments | Description |
---|---|---|
ada | (none), 47 , 49 ,
5 | Depends on an Ada-capable
compiler, and sets CC accordingly.
Defaults to a gcc 4.9 based
compiler, use :47 to use the older
gcc 4.7 based one and
:5 to use the newer
gcc 5 based one. |
autoreconf | (none), build | Runs autoreconf . It encapsulates
the aclocal ,
autoconf ,
autoheader ,
automake , autopoint ,
and libtoolize commands. Each command
applies to
${CONFIGURE_WRKSRC}/configure.ac or
its old name,
${CONFIGURE_WRKSRC}/configure.in . If
configure.ac defines subdirectories
with their own configure.ac using
AC_CONFIG_SUBDIRS ,
autoreconf will recursively update
those as well. The :build argument
only adds build time dependencies on those tools but does
not run autoreconf . |
blaslapack | (none), atlas ,
netlib (default),
gotoblas ,
openblas | Adds dependencies on Blas / Lapack libraries. |
bison | (none), build ,
run , both | Uses devel/bison
By default, with no arguments or with the
build argument, it implies
bison is a build-time dependency,
run implies a run-time dependency, and
both implies both run-time and
build-time dependencies. |
charsetfix | (none) | Prevents the port from installing
charset.alias . This must be
installed only by
converters/libiconv.
CHARSETFIX_MAKEFILEIN can be set to a
path relative to WRKSRC if
charset.alias is not installed by
${WRKSRC}/Makefile.in . |
cmake | (none), outsource ,
run | Uses CMake for configuring
and building. With the outsource
argument, an out-of-source build will be performed. With
the run argument, a run-time dependency
is registered. For more information see
Section 6.5.4, “Using cmake ”. |
compiler | (none), c++0x ,
c++11-lang ,
gcc-c++11-lib ,
c++11-lib , c11 ,
openmp , nestedfct ,
features | Determines which compiler to use based on any given
wishes. Use c++11-lang if the port
needs a C++11-capable compiler,
gcc-c++11-lib if the port needs the
g++ compiler with a C++11 library, and
c++11-lib if the port also needs a
C++11-ready standard library. If the port needs a
compiler understanding C++0X, C11, OpenMP, or nested
functions, the corresponding parameters can be used. Use
features to request a list of features
supported by the default compiler. After including
bsd.port.pre.mk the port can inspect
the results using these variables:
|
cpe | (none) |
Include Common Platform Enumeration
(CPE) information in package manifest
as a CPE 2.3 formatted string. See the
CPE
specification for details. To add
CPE information to a port, follow these
steps:
|
cran | (none), auto-plist | Uses the Comprehensive R Archive Network. Specify
auto-plist to automatically generate
pkg-plist . |
desktop-file-utils | (none) | Uses
update-desktop-database from
devel/desktop-file-utils.
An extra post-install step will be run without interfering
with any post-install steps already in the port
Makefile . A line with @desktop-file-utils
will be added to the plist. |
desthack | (none) | Changes the behavior of GNU configure to properly
support DESTDIR in case the original
software does not. |
display | (none), ARGS | Set up a virtual display environment. If the
environment variable DISPLAY is not
set, then Xvfb is added as a
build dependency, and CONFIGURE_ENV is
extended with the port number of the currently running
instance of Xvfb. The
ARGS parameter defaults to
install and controls the phase around
which to start and stop the virtual display. |
dos2unix | (none) | The port has files with line endings in
DOS format which need to be converted.
Three variables can be set to control which files will be
converted. The default is to convert
all files, including binaries. See
Section 4.4.3, “Simple Automatic Replacements” for
examples.
|
drupal | 6 , 7 ,
module ,
theme | Automate installation of a port that is a
Drupal
theme or module. Use with the version of Drupal that the
port is expecting. For example,
USES=drupal:6,module says that this
port creates a Drupal 6 module. A Drupal 7 theme can be
specified with
USES=drupal:7,theme . |
execinfo | (none) | Add a library dependency on devel/libexecinfo if
libexecinfo.so is not present in the
base system. |
fakeroot | (none) | Changes some default behaviour of build systems to
allow installing as a user. See http://fakeroot.alioth.debian.org/ for
more information on fakeroot . |
fam | (none), fam, gamin | Uses a File Alteration Monitor as a library dependency, either devel/fam or devel/gamin. End users can set WITH_FAM_SYSTEM to specify their preference. |
fmake | (none) | Uses devel/fmake as a build-time dependency. |
fonts | (none) | Adds a runtime dependency on tools needed to register
fonts, and add an @fcfontsdir
${FONTSDIR} entry to the plist.
FONTSDIR defaults to
${PREFIX}/lib/X11/fonts/${FONTNAME}
and FONTNAME to
${PORTNAME} . |
fortran | gcc (default),
ifort | Uses the Fortran compiler from either GNU or Intel. |
fuse | (none) | The port will depend on the FUSE library and handle the dependency on the kernel module depending on the version of FreeBSD. |
gecko | libxul (default),
firefox , seamonkey ,
thunderbird , build ,
,
| Add a dependency on different
gecko based applications. If
libxul is used, it is the only argument
allowed. When the argument is not
libxul , the firefox ,
seamonkey , or
thunderbird arguments can be used,
along with optional build and
/
version
arguments. |
gettext | (none) | Deprecated. Will include both gettext-runtime
and gettext-tools . |
gettext-runtime | (none), lib (default),
build , run | Uses devel/gettext-runtime. By
default, with no arguments or with the
lib argument, implies a library
dependency on libintl.so .
build and run
implies, respectively a build-time and a run-time
dependency on gettext . |
gettext-tools | (none), build (default),
run | Uses devel/gettext-tools. By default,
with no argument, or with the build
argument, a build time dependency on
msgfmt is registered. With the
run argument, a run-time dependency is
registered. |
gmake | (none), lite | Uses devel/gmake, or
devel/gmake-lite if the
lite argument is used, as a
build-time dependency and sets up the environment to use
gmake as the default
make for the build. |
gperf | (none) | Add a buildtime dependency on devel/gperf if
gperf is not present in the base
system. |
gssapi | (none), base (default),
heimdal , mit ,
flags ,
bootstrap |
Handle dependencies needed by consumers of the
GSS-API. Only libraries that provide
the Kerberos mechanism are
available. By default, or set to
When the local Kerberos
installation is not in These variables are exported for the ports to use:
The The Example 15.1. Typical Use OPTIONS_SINGLE= GSSAPI OPTIONS_SINGLE_GSSAPI= GSSAPI_BASE GSSAPI_HEIMDAL GSSAPI_MIT GSSAPI_NONE GSSAPI_BASE_USES= gssapi GSSAPI_BASE_CONFIGURE_ON= --with-gssapi=${GSSAPIBASEDIR} ${GSSAPI_CONFIGURE_ARGS} GSSAPI_HEIMDAL_USES= gssapi:heimdal GSSAPI_HEIMDAL_CONFIGURE_ON= --with-gssapi=${GSSAPIBASEDIR} ${GSSAPI_CONFIGURE_ARGS} GSSAPI_MIT_USES= gssapi:mit GSSAPI_MIT_CONFIGURE_ON= --with-gssapi=${GSSAPIBASEDIR} ${GSSAPI_CONFIGURE_ARGS} GSSAPI_NONE_CONFIGURE_ON= --without-gssapi |
horde | (none) | Add buildtime and runtime dependencies on devel/pear-channel-horde. Other
Horde dependencies can be added
with USE_HORDE_BUILD and
USE_HORDE_RUN . See Section 6.14.4.1, “Horde Modules” for more information. |
iconv | (none), lib ,
build ,
patch , translit ,
wchar_t | Uses iconv functions, either from
the port
converters/libiconv as a
build-time and run-time dependency, or from the base
system on 10-CURRENT after a native
iconv was committed in
254273. By default, with no
arguments or with the lib argument,
implies iconv with build-time and
run-time dependencies. build implies a
build-time dependency, and patch
implies a patch-time dependency. If the port uses the
WCHAR_T or
//TRANSLIT iconv extensions, add the
relevant arguments so that the correct iconv is used. For
more information see
Section 6.22, “Using iconv ”. |
imake | (none), env ,
notall ,
noman | Add devel/imake as a
build-time dependency and run xmkmf -a
during the configure stage. If
the env argument is given, the
configure target is not set.
If the -a flag is a problem for the port,
add the notall argument. If
xmkmf does not generate a
install.man target, add the
noman argument. |
kmod | (none) | Fills in the boilerplate for kernel module ports,
currently:
|
lha | (none) | Set EXTRACT_SUFX to
.lzh |
libtool | (none), keepla ,
build | Patches libtool scripts. This
must be added to all ports that use
libtool . The keepla
argument can be used to keep .la
files. Some ports do not ship with their own copy of
libtool and need a build time dependency on devel/libtool, use the
:build argument to add such
dependency. |
lua | (none),
,
,
build ,
run | Adds a dependency on Lua.
By default this is a library dependency, unless
overridden by the build or
run option. The default version is
5.2, unless set by the
parameter
(for example, 51 or
52+ ). |
makeinfo | build (default),
run , both | Add the corresponding dependencies on
makeinfo . |
makeself | (none) | Indicates that the distribution files are makeself archives and sets the appropriate dependencies. |
metaport | (none) | Sets the following variables to make it easier to
create a metaport: MASTER_SITES ,
DISTFILES ,
EXTRACT_ONLY ,
NO_BUILD , NO_INSTALL ,
NO_MTREE , NO_ARCH .
|
mono | (none) | Adds a dependency on the Mono (currently only C#) framework by setting the appropriate dependencies. |
motif | (none) | Uses
x11-toolkits/open-motif as
a library dependency. End users can set
WANT_LESSTIF for the dependency to be
on x11-toolkits/lesstif
instead of x11-toolkits/open-motif. |
ncurses | (none), base ,
port | Uses ncurses, and causes some useful variables to be set. |
ninja | (none) | Uses ninja to build the
port. End users can set NINJA_VERBOSE
for verbose output. |
objc | (none) | Add objective C dependencies (compiler, runtime library) if the base system does not support it. |
openal | al , soft
(default), si ,
alut | Uses OpenAL. The backend
can be specified, with the software implementation as the
default. The user can specify a preferred backend with
WANT_OPENAL . Valid values for
this knob are soft (default) and
si . |
pathfix | (none) | Look for Makefile.in and
configure in the port's
associated sources and fix common paths to make sure they
respect the FreeBSD hierarchy. If the port uses
automake , set
PATHFIX_MAKEFILEIN to
Makefile.am if needed. |
pear | (none) | Adds a dependency on devel/pear. It will setup default behavior for software using the PHP Extension and Application Repository. See Section 6.14.4, “PEAR Modules” for more information. |
perl5 | (none) | Depends on Perl. These
variables can be set:
|
pgsql | (none),
,
,
|
Provide support for PostgreSQL. Maintainer can set version required. Minimum and maximum versions can be specified; for example, 9.0-, 8.4+. Add PostgreSQL component dependency, using
|
pkgconfig | (none), build (default),
run , both | Uses devel/pkgconf.
With no arguments or with the build
argument, it implies pkg-config as a
build-time dependency. run implies a
run-time dependency and both implies
both run-time and build-time dependencies. |
pure | (none), ffi | Uses lang/pure.
Largely used for building related
pure ports. With the
ffi argument, it implies
devel/pure-ffi as a
run-time dependency. |
python | (none),
,
,
,
,
build ,
run
| Uses Python. A supported
version or version range can be specified. If Python is
only needed at build or run time, it can be set as a build
or run dependency with build or
run . See Section 6.15, “Using Python”
for more information. |
qmail | (none), build ,
run ,
both , vars | Uses mail/qmail. With
the build argument, it implies
qmail as a build-time dependency.
run implies a run-time dependency.
Using no argument or the both argument
implies both run-time and build-time dependencies.
vars will only set QMAIL variables for
the port to use. |
qmake | (none), norecursive ,
outsource | Uses QMake for
configuring. For more information see
Section 6.11.3, “Using qmake ”. |
readline | (none), port | Uses readline as a library
dependency, and sets CPPFLAGS and
LDFLAGS as necessary. If the
port argument is used or if readline
is not present in the base system, add a dependency on
devel/readline |
scons | (none) | Provide support for the use of devel/scons |
shared-mime-info | (none) | Uses update-mime-database
from misc/shared-mime-info.
This uses will automatically add a post-install step in
such a way that the port itself still can specify there
own post-install step if needed. It also add an @shared-mime-info
entry to the plist. |
shebangfix | (none) | A lot of software uses incorrect locations for script
interpreters, most notably
/usr/bin/perl and
/bin/bash . This fixes shebang lines
in scripts listed in SHEBANG_FILES .
Currently Bash,
Java,
Ksh,
Perl,
PHP,
Python,
Ruby,
Tcl, and
Tk are supported by default.
To support another interpreter, set
SHEBANG_LANG ,
lua_OLD_CMD and
lua_CMD . For example
SHEBANG_LANG=lua , then
lua_OLD_CMD=/usr/bin/lua and
lua_CMD=${LOCALBASE}/bin/lua . |
tar | (none), Z , bz2 ,
bzip2 , lzma ,
tbz , tgz ,
txz , xz | Set EXTRACT_SUFX to
.tar , .tar.Z ,
.tar.bz2 , .tar.bz2 ,
.tar.lzma , .tbz ,
.tgz , .txz or
.tar.xz respectively. |
tcl | PORT | Add a dependency on Tcl.
The PORT parameter can be either
tcl or tk . Either a
version or wrapper dependency can be appended using
PORT:version or
PORT:wrapper . The version can be
empty, one or more exact version numbers (currently
84 , 85 , or
86 ), or a minimal version number
(currently 84+ , 85+
or 86+ ). A build- or run-time only
dependency can be specified using
PORT,build or
PORT,run . After including
bsd.port.pre.mk the port can inspect
the results using these variables:
|
tk | Same as arguments for tcl | Small wrapper when using both Tcl and Tk. The same variables are returned as when using Tcl. |
twisted | (none), ARGS | Add a dependency on
twistedCore. The list of
required components can be specified as a value of this
variable. ARGS can be one of:
build and
run , one or more other supported
twisted components can be
specified. Supported values are listed in
Uses/twisted.mk . |
uidfix | (none) | Changes some default behavior (mostly variables) of
the build system to allow installing this port as a normal
user. Try this in the port before adding
NEED_ROOT=yes |
uniquefiles | (none), dirs | Make files or directories 'unique', by adding a
prefix or suffix. If the dirs argument
is used, the port needs a prefix (a only a prefix) based
on UNIQUE_PREFIX for standard
directories DOCSDIR ,
EXAMPLESDIR ,
DATADIR , WWWDIR ,
ETCDIR . These variables are
available for ports:
|
webplugin | (none), ARGS | Automatically create and remove symbolic links for
each application that supports the webplugin framework.
ARGS can be one of:
|
xfce | (none), gtk3 |
Provide support for Xfce related ports. See Section 6.23, “Using Xfce” for details. The |
zip | (none), infozip | Indicates that the distribution files use the ZIP
compression algorithm. For files using the InfoZip
algorithm the infozip argument must be
passed to set the appropriate dependencies. |
zope | (none) | Uses www/zope. Mostly
used for building zope related
ports. ZOPE_VERSION can be used by a
port to indicate that a specific version of
zope shall be used. |
Here is a convenient list of
__FreeBSD_version
values as defined in
sys/param.h:
__FreeBSD_version
ValuesValue | Date | Release |
---|---|---|
119411 | 2.0-RELEASE | |
199501, 199503 | March 19, 1995 | 2.1-CURRENT |
199504 | April 9, 1995 | 2.0.5-RELEASE |
199508 | August 26, 1995 | 2.2-CURRENT before 2.1 |
199511 | November 10, 1995 | 2.1.0-RELEASE |
199512 | November 10, 1995 | 2.2-CURRENT before 2.1.5 |
199607 | July 10, 1996 | 2.1.5-RELEASE |
199608 | July 12, 1996 | 2.2-CURRENT before 2.1.6 |
199612 | November 15, 1996 | 2.1.6-RELEASE |
199612 | 2.1.7-RELEASE | |
220000 | February 19, 1997 | 2.2-RELEASE |
(not changed) | 2.2.1-RELEASE | |
(not changed) | 2.2-STABLE after 2.2.1-RELEASE | |
221001 | April 15, 1997 | 2.2-STABLE after texinfo-3.9 |
221002 | April 30, 1997 | 2.2-STABLE after top |
222000 | May 16, 1997 | 2.2.2-RELEASE |
222001 | May 19, 1997 | 2.2-STABLE after 2.2.2-RELEASE |
225000 | October 2, 1997 | 2.2.5-RELEASE |
225001 | November 20, 1997 | 2.2-STABLE after 2.2.5-RELEASE |
225002 | December 27, 1997 | 2.2-STABLE after ldconfig -R merge |
226000 | March 24, 1998 | 2.2.6-RELEASE |
227000 | July 21, 1998 | 2.2.7-RELEASE |
227001 | July 21, 1998 | 2.2-STABLE after 2.2.7-RELEASE |
227002 | September 19, 1998 | 2.2-STABLE after semctl(2) change |
228000 | November 29, 1998 | 2.2.8-RELEASE |
228001 | November 29, 1998 | 2.2-STABLE after 2.2.8-RELEASE |
300000 | February 19, 1996 | 3.0-CURRENT before mount(2) change |
300001 | September 24, 1997 | 3.0-CURRENT after mount(2) change |
300002 | June 2, 1998 | 3.0-CURRENT after semctl(2) change |
300003 | June 7, 1998 | 3.0-CURRENT after ioctl arg changes |
300004 | September 3, 1998 | 3.0-CURRENT after ELF conversion |
300005 | October 16, 1998 | 3.0-RELEASE |
300006 | October 16, 1998 | 3.0-CURRENT after 3.0-RELEASE |
300007 | January 22, 1999 | 3.0-STABLE after 3/4 branch |
310000 | February 9, 1999 | 3.1-RELEASE |
310001 | March 27, 1999 | 3.1-STABLE after 3.1-RELEASE |
310002 | April 14, 1999 | 3.1-STABLE after C++ constructor/destructor order change |
320000 | 3.2-RELEASE | |
320001 | May 8, 1999 | 3.2-STABLE |
320002 | August 29, 1999 | 3.2-STABLE after binary-incompatible IPFW and socket changes |
330000 | September 2, 1999 | 3.3-RELEASE |
330001 | September 16, 1999 | 3.3-STABLE |
330002 | November 24, 1999 | 3.3-STABLE after adding mkstemp(3) to libc |
340000 | December 5, 1999 | 3.4-RELEASE |
340001 | December 17, 1999 | 3.4-STABLE |
350000 | June 20, 2000 | 3.5-RELEASE |
350001 | July 12, 2000 | 3.5-STABLE |
400000 | January 22, 1999 | 4.0-CURRENT after 3.4 branch |
400001 | February 20, 1999 | 4.0-CURRENT after change in dynamic linker handling |
400002 | March 13, 1999 | 4.0-CURRENT after C++ constructor/destructor order change |
400003 | March 27, 1999 | 4.0-CURRENT after functioning dladdr(3) |
400004 | April 5, 1999 | 4.0-CURRENT after __deregister_frame_info dynamic linker bug fix (also 4.0-CURRENT after EGCS 1.1.2 integration) |
400005 | April 27, 1999 | 4.0-CURRENT after suser(9) API change (also 4.0-CURRENT after newbus) |
400006 | May 31, 1999 | 4.0-CURRENT after cdevsw registration change |
400007 | June 17, 1999 | 4.0-CURRENT after the addition of so_cred for socket level credentials |
400008 | June 20, 1999 | 4.0-CURRENT after the addition of a poll syscall wrapper to libc_r |
400009 | July 20, 1999 | 4.0-CURRENT after the change of the kernel's
dev_t type to struct
specinfo pointer |
400010 | September 25, 1999 | 4.0-CURRENT after fixing a hole in jail(2) |
400011 | September 29, 1999 | 4.0-CURRENT after the sigset_t
datatype change |
400012 | November 15, 1999 | 4.0-CURRENT after the cutover to the GCC 2.95.2 compiler |
400013 | December 4, 1999 | 4.0-CURRENT after adding pluggable linux-mode ioctl handlers |
400014 | January 18, 2000 | 4.0-CURRENT after importing OpenSSL |
400015 | January 27, 2000 | 4.0-CURRENT after the C++ ABI change in GCC 2.95.2 from -fvtable-thunks to -fno-vtable-thunks by default |
400016 | February 27, 2000 | 4.0-CURRENT after importing OpenSSH |
400017 | March 13, 2000 | 4.0-RELEASE |
400018 | March 17, 2000 | 4.0-STABLE after 4.0-RELEASE |
400019 | May 5, 2000 | 4.0-STABLE after the introduction of delayed checksums. |
400020 | June 4, 2000 | 4.0-STABLE after merging libxpg4 code into libc. |
400021 | July 8, 2000 | 4.0-STABLE after upgrading Binutils to 2.10.0, ELF branding changes, and tcsh in the base system. |
410000 | July 14, 2000 | 4.1-RELEASE |
410001 | July 29, 2000 | 4.1-STABLE after 4.1-RELEASE |
410002 | September 16, 2000 | 4.1-STABLE after setproctitle(3) moved from libutil to libc. |
411000 | September 25, 2000 | 4.1.1-RELEASE |
411001 | 4.1.1-STABLE after 4.1.1-RELEASE | |
420000 | October 31, 2000 | 4.2-RELEASE |
420001 | January 10, 2001 | 4.2-STABLE after combining libgcc.a and libgcc_r.a, and associated GCC linkage changes. |
430000 | March 6, 2001 | 4.3-RELEASE |
430001 | May 18, 2001 | 4.3-STABLE after wint_t introduction. |
430002 | July 22, 2001 | 4.3-STABLE after PCI powerstate API merge. |
440000 | August 1, 2001 | 4.4-RELEASE |
440001 | October 23, 2001 | 4.4-STABLE after d_thread_t introduction. |
440002 | November 4, 2001 | 4.4-STABLE after mount structure changes (affects filesystem klds). |
440003 | December 18, 2001 | 4.4-STABLE after the userland components of smbfs were imported. |
450000 | December 20, 2001 | 4.5-RELEASE |
450001 | February 24, 2002 | 4.5-STABLE after the usb structure element rename. |
450004 | April 16, 2002 | 4.5-STABLE after the
sendmail_enable rc.conf(5)
variable was made to take the value
NONE . |
450005 | April 27, 2002 | 4.5-STABLE after moving to XFree86 4 by default for package builds. |
450006 | May 1, 2002 | 4.5-STABLE after accept filtering was fixed so that is no longer susceptible to an easy DoS. |
460000 | June 21, 2002 | 4.6-RELEASE |
460001 | June 21, 2002 | 4.6-STABLE sendfile(2) fixed to comply with documentation, not to count any headers sent against the amount of data to be sent from the file. |
460002 | July 19, 2002 | 4.6.2-RELEASE |
460100 | June 26, 2002 | 4.6-STABLE |
460101 | June 26, 2002 | 4.6-STABLE after MFC of `sed -i'. |
460102 | September 1, 2002 | 4.6-STABLE after MFC of many new pkg_install features from the HEAD. |
470000 | October 8, 2002 | 4.7-RELEASE |
470100 | October 9, 2002 | 4.7-STABLE |
470101 | November 10, 2002 | Start generated __std{in,out,err}p references rather than __sF. This changes std{in,out,err} from a compile time expression to a runtime one. |
470102 | January 23, 2003 | 4.7-STABLE after MFC of mbuf changes to replace m_aux mbufs by m_tag's |
470103 | February 14, 2003 | 4.7-STABLE gets OpenSSL 0.9.7 |
480000 | March 30, 2003 | 4.8-RELEASE |
480100 | April 5, 2003 | 4.8-STABLE |
480101 | May 22, 2003 | 4.8-STABLE after realpath(3) has been made thread-safe |
480102 | August 10, 2003 | 4.8-STABLE 3ware API changes to twe. |
490000 | October 27, 2003 | 4.9-RELEASE |
490100 | October 27, 2003 | 4.9-STABLE |
490101 | January 8, 2004 | 4.9-STABLE after e_sid was added to struct kinfo_eproc. |
490102 | February 4, 2004 | 4.9-STABLE after MFC of libmap functionality for rtld. |
491000 | May 25, 2004 | 4.10-RELEASE |
491100 | June 1, 2004 | 4.10-STABLE |
491101 | August 11, 2004 | 4.10-STABLE after MFC of revision 20040629 of the package tools |
491102 | November 16, 2004 | 4.10-STABLE after VM fix dealing with unwiring of fictitious pages |
492000 | December 17, 2004 | 4.11-RELEASE |
492100 | December 17, 2004 | 4.11-STABLE |
492101 | April 18, 2006 | 4.11-STABLE after adding libdata/ldconfig directories to mtree files. |
500000 | March 13, 2000 | 5.0-CURRENT |
500001 | April 18, 2000 | 5.0-CURRENT after adding addition ELF header fields, and changing our ELF binary branding method. |
500002 | May 2, 2000 | 5.0-CURRENT after kld metadata changes. |
500003 | May 18, 2000 | 5.0-CURRENT after buf/bio changes. |
500004 | May 26, 2000 | 5.0-CURRENT after binutils upgrade. |
500005 | June 3, 2000 | 5.0-CURRENT after merging libxpg4 code into libc and after TASKQ interface introduction. |
500006 | June 10, 2000 | 5.0-CURRENT after the addition of AGP interfaces. |
500007 | June 29, 2000 | 5.0-CURRENT after Perl upgrade to 5.6.0 |
500008 | July 7, 2000 | 5.0-CURRENT after the update of KAME code to 2000/07 sources. |
500009 | July 14, 2000 | 5.0-CURRENT after ether_ifattach() and ether_ifdetach() changes. |
500010 | July 16, 2000 | 5.0-CURRENT after changing mtree defaults back to original variant, adding -L to follow symlinks. |
500011 | July 18, 2000 | 5.0-CURRENT after kqueue API changed. |
500012 | September 2, 2000 | 5.0-CURRENT after setproctitle(3) moved from libutil to libc. |
500013 | September 10, 2000 | 5.0-CURRENT after the first SMPng commit. |
500014 | January 4, 2001 | 5.0-CURRENT after <sys/select.h> moved to <sys/selinfo.h>. |
500015 | January 10, 2001 | 5.0-CURRENT after combining libgcc.a and libgcc_r.a, and associated GCC linkage changes. |
500016 | January 24, 2001 | 5.0-CURRENT after change allowing libc and libc_r to be linked together, deprecating -pthread option. |
500017 | February 18, 2001 | 5.0-CURRENT after switch from struct ucred to struct xucred to stabilize kernel-exported API for mountd et al. |
500018 | February 24, 2001 | 5.0-CURRENT after addition of CPUTYPE make variable for controlling CPU-specific optimizations. |
500019 | June 9, 2001 | 5.0-CURRENT after moving machine/ioctl_fd.h to sys/fdcio.h |
500020 | June 15, 2001 | 5.0-CURRENT after locale names renaming. |
500021 | June 22, 2001 | 5.0-CURRENT after Bzip2 import. Also signifies removal of S/Key. |
500022 | July 12, 2001 | 5.0-CURRENT after SSE support. |
500023 | September 14, 2001 | 5.0-CURRENT after KSE Milestone 2. |
500024 | October 1, 2001 | 5.0-CURRENT after d_thread_t, and moving UUCP to ports. |
500025 | October 4, 2001 | 5.0-CURRENT after ABI change for descriptor and creds passing on 64 bit platforms. |
500026 | October 9, 2001 | 5.0-CURRENT after moving to XFree86 4 by default for package builds, and after the new libc strnstr() function was added. |
500027 | October 10, 2001 | 5.0-CURRENT after the new libc strcasestr() function was added. |
500028 | December 14, 2001 | 5.0-CURRENT after the userland components of smbfs were imported. |
(not changed) | 5.0-CURRENT after the new C99 specific-width integer types were added. | |
500029 | January 29, 2002 | 5.0-CURRENT after a change was made in the return value of sendfile(2). |
500030 | February 15, 2002 | 5.0-CURRENT after the introduction of the
type fflags_t , which is the
appropriate size for file flags. |
500031 | February 24, 2002 | 5.0-CURRENT after the usb structure element rename. |
500032 | March 16, 2002 | 5.0-CURRENT after the introduction of Perl 5.6.1. |
500033 | April 3, 2002 | 5.0-CURRENT after the
sendmail_enable rc.conf(5)
variable was made to take the value
NONE . |
500034 | April 30, 2002 | 5.0-CURRENT after mtx_init() grew a third argument. |
500035 | May 13, 2002 | 5.0-CURRENT with Gcc 3.1. |
500036 | May 17, 2002 | 5.0-CURRENT without Perl in /usr/src |
500037 | May 29, 2002 | 5.0-CURRENT after the addition of dlfunc(3) |
500038 | July 24, 2002 | 5.0-CURRENT after the types of some struct sockbuf members were changed and the structure was reordered. |
500039 | September 1, 2002 | 5.0-CURRENT after GCC 3.2.1 import. Also after headers stopped using _BSD_FOO_T_ and started using _FOO_T_DECLARED. This value can also be used as a conservative estimate of the start of bzip2(1) package support. |
500040 | September 20, 2002 | 5.0-CURRENT after various changes to disk functions were made in the name of removing dependency on disklabel structure internals. |
500041 | October 1, 2002 | 5.0-CURRENT after the addition of getopt_long(3) to libc. |
500042 | October 15, 2002 | 5.0-CURRENT after Binutils 2.13 upgrade, which included new FreeBSD emulation, vec, and output format. |
500043 | November 1, 2002 | 5.0-CURRENT after adding weak pthread_XXX stubs to libc, obsoleting libXThrStub.so. 5.0-RELEASE. |
500100 | January 17, 2003 | 5.0-CURRENT after branching for RELENG_5_0 |
500101 | February 19, 2003 | <sys/dkstat.h> is empty. Do not include it. |
500102 | February 25, 2003 | 5.0-CURRENT after the d_mmap_t interface change. |
500103 | February 26, 2003 | 5.0-CURRENT after taskqueue_swi changed to run without Giant, and taskqueue_swi_giant added to run with Giant. |
500104 | February 27, 2003 | cdevsw_add() and cdevsw_remove() no longer exists. Appearance of MAJOR_AUTO allocation facility. |
500105 | March 4, 2003 | 5.0-CURRENT after new cdevsw initialization method. |
500106 | March 8, 2003 | devstat_add_entry() has been replaced by devstat_new_entry() |
500107 | March 15, 2003 | Devstat interface change; see sys/sys/param.h 1.149 |
500108 | March 15, 2003 | Token-Ring interface changes. |
500109 | March 25, 2003 | Addition of vm_paddr_t. |
500110 | March 28, 2003 | 5.0-CURRENT after realpath(3) has been made thread-safe |
500111 | April 9, 2003 | 5.0-CURRENT after usbhid(3) has been synced with NetBSD |
500112 | April 17, 2003 | 5.0-CURRENT after new NSS implementation and addition of POSIX.1 getpw*_r, getgr*_r functions |
500113 | May 2, 2003 | 5.0-CURRENT after removal of the old rc system. |
501000 | June 4, 2003 | 5.1-RELEASE. |
501100 | June 2, 2003 | 5.1-CURRENT after branching for RELENG_5_1. |
501101 | June 29, 2003 | 5.1-CURRENT after correcting the semantics of sigtimedwait(2) and sigwaitinfo(2). |
501102 | July 3, 2003 | 5.1-CURRENT after adding the lockfunc and lockfuncarg fields to bus_dma_tag_create(9). |
501103 | July 31, 2003 | 5.1-CURRENT after GCC 3.3.1-pre 20030711 snapshot integration. |
501104 | August 5, 2003 | 5.1-CURRENT 3ware API changes to twe. |
501105 | August 17, 2003 | 5.1-CURRENT dynamically-linked /bin and /sbin support and movement of libraries to /lib. |
501106 | September 8, 2003 | 5.1-CURRENT after adding kernel support for Coda 6.x. |
501107 | September 17, 2003 | 5.1-CURRENT after 16550 UART constants moved from
<dev/sio/sioreg.h> to
<dev/ic/ns16550.h> .
Also when libmap functionality was unconditionally
supported by rtld. |
501108 | September 23, 2003 | 5.1-CURRENT after PFIL_HOOKS API update |
501109 | September 27, 2003 | 5.1-CURRENT after adding kiconv(3) |
501110 | September 28, 2003 | 5.1-CURRENT after changing default operations for open and close in cdevsw |
501111 | October 16, 2003 | 5.1-CURRENT after changed layout of cdevsw |
501112 | October 16, 2003 | 5.1-CURRENT after adding kobj multiple inheritance |
501113 | October 31, 2003 | 5.1-CURRENT after the if_xname change in struct ifnet |
501114 | November 16, 2003 | 5.1-CURRENT after changing /bin and /sbin to be dynamically linked |
502000 | December 7, 2003 | 5.2-RELEASE |
502010 | February 23, 2004 | 5.2.1-RELEASE |
502100 | December 7, 2003 | 5.2-CURRENT after branching for RELENG_5_2 |
502101 | December 19, 2003 | 5.2-CURRENT after __cxa_atexit/__cxa_finalize functions were added to libc. |
502102 | January 30, 2004 | 5.2-CURRENT after change of default thread library from libc_r to libpthread. |
502103 | February 21, 2004 | 5.2-CURRENT after device driver API megapatch. |
502104 | February 25, 2004 | 5.2-CURRENT after getopt_long_only() addition. |
502105 | March 5, 2004 | 5.2-CURRENT after NULL is made into ((void *)0) for C, creating more warnings. |
502106 | March 8, 2004 | 5.2-CURRENT after pf is linked to the build and install. |
502107 | March 10, 2004 | 5.2-CURRENT after time_t is changed to a 64-bit value on sparc64. |
502108 | March 12, 2004 | 5.2-CURRENT after Intel C/C++ compiler support in some headers and execve(2) changes to be more strictly conforming to POSIX. |
502109 | March 22, 2004 | 5.2-CURRENT after the introduction of the bus_alloc_resource_any API |
502110 | March 27, 2004 | 5.2-CURRENT after the addition of UTF-8 locales |
502111 | April 11, 2004 | 5.2-CURRENT after the removal of the getvfsent(3) API |
502112 | April 13, 2004 | 5.2-CURRENT after the addition of the .warning directive for make. |
502113 | June 4, 2004 | 5.2-CURRENT after ttyioctl() was made mandatory for serial drivers. |
502114 | June 13, 2004 | 5.2-CURRENT after import of the ALTQ framework. |
502115 | June 14, 2004 | 5.2-CURRENT after changing sema_timedwait(9) to return 0 on success and a non-zero error code on failure. |
502116 | June 16, 2004 | 5.2-CURRENT after changing kernel dev_t to be pointer to struct cdev *. |
502117 | June 17, 2004 | 5.2-CURRENT after changing kernel udev_t to dev_t. |
502118 | June 17, 2004 | 5.2-CURRENT after adding support for CLOCK_VIRTUAL and CLOCK_PROF to clock_gettime(2) and clock_getres(2). |
502119 | June 22, 2004 | 5.2-CURRENT after changing network interface cloning overhaul. |
502120 | July 2, 2004 | 5.2-CURRENT after the update of the package tools to revision 20040629. |
502121 | July 9, 2004 | 5.2-CURRENT after marking Bluetooth code as non-i386 specific. |
502122 | July 11, 2004 | 5.2-CURRENT after the introduction of the KDB debugger framework, the conversion of DDB into a backend and the introduction of the GDB backend. |
502123 | July 12, 2004 | 5.2-CURRENT after change to make VFS_ROOT take a
struct thread argument as does vflush. Struct
kinfo_proc now has a user data pointer. The switch of
the default X implementation to
xorg was also made at this
time. |
502124 | July 24, 2004 | 5.2-CURRENT after the change to separate the way ports rc.d and legacy scripts are started. |
502125 | July 28, 2004 | 5.2-CURRENT after the backout of the previous change. |
502126 | July 31, 2004 | 5.2-CURRENT after the removal of kmem_alloc_pageable() and the import of gcc 3.4.2. |
502127 | August 2, 2004 | 5.2-CURRENT after changing the UMA kernel API to allow ctors/inits to fail. |
502128 | August 8, 2004 | 5.2-CURRENT after the change of the vfs_mount signature as well as global replacement of PRISON_ROOT with SUSER_ALLOWJAIL for the suser(9) API. |
503000 | August 23, 2004 | 5.3-BETA/RC before the pfil API change |
503001 | September 22, 2004 | 5.3-RELEASE |
503100 | October 16, 2004 | 5.3-STABLE after branching for RELENG_5_3 |
503101 | December 3, 2004 | 5.3-STABLE after addition of glibc style strftime(3) padding options. |
503102 | February 13, 2005 | 5.3-STABLE after OpenBSD's nc(1) import MFC. |
503103 | February 27, 2005 | 5.4-PRERELEASE after the MFC of the fixes in
<src/include/stdbool.h> and
<src/sys/i386/include/_types.h>
for using the GCC-compatibility of the Intel C/C++
compiler. |
503104 | February 28, 2005 | 5.4-PRERELEASE after the MFC of the change of ifi_epoch from wall clock time to uptime. |
503105 | March 2, 2005 | 5.4-PRERELEASE after the MFC of the fix of EOVERFLOW check in vswprintf(3). |
504000 | April 3, 2005 | 5.4-RELEASE. |
504100 | April 3, 2005 | 5.4-STABLE after branching for RELENG_5_4 |
504101 | May 11, 2005 | 5.4-STABLE after increasing the default thread stacksizes |
504102 | June 24, 2005 | 5.4-STABLE after the addition of sha256 |
504103 | October 3, 2005 | 5.4-STABLE after the MFC of if_bridge |
504104 | November 13, 2005 | 5.4-STABLE after the MFC of bsdiff and portsnap |
504105 | January 17, 2006 | 5.4-STABLE after MFC of ldconfig_local_dirs change. |
505000 | May 12, 2006 | 5.5-RELEASE. |
505100 | May 12, 2006 | 5.5-STABLE after branching for RELENG_5_5 |
600000 | August 18, 2004 | 6.0-CURRENT |
600001 | August 27, 2004 | 6.0-CURRENT after permanently enabling PFIL_HOOKS in the kernel. |
600002 | August 30, 2004 | 6.0-CURRENT after initial addition of ifi_epoch to struct if_data. Backed out after a few days. Do not use this value. |
600003 | September 8, 2004 | 6.0-CURRENT after the re-addition of the ifi_epoch member of struct if_data. |
600004 | September 29, 2004 | 6.0-CURRENT after addition of the struct inpcb argument to the pfil API. |
600005 | October 5, 2004 | 6.0-CURRENT after addition of the "-d DESTDIR" argument to newsyslog. |
600006 | November 4, 2004 | 6.0-CURRENT after addition of glibc style strftime(3) padding options. |
600007 | December 12, 2004 | 6.0-CURRENT after addition of 802.11 framework updates. |
600008 | January 25, 2005 | 6.0-CURRENT after changes to VOP_*VOBJECT() functions and introduction of MNTK_MPSAFE flag for Giantfree filesystems. |
600009 | February 4, 2005 | 6.0-CURRENT after addition of the cpufreq framework and drivers. |
600010 | February 6, 2005 | 6.0-CURRENT after importing OpenBSD's nc(1). |
600011 | February 12, 2005 | 6.0-CURRENT after removing semblance of SVID2
matherr() support. |
600012 | February 15, 2005 | 6.0-CURRENT after increase of default thread stacks' size. |
600013 | February 19, 2005 | 6.0-CURRENT after fixes in
<src/include/stdbool.h> and
<src/sys/i386/include/_types.h>
for using the GCC-compatibility of the Intel C/C++
compiler. |
600014 | February 21, 2005 | 6.0-CURRENT after EOVERFLOW checks in vswprintf(3) fixed. |
600015 | February 25, 2005 | 6.0-CURRENT after changing the struct if_data member, ifi_epoch, from wall clock time to uptime. |
600016 | February 26, 2005 | 6.0-CURRENT after LC_CTYPE disk format changed. |
600017 | February 27, 2005 | 6.0-CURRENT after NLS catalogs disk format changed. |
600018 | February 27, 2005 | 6.0-CURRENT after LC_COLLATE disk format changed. |
600019 | February 28, 2005 | Installation of acpica includes into /usr/include. |
600020 | March 9, 2005 | Addition of MSG_NOSIGNAL flag to send(2) API. |
600021 | March 17, 2005 | Addition of fields to cdevsw |
600022 | March 21, 2005 | Removed gtar from base system. |
600023 | April 13, 2005 | LOCAL_CREDS, LOCAL_CONNWAIT socket options added to unix(4). |
600024 | April 19, 2005 | hwpmc(4) and related tools added to 6.0-CURRENT. |
600025 | April 26, 2005 | struct icmphdr added to 6.0-CURRENT. |
600026 | May 3, 2005 | pf updated to 3.7. |
600027 | May 6, 2005 | Kernel libalias and ng_nat introduced. |
600028 | May 13, 2005 | POSIX ttyname_r(3) made available through unistd.h and libc. |
600029 | May 29, 2005 | 6.0-CURRENT after libpcap updated to v0.9.1 alpha 096. |
600030 | June 5, 2005 | 6.0-CURRENT after importing NetBSD's if_bridge(4). |
600031 | June 10, 2005 | 6.0-CURRENT after struct ifnet was broken out of the driver softcs. |
600032 | July 11, 2005 | 6.0-CURRENT after the import of libpcap v0.9.1. |
600033 | July 25, 2005 | 6.0-STABLE after bump of all shared library versions that had not been changed since RELENG_5. |
600034 | August 13, 2005 | 6.0-STABLE after credential argument is added to dev_clone event handler. 6.0-RELEASE. |
600100 | November 1, 2005 | 6.0-STABLE after 6.0-RELEASE |
600101 | December 21, 2005 | 6.0-STABLE after incorporating scripts from the local_startup directories into the base rcorder(8). |
600102 | December 30, 2005 | 6.0-STABLE after updating the ELF types and constants. |
600103 | January 15, 2006 | 6.0-STABLE after MFC of pidfile(3) API. |
600104 | January 17, 2006 | 6.0-STABLE after MFC of ldconfig_local_dirs change. |
600105 | February 26, 2006 | 6.0-STABLE after NLS catalog support of csh(1). |
601000 | May 6, 2006 | 6.1-RELEASE |
601100 | May 6, 2006 | 6.1-STABLE after 6.1-RELEASE. |
601101 | June 22, 2006 | 6.1-STABLE after the import of csup. |
601102 | July 11, 2006 | 6.1-STABLE after the iwi(4) update. |
601103 | July 17, 2006 | 6.1-STABLE after the resolver update to BIND9, and exposure of reentrant version of netdb functions. |
601104 | August 8, 2006 | 6.1-STABLE after DSO (dynamic shared objects) support has been enabled in OpenSSL. |
601105 | September 2, 2006 | 6.1-STABLE after 802.11 fixups changed the api for the IEEE80211_IOC_STA_INFO ioctl. |
602000 | November 15, 2006 | 6.2-RELEASE |
602100 | September 15, 2006 | 6.2-STABLE after 6.2-RELEASE. |
602101 | December 12, 2006 | 6.2-STABLE after the addition of Wi-Spy quirk. |
602102 | December 28, 2006 | 6.2-STABLE after pci_find_extcap() addition. |
602103 | January 16, 2007 | 6.2-STABLE after MFC of dlsym change to look for a requested symbol both in specified dso and its implicit dependencies. |
602104 | January 28, 2007 | 6.2-STABLE after MFC of ng_deflate(4) and ng_pred1(4) netgraph nodes and new compression and encryption modes for ng_ppp(4) node. |
602105 | February 20, 2007 | 6.2-STABLE after MFC of BSD licensed version of gzip(1) ported from NetBSD. |
602106 | March 31, 2007 | 6.2-STABLE after MFC of PCI MSI and MSI-X support. |
602107 | April 6, 2007 | 6.2-STABLE after MFC of ncurses 5.6 and wide character support. |
602108 | April 11, 2007 | 6.2-STABLE after MFC of CAM 'SG' peripheral device, which implements a subset of Linux SCSI SG passthrough device API. |
602109 | April 17, 2007 | 6.2-STABLE after MFC of readline 5.2 patchset 002. |
602110 | May 2, 2007 | 6.2-STABLE after MFC of pmap_invalidate_cache(), pmap_change_attr(), pmap_mapbios(), pmap_mapdev_attr(), and pmap_unmapbios() for amd64 and i386. |
602111 | June 11, 2007 | 6.2-STABLE after MFC of BOP_BDFLUSH and caused breakage of the filesystem modules KBI. |
602112 | September 21, 2007 | 6.2-STABLE after libutil(3) MFC's. |
602113 | October 25, 2007 | 6.2-STABLE after MFC of wide and single byte ctype separation. Newly compiled binary that references to ctype.h may require a new symbol, __mb_sb_limit, which is not available on older systems. |
602114 | October 30, 2007 | 6.2-STABLE after ctype ABI forward compatibility restored. |
602115 | November 21, 2007 | 6.2-STABLE after back out of wide and single byte ctype separation. |
603000 | November 25, 2007 | 6.3-RELEASE |
603100 | November 25, 2007 | 6.3-STABLE after 6.3-RELEASE. |
603101 | December 7, 2007 | 6.3-STABLE after fixing multibyte type support in bit macro. |
603102 | April 24, 2008 | 6.3-STABLE after adding l_sysid to struct flock. |
603103 | May 27, 2008 | 6.3-STABLE after MFC of the
memrchr function. |
603104 | June 15, 2008 | 6.3-STABLE after MFC of support for
:u variable modifier in
make(1). |
604000 | October 4, 2008 | 6.4-RELEASE |
604100 | October 4, 2008 | 6.4-STABLE after 6.4-RELEASE. |
700000 | July 11, 2005 | 7.0-CURRENT. |
700001 | July 23, 2005 | 7.0-CURRENT after bump of all shared library versions that had not been changed since RELENG_5. |
700002 | August 13, 2005 | 7.0-CURRENT after credential argument is added to dev_clone event handler. |
700003 | August 25, 2005 | 7.0-CURRENT after memmem(3) is added to libc. |
700004 | October 30, 2005 | 7.0-CURRENT after solisten(9) kernel arguments are modified to accept a backlog parameter. |
700005 | November 11, 2005 | 7.0-CURRENT after IFP2ENADDR() was changed to return a pointer to IF_LLADDR(). |
700006 | November 11, 2005 | 7.0-CURRENT after addition of
if_addr member to struct
ifnet and IFP2ENADDR() removal. |
700007 | December 2, 2005 | 7.0-CURRENT after incorporating scripts from the local_startup directories into the base rcorder(8). |
700008 | December 5, 2005 | 7.0-CURRENT after removal of MNT_NODEV mount option. |
700009 | December 19, 2005 | 7.0-CURRENT after ELF-64 type changes and symbol versioning. |
700010 | December 20, 2005 | 7.0-CURRENT after addition of hostb and vgapci drivers, addition of pci_find_extcap(), and changing the AGP drivers to no longer map the aperture. |
700011 | December 31, 2005 | 7.0-CURRENT after tv_sec was made time_t on all platforms but Alpha. |
700012 | January 8, 2006 | 7.0-CURRENT after ldconfig_local_dirs change. |
700013 | January 12, 2006 | 7.0-CURRENT after changes to
/etc/rc.d/abi to support
/compat/linux/etc/ld.so.cache
being a symlink in a readonly filesystem. |
700014 | January 26, 2006 | 7.0-CURRENT after pts import. |
700015 | March 26, 2006 | 7.0-CURRENT after the introduction of version 2 of hwpmc(4)'s ABI. |
700016 | April 22, 2006 | 7.0-CURRENT after addition of fcloseall(3) to libc. |
700017 | May 13, 2006 | 7.0-CURRENT after removal of ip6fw. |
700018 | July 15, 2006 | 7.0-CURRENT after import of snd_emu10kx. |
700019 | July 29, 2006 | 7.0-CURRENT after import of OpenSSL 0.9.8b. |
700020 | September 3, 2006 | 7.0-CURRENT after addition of bus_dma_get_tag function |
700021 | September 4, 2006 | 7.0-CURRENT after libpcap 0.9.4 and tcpdump 3.9.4 import. |
700022 | September 9, 2006 | 7.0-CURRENT after dlsym change to look for a requested symbol both in specified dso and its implicit dependencies. |
700023 | September 23, 2006 | 7.0-CURRENT after adding new sound IOCTLs for the OSSv4 mixer API. |
700024 | September 28, 2006 | 7.0-CURRENT after import of OpenSSL 0.9.8d. |
700025 | November 11, 2006 | 7.0-CURRENT after the addition of libelf. |
700026 | November 26, 2006 | 7.0-CURRENT after major changes on sound sysctls. |
700027 | November 30, 2006 | 7.0-CURRENT after the addition of Wi-Spy quirk. |
700028 | December 15, 2006 | 7.0-CURRENT after the addition of sctp calls to libc |
700029 | January 26, 2007 | 7.0-CURRENT after the GNU gzip(1) implementation was replaced with a BSD licensed version ported from NetBSD. |
700030 | February 7, 2007 | 7.0-CURRENT after the removal of IPIP tunnel encapsulation (VIFF_TUNNEL) from the IPv4 multicast forwarding code. |
700031 | February 23, 2007 | 7.0-CURRENT after the modification of bus_setup_intr() (newbus). |
700032 | March 2, 2007 | 7.0-CURRENT after the inclusion of ipw(4) and iwi(4) firmware. |
700033 | March 9, 2007 | 7.0-CURRENT after the inclusion of ncurses wide character support. |
700034 | March 19, 2007 | 7.0-CURRENT after changes to how insmntque(), getnewvnode(), and vfs_hash_insert() work. |
700035 | March 26, 2007 | 7.0-CURRENT after addition of a notify mechanism for CPU frequency changes. |
700036 | April 6, 2007 | 7.0-CURRENT after import of the ZFS filesystem. |
700037 | April 8, 2007 | 7.0-CURRENT after addition of CAM 'SG' peripheral device, which implements a subset of Linux SCSI SG passthrough device API. |
700038 | April 30, 2007 | 7.0-CURRENT after changing getenv(3), putenv(3), setenv(3) and unsetenv(3) to be POSIX conformant. |
700039 | May 1, 2007 | 7.0-CURRENT after the changes in 700038 were backed out. |
700040 | May 10, 2007 | 7.0-CURRENT after the addition of flopen(3) to libutil. |
700041 | May 13, 2007 | 7.0-CURRENT after enabling symbol versioning, and changing the default thread library to libthr. |
700042 | May 19, 2007 | 7.0-CURRENT after the import of gcc 4.2.0. |
700043 | May 21, 2007 | 7.0-CURRENT after bump of all shared library versions that had not been changed since RELENG_6. |
700044 | June 7, 2007 | 7.0-CURRENT after changing the argument for vn_open()/VOP_OPEN() from file descriptor index to the struct file *. |
700045 | June 10, 2007 | 7.0-CURRENT after changing pam_nologin(8) to provide an account management function instead of an authentication function to the PAM framework. |
700046 | June 11, 2007 | 7.0-CURRENT after updated 802.11 wireless support. |
700047 | June 11, 2007 | 7.0-CURRENT after adding TCP LRO interface capabilities. |
700048 | June 12, 2007 | 7.0-CURRENT after RFC 3678 API support added to the IPv4 stack. Legacy RFC 1724 behavior of the IP_MULTICAST_IF ioctl has now been removed; 0.0.0.0/8 may no longer be used to specify an interface index. Use struct ipmreqn instead. |
700049 | July 3, 2007 | 7.0-CURRENT after importing pf from OpenBSD 4.1 |
(not changed) | 7.0-CURRENT after adding IPv6 support for FAST_IPSEC, deleting KAME IPSEC, and renaming FAST_IPSEC to IPSEC. | |
700050 | July 4, 2007 | 7.0-CURRENT after converting setenv/putenv/etc. calls from traditional BSD to POSIX. |
700051 | July 4, 2007 | 7.0-CURRENT after adding new mmap/lseek/etc syscalls. |
700052 | July 6, 2007 | 7.0-CURRENT after moving I4B headers to include/i4b. |
700053 | September 30, 2007 | 7.0-CURRENT after the addition of support for PCI domains |
700054 | October 25, 2007 | 7.0-CURRENT after MFC of wide and single byte ctype separation. |
700055 | October 28, 2007 | 7.0-RELEASE, and 7.0-CURRENT after ABI backwards compatibility to the FreeBSD 4/5/6 versions of the PCIOCGETCONF, PCIOCREAD and PCIOCWRITE IOCTLs was MFCed, which required the ABI of the PCIOCGETCONF IOCTL to be broken again |
700100 | December 22, 2007 | 7.0-STABLE after 7.0-RELEASE |
700101 | February 8, 2008 | 7.0-STABLE after the MFC of m_collapse(). |
700102 | March 30, 2008 | 7.0-STABLE after the MFC of kdb_enter_why(). |
700103 | April 10, 2008 | 7.0-STABLE after adding l_sysid to struct flock. |
700104 | April 11, 2008 | 7.0-STABLE after the MFC of procstat(1). |
700105 | April 11, 2008 | 7.0-STABLE after the MFC of umtx features. |
700106 | April 15, 2008 | 7.0-STABLE after the MFC of write(2) support to psm(4). |
700107 | April 20, 2008 | 7.0-STABLE after the MFC of F_DUP2FD command to fcntl(2). |
700108 | May 5, 2008 | 7.0-STABLE after some lockmgr(9) changes,
which makes it necessary to include
sys/lock.h to use
lockmgr(9). |
700109 | May 27, 2008 | 7.0-STABLE after MFC of the
memrchr function. |
700110 | August 5, 2008 | 7.0-STABLE after MFC of kernel NFS lockd client. |
700111 | August 20, 2008 | 7.0-STABLE after addition of physically contiguous jumbo frame support. |
700112 | August 27, 2008 | 7.0-STABLE after MFC of kernel DTrace support. |
701000 | November 25, 2008 | 7.1-RELEASE |
701100 | November 25, 2008 | 7.1-STABLE after 7.1-RELEASE. |
701101 | January 10, 2009 | 7.1-STABLE after strndup
merge. |
701102 | January 17, 2009 | 7.1-STABLE after cpuctl(4) support added. |
701103 | February 7, 2009 | 7.1-STABLE after the merge of multi-/no-IPv4/v6 jails. |
701104 | February 14, 2009 | 7.1-STABLE after the store of the suspension owner in the struct mount, and introduction of vfs_susp_clean method into the struct vfsops. |
701105 | March 12, 2009 | 7.1-STABLE after the incompatible change to the kern.ipc.shmsegs sysctl to allow allocating larger SysV shared memory segments on 64bit architectures. |
701106 | March 14, 2009 | 7.1-STABLE after the merge of a fix for POSIX semaphore wait operations. |
702000 | April 15, 2009 | 7.2-RELEASE |
702100 | April 15, 2009 | 7.2-STABLE after 7.2-RELEASE. |
702101 | May 15, 2009 | 7.2-STABLE after ichsmb(4) was changed to use left-adjusted slave addressing to match other SMBus controller drivers. |
702102 | May 28, 2009 | 7.2-STABLE after MFC of the
fdopendir function. |
702103 | June 06, 2009 | 7.2-STABLE after MFC of PmcTools. |
702104 | July 14, 2009 | 7.2-STABLE after MFC of the
closefrom system call. |
702105 | July 31, 2009 | 7.2-STABLE after MFC of the SYSVIPC ABI change. |
702106 | September 14, 2009 | 7.2-STABLE after MFC of the x86 PAT enhancements and addition of d_mmap_single() and the scatter/gather list VM object type. |
703000 | February 9, 2010 | 7.3-RELEASE |
703100 | February 9, 2010 | 7.3-STABLE after 7.3-RELEASE. |
704000 | December 22, 2010 | 7.4-RELEASE |
704100 | December 22, 2010 | 7.4-STABLE after 7.4-RELEASE. |
800000 | October 11, 2007 | 8.0-CURRENT. Separating wide and single byte ctype. |
800001 | October 16, 2007 | 8.0-CURRENT after libpcap 0.9.8 and tcpdump 3.9.8 import. |
800002 | October 21, 2007 | 8.0-CURRENT after renaming kthread_create() and friends to kproc_create() etc. |
800003 | October 24, 2007 | 8.0-CURRENT after ABI backwards compatibility to the FreeBSD 4/5/6 versions of the PCIOCGETCONF, PCIOCREAD and PCIOCWRITE IOCTLs was added, which required the ABI of the PCIOCGETCONF IOCTL to be broken again |
800004 | November 12, 2007 | 8.0-CURRENT after agp(4) driver moved from src/sys/pci to src/sys/dev/agp |
800005 | December 4, 2007 | 8.0-CURRENT after changes to the jumbo frame allocator (rev 174247). |
800006 | December 7, 2007 | 8.0-CURRENT after the addition of callgraph capture functionality to hwpmc(4). |
800007 | December 25, 2007 | 8.0-CURRENT after kdb_enter() gains a "why" argument. |
800008 | December 28, 2007 | 8.0-CURRENT after LK_EXCLUPGRADE option removal. |
800009 | January 9, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after introduction of lockmgr_disown(9) |
800010 | January 10, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after the vn_lock(9) prototype change. |
800011 | January 13, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after the VOP_LOCK(9) and VOP_UNLOCK(9) prototype changes. |
800012 | January 19, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after introduction of
lockmgr_recursed(9), BUF_RECURSED(9) and
BUF_ISLOCKED(9) and the removal of
BUF_REFCNT() . |
800013 | January 23, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after introduction of the “ASCII” encoding. |
800014 | January 24, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after changing the prototype of
lockmgr(9) and removal of
lockcount() and
LOCKMGR_ASSERT() . |
800015 | January 26, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after extending the types of the fts(3) structures. |
800016 | February 1, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after adding an argument to MEXTADD(9) |
800017 | February 6, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after the introduction of LK_NODUP and LK_NOWITNESS options in the lockmgr(9) space. |
800018 | February 8, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after the addition of m_collapse. |
800019 | February 9, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after the addition of current working directory, root directory, and jail directory support to the kern.proc.filedesc sysctl. |
800020 | February 13, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after introduction of
lockmgr_assert(9) and
BUF_ASSERT functions. |
800021 | February 15, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after introduction of lockmgr_args(9) and LK_INTERNAL flag removal. |
800022 | (backed out) | 8.0-CURRENT after changing the default system ar to BSD ar(1). |
800023 | February 25, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after changing the prototypes of
lockstatus(9) and VOP_ISLOCKED(9), more
specifically retiring the
struct thread argument. |
800024 | March 1, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after axing out the
lockwaiters and
BUF_LOCKWAITERS functions,
changing the return value of
brelvp from void to int and
introducing new flags for lockinit(9). |
800025 | March 8, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after adding F_DUP2FD command to fcntl(2). |
800026 | March 12, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after changing the priority parameter to cv_broadcastpri such that 0 means no priority. |
800027 | March 24, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after changing the bpf monitoring ABI when zerocopy bpf buffers were added. |
800028 | March 26, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after adding l_sysid to struct flock. |
800029 | March 28, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after reintegration of the
BUF_LOCKWAITERS function and the
addition of lockmgr_waiters(9). |
800030 | April 1, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after the introduction of the rw_try_rlock(9) and rw_try_wlock(9) functions. |
800031 | April 6, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after the introduction of the
lockmgr_rw and
lockmgr_args_rw
functions. |
800032 | April 8, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after the implementation of the openat and related syscalls, introduction of the O_EXEC flag for the open(2), and providing the corresponding linux compatibility syscalls. |
800033 | April 8, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after added write(2) support for
psm(4) in native operation level. Now arbitrary
commands can be written to
/dev/psm%d and status can be
read back from it. |
800034 | April 10, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after introduction of the
memrchr function. |
800035 | April 16, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after introduction of the
fdopendir function. |
800036 | April 20, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after switchover of 802.11 wireless to multi-bss support (aka vaps). |
800037 | May 9, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after addition of multi routing table support (aka setfib(1), setfib(2)). |
800038 | May 26, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after removal of netatm and ISDN4BSD. Also, the addition of the Compact C Type (CTF) tools. |
800039 | June 14, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after removal of sgtty. |
800040 | June 26, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT with kernel NFS lockd client. |
800041 | July 22, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after addition of arc4random_buf(3) and arc4random_uniform(3). |
800042 | August 8, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after addition of cpuctl(4). |
800043 | August 13, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after changing bpf(4) to use a single device node, instead of device cloning. |
800044 | August 17, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after the commit of the first step of the vimage project renaming global variables to be virtualized with a V_ prefix with macros to map them back to their global names. |
800045 | August 20, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after the integration of the MPSAFE TTY layer, including changes to various drivers and utilities that interact with it. |
800046 | September 8, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after the separation of the GDT per CPU on amd64 architecture. |
800047 | September 10, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after removal of VSVTX, VSGID and VSUID. |
800048 | September 16, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after converting the kernel NFS mount code to accept individual mount options in the nmount() iovec, not just one big struct nfs_args. |
800049 | September 17, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after the removal of suser(9) and suser_cred(9). |
800050 | October 20, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after buffer cache API change. |
800051 | October 23, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after the removal of the MALLOC(9) and FREE(9) macros. |
800052 | October 28, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after the introduction of accmode_t and renaming of VOP_ACCESS 'a_mode' argument to 'a_accmode'. |
800053 | November 2, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after the prototype change of vfs_busy(9) and the introduction of its MBF_NOWAIT and MBF_MNTLSTLOCK flags. |
800054 | November 22, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after the addition of buf_ring, memory barriers and ifnet functions to facilitate multiple hardware transmit queues for cards that support them, and a lockless ring-buffer implementation to enable drivers to more efficiently manage queuing of packets. |
800055 | November 27, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after the addition of Intel™ Core, Core2, and Atom support to hwpmc(4). |
800056 | November 29, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after the introduction of multi-/no-IPv4/v6 jails. |
800057 | December 1, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after the switch to the ath hal source code. |
800058 | December 12, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after the introduction of the VOP_VPTOCNP operation. |
800059 | December 15, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT incorporates the new arp-v2 rewrite. |
800060 | December 19, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after the addition of makefs. |
800061 | January 15, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after TCP Appropriate Byte Counting. |
800062 | January 28, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after removal of minor(), minor2unit(), unit2minor(), etc. |
800063 | February 18, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after GENERIC config change to use the USB2 stack, but also the addition of fdevname(3). |
800064 | February 23, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after the USB2 stack is moved to and replaces dev/usb. |
800065 | February 26, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after the renaming of all functions in libmp(3). |
800066 | February 27, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after changing USB devfs handling and layout. |
800067 | February 28, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after adding getdelim(), getline(), stpncpy(), strnlen(), wcsnlen(), wcscasecmp(), and wcsncasecmp(). |
800068 | March 2, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after renaming the ushub devclass to uhub. |
800069 | March 9, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after libusb20.so.1 was renamed to libusb.so.1. |
800070 | March 9, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after merging IGMPv3 and Source-Specific Multicast (SSM) to the IPv4 stack. |
800071 | March 14, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after gcc was patched to use C99 inline semantics in c99 and gnu99 mode. |
800072 | March 15, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after the IFF_NEEDSGIANT flag has been removed; non-MPSAFE network device drivers are no longer supported. |
800073 | March 18, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after the dynamic string token substitution has been implemented for rpath and needed paths. |
800074 | March 24, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after tcpdump 4.0.0 and libpcap 1.0.0 import. |
800075 | April 6, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after layout of structs vnet_net, vnet_inet and vnet_ipfw has been changed. |
800076 | April 9, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after adding delay profiles in dummynet. |
800077 | April 14, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after removing VOP_LEASE() and vop_vector.vop_lease. |
800078 | April 15, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after struct rt_weight fields have been added to struct rt_metrics and struct rt_metrics_lite, changing the layout of struct rt_metrics_lite. A bump to RTM_VERSION was made, but backed out. |
800079 | April 15, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after struct llentry pointers are added to struct route and struct route_in6. |
800080 | April 15, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after layout of struct inpcb has been changed. |
800081 | April 19, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after the layout of struct malloc_type has been changed. |
800082 | April 21, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after the layout of struct ifnet has changed, and with if_ref() and if_rele() ifnet refcounting. |
800083 | April 22, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after the implementation of a low-level Bluetooth HCI API. |
800084 | April 29, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after IPv6 SSM and MLDv2 changes. |
800085 | April 30, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after enabling support for VIMAGE kernel builds with one active image. |
800086 | May 8, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after adding support for input lines of arbitrarily length in patch(1). |
800087 | May 11, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after some VFS KPI changes. The
thread argument has been removed from the FSD parts of
the VFS. VFS_* functions do not
need the context any more because it always refers to
curthread . In some special cases,
the old behavior is retained. |
800088 | May 20, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after net80211 monitor mode changes. |
800089 | May 23, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after adding UDP control block support. |
800090 | May 23, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after virtualizing interface cloning. |
800091 | May 27, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after adding hierarchical jails and removing global securelevel. |
800092 | May 29, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after changing
sx_init_flags() KPI. The
SX_ADAPTIVESPIN is retired and a
new SX_NOADAPTIVE flag is
introduced to handle the reversed
logic. |
800093 | May 29, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after adding mnt_xflag to struct mount. |
800094 | May 30, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after adding VOP_ACCESSX(9). |
800095 | May 30, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after changing the polling KPI.
The polling handlers now return the number of packets
processed. A new
IFCAP_POLLING_NOCOUNT is also
introduced to specify that the return value is
not significant and the counting should be
skipped. |
800096 | June 1, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after updating to the new netisr implementation and after changing the way we store and access FIBs. |
800097 | June 8, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after the introduction of vnet destructor hooks and infrastructure. |
800097 | June 11, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after the introduction of netgraph outbound to inbound path call detection and queuing, which also changed the layout of struct thread. |
800098 | June 14, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after OpenSSL 0.9.8k import. |
800099 | June 22, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after NGROUPS update and moving route virtualization into its own VImage module. |
800100 | June 24, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after SYSVIPC ABI change. |
800101 | June 29, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after the removal of the /dev/net/* per-interface character devices. |
800102 | July 12, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after padding was added to struct sackhint, struct tcpcb, and struct tcpstat. |
800103 | July 13, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after replacing struct tcpopt with struct toeopt in the TOE driver interface to the TCP syncache. |
800104 | July 14, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after the addition of the linker-set based per-vnet allocator. |
800105 | July 19, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after version bump for all shared libraries that do not have symbol versioning turned on. |
800106 | July 24, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after introduction of OBJT_SG VM object type. |
800107 | August 2, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after making the newbus subsystem Giant free by adding the newbus sxlock and 8.0-RELEASE. |
800108 | November 21, 2009 | 8.0-STABLE after implementing EVFILT_USER kevent filter. |
800500 | January 7, 2010 | 8.0-STABLE after
__FreeBSD_version bump to make
pkg_add -r use
packages-8-stable. |
800501 | January 24, 2010 | 8.0-STABLE after change of the
scandir(3) and
alphasort(3) prototypes to
conform to SUSv4. |
800502 | January 31, 2010 | 8.0-STABLE after addition of
sigpause(3) . |
800503 | February 25, 2010 | 8.0-STABLE after addition of SIOCGIFDESCR and SIOCSIFDESCR ioctls to network interfaces. These ioctl can be used to manipulate interface description, as inspired by OpenBSD. |
800504 | March 1, 2010 | 8.0-STABLE after MFC of importing x86emu, a software emulator for real mode x86 CPU from OpenBSD. |
800505 | May 18, 2010 | 8.0-STABLE after MFC of adding liblzma, xz, xzdec, and lzmainfo. |
801000 | June 14, 2010 | 8.1-RELEASE |
801500 | June 14, 2010 | 8.1-STABLE after 8.1-RELEASE. |
801501 | November 3, 2010 | 8.1-STABLE after KBI change in struct sysentvec, and implementation of PL_FLAG_SCE/SCX/EXEC/SI and pl_siginfo for ptrace(PT_LWPINFO) . |
802000 | December 22, 2010 | 8.2-RELEASE |
802500 | December 22, 2010 | 8.2-STABLE after 8.2-RELEASE. |
802501 | February 28, 2011 | 8.2-STABLE after merging DTrace changes, including support for userland tracing. |
802502 | March 6, 2011 | 8.2-STABLE after merging log2 and log2f into libm. |
802503 | May 1, 2011 | 8.2-STABLE after upgrade of the gcc to the last GPLv2 version from the FSF gcc-4_2-branch. |
802504 | May 28, 2011 | 8.2-STABLE after introduction of the KPI and supporting infrastructure for modular congestion control. |
802505 | May 28, 2011 | 8.2-STABLE after introduction of Hhook and Khelp KPIs. |
802506 | May 28, 2011 | 8.2-STABLE after addition of OSD to struct tcpcb. |
802507 | June 6, 2011 | 8.2-STABLE after ZFS v28 import. |
802508 | June 8, 2011 | 8.2-STABLE after removal of the schedtail event handler and addition of the sv_schedtail method to struct sysvec. |
802509 | July 14, 2011 | 8.2-STABLE after merging the SSSE3 support into binutils. |
802510 | July 19, 2011 | 8.2-STABLE after addition of
RFTSIGZMB flag for
rfork(2) . |
802511 | September 9, 2011 | 8.2-STABLE after addition of automatic detection of USB mass storage devices which do not support the no synchronize cache SCSI command. |
802512 | September 10, 2011 | 8.2-STABLE after merging of re-factoring of auto-quirk. |
802513 | October 25, 2011 | 8.2-STABLE after merging of the MAP_PREFAULT_READ
flag to mmap(2) . |
802514 | November 16, 2011 | 8.2-STABLE after merging of addition of posix_fallocate(2) syscall. |
802515 | January 6, 2012 | 8.2-STABLE after merging of addition of the posix_fadvise(2) system call. |
802516 | January 16, 2012 | 8.2-STABLE after merging gperf 3.0.3 |
802517 | February 15, 2012 | 8.2-STABLE after introduction of the new extensible sysctl(3) interface NET_RT_IFLISTL to query address lists (rev 231769). |
803000 | March 3, 2012 | 8.3-RELEASE. |
803500 | March 3, 2012 | 8.3-STABLE after branching releng/8.3 (RELENG_8_3). |
804000 | March 28, 2013 | 8.4-RELEASE. |
804500 | March 28, 2013 | 8.4-STABLE after 8.4-RELEASE. |
804504 | September 9, 2014 | 8.4-STABLE after FreeBSD-SA-14:18 (rev 271305). |
804505 | September 16, 2014 | 8.4-STABLE after FreeBSD-SA-14:19 (rev 271668). |
804506 | October 21, 2014 | 8.4-STABLE after FreeBSD-SA-14:21 (rev 273413). |
804507 | November 4, 2014 | 8.4-STABLE after FreeBSD-SA-14:23, FreeBSD-SA-14:24, and FreeBSD-SA-14:25 (rev 274162). |
804508 | February 25, 2015 | 8-STABLE after FreeBSD-EN-15:01.vt, FreeBSD-EN-15:02.openssl, FreeBSD-EN-15:03.freebsd-update, FreeBSD-SA-15:04.igmp, and FreeBSD-SA-15:05.bind (rev 279287). |
900000 | August 22, 2009 | 9.0-CURRENT. |
900001 | September 8, 2009 | 9.0-CURRENT after importing x86emu, a software emulator for real mode x86 CPU from OpenBSD. |
900002 | September 23, 2009 | 9.0-CURRENT after implementing the EVFILT_USER kevent filter functionality. |
900003 | December 2, 2009 | 9.0-CURRENT after addition of
sigpause(3) and PIE
support in csu. |
900004 | December 6, 2009 | 9.0-CURRENT after addition of libulog and its libutempter compatibility interface. |
900005 | December 12, 2009 | 9.0-CURRENT after addition of
sleepq_sleepcnt() , which can be
used to query the number of waiters on a specific
waiting queue. |
900006 | January 4, 2010 | 9.0-CURRENT after change of the
scandir(3) and
alphasort(3) prototypes to
conform to SUSv4. |
900007 | January 13, 2010 | 9.0-CURRENT after the removal of utmp(5) and
the addition of utmpx (see
getutxent(3) ) for improved
logging of user logins and system events. |
900008 | January 20, 2010 | 9.0-CURRENT after the import of BSDL bc/dc and the deprecation of GNU bc/dc. |
900009 | January 26, 2010 | 9.0-CURRENT after the addition of SIOCGIFDESCR and SIOCSIFDESCR ioctls to network interfaces. These ioctl can be used to manipulate interface description, as inspired by OpenBSD. |
900010 | March 22, 2010 | 9.0-CURRENT after the import of zlib 1.2.4. |
900011 | April 24, 2010 | 9.0-CURRENT after adding soft-updates journalling. |
900012 | May 10, 2010 | 9.0-CURRENT after adding liblzma, xz, xzdec, and lzmainfo. |
900013 | May 24, 2010 | 9.0-CURRENT after bringing in USB fixes for linux(4). |
900014 | June 10, 2010 | 9.0-CURRENT after adding Clang. |
900015 | July 22, 2010 | 9.0-CURRENT after the import of BSD grep. |
900016 | July 28, 2010 | 9.0-CURRENT after adding mti_zone to struct malloc_type_internal. |
900017 | August 23, 2010 | 9.0-CURRENT after changing back default grep to GNU grep and adding WITH_BSD_GREP knob. |
900018 | August 24, 2010 | 9.0-CURRENT after the
pthread_kill(3) -generated signal
is identified as SI_LWP in si_code. Previously,
si_code was SI_USER. |
900019 | August 28, 2010 | 9.0-CURRENT after addition of the
MAP_PREFAULT_READ flag to
mmap(2) . |
900020 | September 9, 2010 | 9.0-CURRENT after adding drain functionality to sbufs, which also changed the layout of struct sbuf. |
900021 | September 13, 2010 | 9.0-CURRENT after DTrace has grown support for userland tracing. |
900022 | October 2, 2010 | 9.0-CURRENT after addition of the BSDL man utilities and retirement of GNU/GPL man utilities. |
900023 | October 11, 2010 | 9.0-CURRENT after updating xz to git 20101010 snapshot. |
900024 | November 11, 2010 | 9.0-CURRENT after libgcc.a was replaced by libcompiler_rt.a. |
900025 | November 12, 2010 | 9.0-CURRENT after the introduction of the modularised congestion control. |
900026 | November 30, 2010 | 9.0-CURRENT after the introduction of Serial Management Protocol (SMP) passthrough and the XPT_SMP_IO and XPT_GDEV_ADVINFO CAM CCBs. |
900027 | December 5, 2010 | 9.0-CURRENT after the addition of log2 to libm. |
900028 | December 21, 2010 | 9.0-CURRENT after the addition of the Hhook (Helper Hook), Khelp (Kernel Helpers) and Object Specific Data (OSD) KPIs. |
900029 | December 28, 2010 | 9.0-CURRENT after the modification of the TCP stack to allow Khelp modules to interact with it via helper hook points and store per-connection data in the TCP control block. |
900030 | January 12, 2011 | 9.0-CURRENT after the update of libdialog to version 20100428. |
900031 | February 7, 2011 | 9.0-CURRENT after the addition of
pthread_getthreadid_np(3) . |
900032 | February 8, 2011 | 9.0-CURRENT after the removal of the uio_yield prototype and symbol. |
900033 | February 18, 2011 | 9.0-CURRENT after the update of binutils to version 2.17.50. |
900034 | March 8, 2011 | 9.0-CURRENT after the struct sysvec (sv_schedtail) changes. |
900035 | March 29, 2011 | 9.0-CURRENT after the update of base gcc and libstdc++ to the last GPLv2 licensed revision. |
900036 | April 18, 2011 | 9.0-CURRENT after the removal of libobjc and Objective-C support from the base system. |
900037 | May 13, 2011 | 9.0-CURRENT after importing the libprocstat(3) library and fuser(1) utility to the base system. |
900038 | May 22, 2011 | 9.0-CURRENT after adding a lock flag argument to VFS_FHTOVP(9). |
900039 | June 28, 2011 | 9.0-CURRENT after importing pf from OpenBSD 4.5. |
900040 | July 19, 2011 | Increase default MAXCPU for FreeBSD to 64 on amd64 and ia64 and to 128 for XLP (mips). |
900041 | August 13, 2011 | 9.0-CURRENT after the implementation of Capsicum capabilities; fget(9) gains a rights argument. |
900042 | August 28, 2011 | Bump shared libraries' version numbers for libraries whose ABI has changed in preparation for 9.0. |
900043 | September 2, 2011 | Add automatic detection of USB mass storage devices which do not support the no synchronize cache SCSI command. |
900044 | September 10, 2011 | Re-factor auto-quirk. 9.0-RELEASE. |
900045 | January 2, 2012 | 9-CURRENT after MFC of true/false from 1000002. |
900500 | January 2, 2012 | 9.0-STABLE. |
900501 | January 6, 2012 | 9.0-STABLE after merging of addition of the posix_fadvise(2) system call. |
900502 | January 16, 2012 | 9.0-STABLE after merging gperf 3.0.3 |
900503 | February 15, 2012 | 9.0-STABLE after introduction of the new extensible sysctl(3) interface NET_RT_IFLISTL to query address lists (rev 231768). |
900504 | March 3, 2012 | 9.0-STABLE after changes related to mounting of filesystem inside a jail (rev 232728). |
900505 | March 13, 2012 | 9.0-STABLE after introduction of new tcp(4) socket options: TCP_KEEPINIT, TCP_KEEPIDLE, TCP_KEEPINTVL, and TCP_KEEPCNT (rev 232945). |
900506 | May 22, 2012 | 9.0-STABLE after introduction of the
quick_exit function and
related changes required for C++11 (rev
235786). |
901000 | August 5, 2012 | 9.1-RELEASE. |
901500 | August 6, 2012 | 9.1-STABLE after branching releng/9.1 (RELENG_9_1). |
901501 | November 11, 2012 | 9.1-STABLE after LIST_PREV() added to queue.h (rev 242893) and KBI change in USB serial devices (rev 240659). |
901502 | November 28, 2012 | 9.1-STABLE after USB serial jitter buffer requires rebuild of USB serial device modules. |
901503 | February 21, 2013 | 9.1-STABLE after USB moved to the driver structure requiring a rebuild of all USB modules. Also indicates the presence of nmtree. |
901504 | March 15, 2013 | 9.1-STABLE after install gained -l, -M, -N and related flags and cat gained the -l option. |
901505 | June 13, 2013 | 9.1-STABLE after fixes in ctfmerge bootstrapping (rev 249243). |
902001 | August 3, 2013 | releng/9.2 branched from
stable/9
(rev 253912). |
902501 | August 2, 2013 | 9.2-STABLE after creation of
releng/9.2 branch
(rev 253913). |
902502 | August 26, 2013 | 9.2-STABLE after inclusion of the
PIM_RESCAN CAM path inquiry flag
(rev 254938). |
902503 | August 27, 2013 | 9.2-STABLE after inclusion of the
SI_UNMAPPED cdev flag
(rev 254979). |
902504 | October 22, 2013 | 9.2-STABLE after inclusion of support for “first boot” rc(8) scripts (rev 256917). |
902505 | December 12, 2013 | 9.2-STABLE after Heimdal encoding fix (rev 259448). |
902506 | December 31, 2013 | 9-STABLE after MAP_STACK fixes (rev 260082). |
902507 | March 5, 2014 | 9-STABLE after upgrade of libc++ to 3.4 release (rev 262801). |
902508 | March 14, 2014 | 9-STABLE after merge of the Radeon KMS driver (rev 263170). |
902509 | March 21, 2014 | 9-STABLE after upgrade of llvm/clang to 3.4 release (rev 263509). |
902510 | March 27, 2014 | 9-STABLE after merge of the vt(4) driver (rev 263818). |
902511 | March 27, 2014 | 9-STABLE after FreeBSD-SA-14:06.openssl (rev 264289). |
902512 | April 30, 2014 | 9-STABLE after FreeBSD-SA-14:08.tcp (rev 265123). |
903000 | June 20, 2014 | 9-RC1 releng/9.3 branch
(rev 267656). |
903500 | June 20, 2014 | 9.3-STABLE releng/9.3 branch
(rev 267657). |
903501 | July 8, 2014 | 9-STABLE after FreeBSD-SA-14:17.kmem (rev 268433). |
903502 | August 19, 2014 | 9-STABLE after SOCK_DGRAM
bug fix (rev 269789). |
903503 | September 9, 2014 | 9-STABLE after FreeBSD-SA-14:18 (rev 269687). |
903504 | September 16, 2014 | 9-STABLE after FreeBSD-SA-14:19 (rev 271668). |
903505 | October 21, 2014 | 9-STABLE after FreeBSD-SA-14:20, FreeBSD-SA-14:21, and FreeBSD-SA-14:22 (rev 273412). |
903506 | November 4, 2014 | 9-STABLE after FreeBSD-SA-14:23, FreeBSD-SA-14:24, and FreeBSD-SA-14:25 (rev 274162). |
903507 | December 13, 2014 | 9-STABLE after merging an important fix to the LLVM vectorizer, which could lead to buffer overruns in some cases (rev 275742). |
903508 | February 25, 2015 | 9-STABLE after FreeBSD-EN-15:01.vt, FreeBSD-EN-15:02.openssl, FreeBSD-EN-15:03.freebsd-update, FreeBSD-SA-15:04.igmp, and FreeBSD-SA-15:05.bind (rev 279287). |
1000000 | September 26, 2011 | 10.0-CURRENT. |
1000001 | November 4, 2011 | 10-CURRENT after addition of the posix_fadvise(2) system call. |
1000002 | December 12, 2011 | 10-CURRENT after defining boolean true/false in sys/types.h, sizeof(bool) may have changed (rev 228444). 10-CURRENT after xlocale.h was introduced (rev 227753). |
1000003 | December 16, 2011 | 10-CURRENT after major changes to carp(4), changing size of struct in_aliasreq, struct in6_aliasreq (rev 228571) and straitening arguments check of SIOCAIFADDR (rev 228574). |
1000004 | January 1, 2012 | 10-CURRENT after the removal of skpc(9) and the addition of memcchr(9) (rev 229200). |
1000005 | January 16, 2012 | 10-CURRENT after the removal of support for SIOCSIFADDR, SIOCSIFNETMASK, SIOCSIFBRDADDR, SIOCSIFDSTADDR ioctls (rev 230207). |
1000006 | January 26, 2012 | 10-CURRENT after introduction of read capacity data asynchronous notification in the cam(4) layer (rev 230590). |
1000007 | February 5, 2012 | 10-CURRENT after introduction of new tcp(4) socket options: TCP_KEEPINIT, TCP_KEEPIDLE, TCP_KEEPINTVL, and TCP_KEEPCNT (rev 231025). |
1000008 | February 11, 2012 | 10-CURRENT after introduction of the new extensible sysctl(3) interface NET_RT_IFLISTL to query address lists (rev 231505). |
1000009 | February 25, 2012 | 10-CURRENT after import of libarchive 3.0.3 (rev 232153). |
1000010 | March 31, 2012 | 10-CURRENT after xlocale cleanup (rev 233757). |
1000011 | April 16, 2012 | 10-CURRENT import of LLVM/Clang 3.1 trunk r154661 (rev 234353). |
1000012 | May 2, 2012 | 10-CURRENT jemalloc import (rev 234924). |
1000013 | May 22, 2012 | 10-CURRENT after byacc import (rev 235788). |
1000014 | June 27, 2012 | 10-CURRENT after BSD sort becoming the default sort (rev 237629). |
1000015 | July 12, 2012 | 10-CURRENT after import of OpenSSL 1.0.1c (rev 238405). |
(not changed) | July 13, 2012 | 10-CURRENT after the fix for LLVM/Clang 3.1 regression (rev 238429). |
1000016 | August 8, 2012 | 10-CURRENT after KBI change in ucom(4) (rev 239179). |
1000017 | August 8, 2012 | 10-CURRENT after adding streams feature to the USB stack (rev 239214). |
1000018 | September 8, 2012 | 10-CURRENT after major rewrite of pf(4) (rev 240233). |
1000019 | October 6, 2012 | 10-CURRENT after pfil(9) KBI/KPI changed to supply packets in net byte order to AF_INET filter hooks (rev 241245). |
1000020 | October 16, 2012 | 10-CURRENT after the network interface cloning KPI changed and struct if_clone becoming opaque (rev 241610). |
1000021 | October 22, 2012 | 10-CURRENT after removal of support for non-MPSAFE filesystems and addition of support for FUSEFS (rev 241519, 241897). |
1000022 | October 22, 2012 | 10-CURRENT after the entire IPv4 stack switched to network byte order for IP packet header storage (rev 241913). |
1000023 | November 5, 2012 | 10-CURRENT after jitter buffer in the common USB serial driver code, to temporarily store characters if the TTY buffer is full. Add flow stop and start signals when this happens (rev 242619). |
1000024 | November 5, 2012 | 10-CURRENT after clang was made the default compiler on i386 and amd64 (rev 242624). |
1000025 | November 17, 2012 | 10-CURRENT after the sin6_scope_id member variable in struct sockaddr_in6 was changed to being filled by the kernel before passing the structure to the userland via sysctl or routing socket. This means the KAME-specific embedded scope id in sin6_addr.s6_addr[2] is always cleared in userland application (rev 243443). |
1000026 | January 11, 2013 | 10-CURRENT after install gained the -N flag (rev 245313). May also be used to indicate the presence of nmtree. |
1000027 | January 29, 2013 | 10-CURRENT after cat gained the -l flag (rev 246083). |
1000028 | February 13, 2013 | 10-CURRENT after USB moved to the driver structure requiring a rebuild of all USB modules (rev 246759). |
1000029 | March 4, 2013 | 10-CURRENT after the introduction of tickless callout facility which also changed the layout of struct callout (rev 247777). |
1000030 | March 12, 2013 | 10-CURRENT after KPI breakage introduced in the VM subsystem to support read/write locking (rev 248084). |
1000031 | April 26, 2013 | 10-CURRENT after the dst parameter of the
ifnet if_output method was
changed to take const qualifier (rev
249925). |
1000032 | May 1, 2013 | 10-CURRENT after the introduction of the
accept4 (rev
250154) and
pipe2 (rev
250159) system calls. |
1000033 | May 21, 2013 | 10-CURRENT after flex 2.5.37 import (rev 250881). |
1000034 | June 3, 2013 | 10-CURRENT after the addition of these
functions to libm: cacos ,
cacosf ,
cacosh ,
cacoshf ,
casin ,
casinf ,
casinh ,
casinhf ,
catan ,
catanf ,
catanh ,
catanhf ,
logl ,
log2l ,
log10l ,
log1pl ,
expm1l (rev
251294). |
1000035 | June 8, 2013 | 10-CURRENT after the introduction of the
aio_mlock system call (rev
251526). |
1000036 | July 9, 2013 | 10-CURRENT after the addition of a new function to the kernel GSSAPI module's function call interface (rev 253049). |
1000037 | July 9, 2013 | 10-CURRENT after the migration of statistics
structures to PCPU counters.
Changed structures include: ahstat ,
arpstat ,
espstat ,
icmp6_ifstat ,
icmp6stat ,
in6_ifstat ,
ip6stat ,
ipcompstat ,
ipipstat ,
ipsecstat ,
mrt6stat ,
mrtstat ,
pfkeystat ,
pim6stat ,
pimstat ,
rip6stat ,
udpstat (rev
253081). |
1000038 | July 16, 2013 | 10-CURRENT after making ARM
EABI the default ABI on arm,
armeb, armv6, and armv6eb architectures
(rev 253396). |
1000039 | July 22, 2013 | 10-CURRENT after CAM
and mps(4) driver scanning changes
(rev 253549). |
1000040 | July 24, 2013 | 10-CURRENT after addition of libusb pkgconf files (rev 253638). |
1000041 | August 5, 2013 | 10-CURRENT after change from
time_second to
time_uptime
in PF_INET6
(rev 253970). |
1000042 | August 9, 2013 | 10-CURRENT after VM subsystem change to unify soft and hard busy mechanisms (rev 254138). |
1000043 | August 13, 2013 | 10-CURRENT after WITH_ICONV is
enabled by default. A new src.conf(5) option,
WITH_LIBICONV_COMPAT (disabled by
default) adds libiconv_open to
provide compatibility with the
libiconv port (rev
254273). |
1000044 | August 15, 2013 | 10-CURRENT after libc.so
conversion to an ld(1)
script (rev
251668,
254358). |
1000045 | August 15, 2013 | 10-CURRENT after devfs programming interface
change by replacing the cdevsw flag
D_UNMAPPED_IO with the struct cdev
flag SI_UNMAPPED (rev
254389). |
1000046 | August 19, 2013 | 10-CURRENT after addition of
M_PROTO[9-12] and removal of
M_FRAG|M_FIRSTFRAG|M_LASTFRAG
mbuf flags (rev 254524,
254526). |
1000047 | August 21, 2013 | 10-CURRENT after stat(2) update to allow storing some Windows/DOS and CIFS file attributes as stat(2) flags (rev 254627). |
1000048 | August 22, 2013 | 10-CURRENT after modification of structure
xsctp_inpcb
(rev 254672). |
1000049 | August 24, 2013 | 10-CURRENT after physio(9) support for devices that do not function properly with split I/O, such as sa(4) (rev 254760). |
1000050 | August 24, 2013 | 10-CURRENT after modifications of structure
mbuf (rev
254780,
254799,
254804,
254807
254842). |
1000051 | August 25, 2013 | 10-CURRENT after Radeon KMS driver import (rev 254885, 254887). |
1000052 | September 3, 2013 | 10-CURRENT after import of NetBSD
libexecinfo is connected to the
build (rev 255180). |
1000053 | September 6, 2013 | 10-CURRENT after API and ABI changes to the Capsicum framework (rev 255305). |
1000054 | September 6, 2013 | 10-CURRENT after gcc and
libstdc++ are no longer built by
default (rev 255321). |
1000055 | September 6, 2013 | 10-CURRENT after addition of
MMAP_32BIT mmap(2) flag
(rev 255426). |
1000100 | December 7, 2013 | releng/10.0 branched from
stable/10
(rev 259065). |
1000500 | October 10, 2013 | 10-STABLE after branch from head/
(rev 256283). |
1000501 | October 22, 2013 | 10-STABLE after addition of first-boot rc(8) support (rev 256916). |
1000502 | November 20, 2013 | 10-STABLE after removal of iconv symbols from
libc.so.7
(rev 258398). |
1000510 | December 7, 2013 | releng/10.0 __FreeBSD_version
update to prevent the value from going backwards
(rev 259067). |
1000700 | December 7, 2013 | 10-STABLE after releng/10.0 branch
(rev 259069). |
1000701 | December 15, 2013 | 10.0-STABLE after Heimdal encoding fix (rev 259447). |
1000702 | December 31, 2013 | 10-STABLE after MAP_STACK fixes (rev 260135). |
1000703 | March 5, 2014 | 10-STABLE after upgrade of libc++ to 3.4 release (rev 262801). |
1000704 | March 7, 2014 | 10-STABLE after MFC of the vt(4) driver (rev 262861). |
1000705 | March 21, 2014 | 10-STABLE after upgrade of llvm/clang to 3.4 release (rev 263508). |
1000706 | April 6, 2014 | 10-STABLE after GCC support for
__block definition (rev
264214). |
1000707 | April 8, 2014 | 10-STABLE after FreeBSD-SA-14:06.openssl (rev 264289). |
1000708 | April 30, 2014 | 10-STABLE after FreeBSD-SA-14:07.devfs, FreeBSD-SA-14:08.tcp, and FreeBSD-SA-14:09.openssl (rev 265122). |
1000709 | May 13, 2014 | 10-STABLE after support for UDP-Lite protocol (RFC 3828) (rev 265946). |
1000710 | June 13, 2014 | 10-STABLE after changes to strcasecmp(3), moving
strcasecmp_l() and
strncasecmp_l() from
<string.h> to
<strings.h> for POSIX 2008
compliance (rev 267465). |
1000711 | July 8, 2014 | 10-STABLE after FreeBSD-SA-14:17.kmem (rev 268432). |
1000712 | August 1, 2014 | 10-STABLE after nfsd(8) 4.1 merge (rev 269398). |
1000713 | August 3, 2014 | 10-STABLE after regex(3) library update to add “>” and “<” delimiters (rev 269484). |
1000714 | August 3, 2014 | 10-STABLE after SOCK_DGRAM
bug fix (rev 269490). |
1000715 | September 9, 2014 | 10-STABLE after FreeBSD-SA-14:18 (rev 269686). |
1000716 | September 16, 2014 | 10-STABLE after FreeBSD-SA-14:19 (rev 271667). |
1000717 | September 18, 2014 | 10-STABLE after i915 HW context support (rev 271816). |
1001000 | October 2, 2014 | 10.1-RC1 after releng/10.1 branch (rev 272463). |
1001500 | October 2, 2014 | 10-STABLE after releng/10.1 branch (rev 272464). |
1001501 | October 21, 2014 | 10-STABLE after FreeBSD-SA-14:20, FreeBSD-SA-14:22, and FreeBSD-SA-14:23 (rev 273411). |
1001502 | November 4, 2014 | 10-STABLE after FreeBSD-SA-14:23, FreeBSD-SA-14:24, and FreeBSD-SA-14:25 (rev 274162). |
1001503 | November 25, 2014 | 10-STABLE after merging new libraries/utilities (dpv and figpar) for data throughput visualization (rev 275040). |
1001504 | December 13, 2014 | 10-STABLE after merging an important fix to the LLVM vectorizer, which could lead to buffer overruns in some cases (rev 275742). |
1001505 | January 3, 2015 | 10-STABLE after merging some arm constants in r276312 (rev 276633). |
1001506 | January 12, 2015 | 10-STABLE after merging max table size update for yacc (rev 277087). |
1001507 | January 27, 2015 | 10-STABLE after changes to the UDP tunneling callback to provide a context pointer and the source sockaddr (rev 277790). |
1001508 | February 18, 2015 | 10-STABLE after addition of the
CDAI_TYPE_EXT_INQ request type (rev
278974). |
1001509 | February 25, 2015 | 10-STABLE after FreeBSD-EN-15:01.vt, FreeBSD-EN-15:02.openssl, FreeBSD-EN-15:03.freebsd-update, FreeBSD-SA-15:04.igmp, and FreeBSD-SA-15:05.bind (rev 279287). |
1001511 | 19 March, 2015 | 10-STABLE after sys/capability.h is
renamed to sys/capsicum.h (rev
280224/). |
1001512 | 24 March, 2015 | 10-STABLE after addition of new mtio(4), sa(4) ioctls (rev 281954). |
1001513 | 24 April, 2015 | 10-STABLE after starting the process of removing the use of the deprecated "M_FLOWID" flag from the network code (rev 281955). |
1100000 | October 10, 2013 | 11.0-CURRENT (rev 256284). |
1100001 | October 19, 2013 | 11.0-CURRENT after addition of support for "first
boot" rc.d scripts, so ports can make
use of this (rev 256776). |
1100002 | November 5, 2013 | 11.0-CURRENT after dropping support for historic ioctls (rev 257696). |
1100003 | November 17, 2013 | 11.0-CURRENT after iconv changes (rev 258284). |
1100004 | December 15, 2013 | 11.0-CURRENT after the behavior change of
gss_pseudo_random introduced in
r259286 (rev 259424). |
1100005 | December 28, 2013 | 11.0-CURRENT after r259951 - Do not coalesce entries
in vm_map_stack() (rev
260010). |
1100006 | January 28, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after upgrades of libelf and libdwarf (rev 261246). |
1100007 | January 30, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after upgrade of libc++ to 3.4 release (rev 261283). |
1100008 | February 14, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after libc++ 3.4 ABI compatibility fix (rev 261801). |
1100009 | February 16, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after upgrade of llvm/clang to 3.4 release (rev 261991). |
1100010 | February 28, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after upgrade of ncurses to 5.9 release (rev 262629). |
1100011 | March 13, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after ABI change in struct if_data (rev 263102). |
1100012 | March 14, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after removal of Novell IPX protocol support (rev 263140). |
1100013 | March 14, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after removal of AppleTalk protocol support (rev 263152). |
1100014 | March 16, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after renaming
<sys/capability.h> to
<sys/capsicum.h> to avoid a
clash with similarly named headers in other operating
systems. A compatibility header is left in place to limit
build breakage, but will be deprecated in due course
(rev 263235). |
1100015 | March 22, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after cnt rename to
vm_cnt (rev
263620). |
1100016 | March 23, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after addition of
armv6hf TARGET_ARCH
(rev 263660). |
1100017 | April 4, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after GCC support for
__block definition (rev
264121). |
1100018 | April 6, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after support for UDP-Lite protocol (RFC 3828) (rev 264212). |
1100019 | April 8, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after FreeBSD-SA-14:06.openssl (rev 264265). |
1100020 | May 1, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after removing lindev in favor of having /dev/full by default (rev 265212). |
1100021 | May 6, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after src.opts.mk
changes, decoupling make.conf(5) from
buildworld (rev
265419). |
1100022 | May 30, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after changes to strcasecmp(3),
moving strcasecmp_l() and
strncasecmp_l() from
<string.h> to
<strings.h> for POSIX 2008
compliance (rev 266865). |
1100023 | June 13, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after the CUSE library and kernel module have been attached to the build by default (rev 267440). |
1100024 | June 27, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after sysctl(3) API change (rev 267992). |
1100025 | June 30, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after regex(3) library update to add “>” and “<” delimiters (rev 268066). |
1100026 | July 1, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after the internal interface between the NFS modules, including the krpc, was changed by (rev 268115). |
1100027 | July 8, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after FreeBSD-SA-14:17.kmem (rev 268431). |
1100028 | July 21, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after hdestroy()
compliance fix changed ABI (rev
268945). |
1100029 | August 3, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after SOCK_DGRAM
bug fix (rev 269489). |
1100030 | September 1, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after SOCK_RAW
sockets were changed to not modify packets at all (rev
270929). |
1100031 | September 9, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after FreeBSD-SA-14:18.openssl (rev 269686). |
1100032 | September 11, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after API changes to
ifa_ifwithbroadaddr ,
ifa_ifwithdstaddr ,
ifa_ifwithnet , and
ifa_ifwithroute (rev
271438). |
1100033 | September 9, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after changing
access , eaccess , and
faccessat to validate the mode argument
(rev 271657). |
1100034 | September 16, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after FreeBSD-SA-14:19.tcp (rev 271666). |
1100035 | September 17, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after i915 HW context support (rev 271705). |
1100036 | September 17, 2014 | Version bump to have ABI note distinguish binaries ready for strict mmap(2) flags checking (rev 271724). |
1100037 | October 6, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after addition of explicit_bzero(3) (rev 272673). |
1100038 | October 11, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after cleanup of TCP wrapper headers (rev 272951). |
1100039 | October 18, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after removal of
MAP_RENAME and
MAP_NORESERVE (rev
273250). |
1100040 | October 21, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after FreeBSD-SA-14:23 (rev 273146). |
1100041 | October 30, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after API changes to
syscall_register ,
syscall32_register ,
syscall_register_helper and
syscall32_register_helper (rev
273707). |
1100042 | November 3, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after a change to struct
tcpcb (rev
274046). |
1100043 | November 4, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after enabling vt(4) by default (rev 274085). |
1100044 | November 4, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after adding new libraries/utilities (dpv and figpar) for data throughput visualization (rev 274116). |
1100045 | November 4, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after FreeBSD-SA-14:23, FreeBSD-SA-14:24, and FreeBSD-SA-14:25 (rev 274162). |
1100046 | November 13, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after kern_poll
signature change (rev 274462). |
1100047 | November 13, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after removal of no-at version
of VFS syscalls helpers, like kern_open
(rev 274476). |
1100048 | December 1, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after starting the process of removing the use of the deprecated "M_FLOWID" flag from the network code (rev 275358). |
1100049 | December 9, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after importing an important fix to the LLVM vectorizer, which could lead to buffer overruns in some cases (rev 275633). |
1100050 | December 12, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after adding AES-ICM and AES-GCM to OpenCrypto (rev 275732). |
1100051 | December 23, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after removing old NFS client and server code from the kernel (rev 276096). |
1100052 | December 31, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after upgrade of clang, llvm and lldb to 3.5.0 release (rev 276479). |
1100053 | January 7, 2015 | 11.0-CURRENT after MCLGET() gained a return value (rev 276750). |
1100054 | January 15, 2015 | 11.0-CURRENT after rewrite of callout subsystem (rev 277213). |
1100055 | January 22, 2015 | 11.0-CURRENT after reverting callout changes in r277213 (rev 277528). |
1100056 | January 23, 2015 | 11.0-CURRENT after addition of
futimens and
utimensat system calls
(rev 277610). |
1100057 | January 29, 2015 | 11.0-CURRENT after removal of d_thread_t (rev 277897). |
1100058 | February 5, 2015 | 11.0-CURRENT after addition of support for probing the SCSI VPD Extended Inquiry page (0x86) (rev 278228). |
1100059 | February 9, 2015 | 11.0-CURRENT after import of xz 5.2.0, which added multi-threaded compression and lzma gained libthr dependency (rev 278433). |
1100060 | February 16, 2015 | 11.0-CURRENT after forwarding
FBIO_BLANK
to framebuffer clients
(rev 278846). |
1100061 | February 18, 2015 | 11.0-CURRENT after CDAI_FLAG_NONE
addition (rev 278964). |
1100062 | February 23, 2015 | 11.0-CURRENT after mtio(4) and sa(4) API and ioctl(2) additions (rev 279221). |
1100063 | March 7, 2015 | 11.0-CURRENT after adding mutex support to the pps_ioctl() API in the kernel (rev 279728). |
1100064 | March 7, 2015 | 11.0-CURRENT after adding PPS support to USB serial drivers (rev 279729). |
1100065 | March 15, 2015 | 11.0-CURRENT after upgrading clang, llvm and lldb to 3.6.0 (rev 280031). |
1100066 | March 20, 2015 | 11.0-CURRENT after removal of SSLv2 support from OpenSSL (rev 280306). |
1100067 | March 25, 2015 | 11.0-CURRENT after removal of SSLv2 support from fetch(1) and fetch(3) (rev 280630). |
1100068 | April 6, 2015 | 11.0-CURRENT after change to net.inet6.ip6.mif6table sysctl (rev 281172). |
1100069 | April 15, 2015 | 11.0-CURRENT after removal of const qualifier from iconv(3) (rev 281550). |
1100071 | April 29, 2015 | 11.0-CURRENT after API/ABI change to smb(4) (rev 281985). |
1100072 | May 1, 2015 | 11.0-CURRENT after adding reallocarray(3) in libc (rev 282314). |
1100073 | May 8, 2015 | 11.0-CURRENT after extending the maximum number of allowed PCM channels in a PCM stream to 127 and decreasing the maximum number of sub-channels to 1 (rev 282650). |
1100074 | May 25, 2015 | 11.0-CURRENT after adding preliminary support for x86-64 Linux binaries (rev 283424), and upgrading clang and llvm to 3.6.1 (rev 283526). |
1100075 | May 27, 2015 | 11.0-CURRENT after dounmount() requiring a reference on the passed struct mount (rev 283602 ). |
1100076 | June 4, 2015 | 11.0-CURRENT after disabled generation of legacy formatted password databases entries by default. (rev 283983). |
1100077 | June 10, 2015 | 11.0-CURRENT after API changes to
lim_cur ,
lim_max , and
lim_rlimit (rev
284215). |
Note that 2.2-STABLE sometimes identifies itself as “2.2.5-STABLE” after the 2.2.5-RELEASE. The pattern used to be year followed by the month, but we decided to change it to a more straightforward major/minor system starting from 2.2. This is because the parallel development on several branches made it infeasible to classify the releases merely by their real release dates. Do not worry about old -CURRENTs; they are listed here just for reference.